US20230247776A1 - Display device, and method and apparatus for manufacturing the same - Google Patents
Display device, and method and apparatus for manufacturing the same Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20230247776A1 US20230247776A1 US18/297,582 US202318297582A US2023247776A1 US 20230247776 A1 US20230247776 A1 US 20230247776A1 US 202318297582 A US202318297582 A US 202318297582A US 2023247776 A1 US2023247776 A1 US 2023247776A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- jig
- unit
- cover window
- panel member
- display panel
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Pending
Links
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 title abstract description 146
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 title description 91
- 239000012790 adhesive layer Substances 0.000 claims description 247
- 238000010030 laminating Methods 0.000 abstract description 5
- 238000010521 absorption reaction Methods 0.000 description 70
- 239000010410 layer Substances 0.000 description 60
- 239000000853 adhesive Substances 0.000 description 48
- 230000001070 adhesive effect Effects 0.000 description 48
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 42
- 230000002829 reductive effect Effects 0.000 description 36
- 230000007547 defect Effects 0.000 description 35
- 239000010408 film Substances 0.000 description 23
- 238000005538 encapsulation Methods 0.000 description 20
- 230000006835 compression Effects 0.000 description 18
- 238000007906 compression Methods 0.000 description 18
- 239000000758 substrate Substances 0.000 description 18
- 239000012044 organic layer Substances 0.000 description 17
- 230000005484 gravity Effects 0.000 description 12
- 239000011368 organic material Substances 0.000 description 10
- 238000002161 passivation Methods 0.000 description 10
- 239000013013 elastic material Substances 0.000 description 8
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 6
- 239000000178 monomer Substances 0.000 description 6
- 239000010409 thin film Substances 0.000 description 6
- 238000003475 lamination Methods 0.000 description 5
- 229910052751 metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 description 5
- 239000004033 plastic Substances 0.000 description 5
- 229920003023 plastic Polymers 0.000 description 5
- -1 poly(3,4-ethylenedioxythiophene) Polymers 0.000 description 5
- PXHVJJICTQNCMI-UHFFFAOYSA-N Nickel Chemical compound [Ni] PXHVJJICTQNCMI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- KDLHZDBZIXYQEI-UHFFFAOYSA-N Palladium Chemical compound [Pd] KDLHZDBZIXYQEI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 239000004642 Polyimide Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000011521 glass Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000011777 magnesium Substances 0.000 description 4
- BASFCYQUMIYNBI-UHFFFAOYSA-N platinum Chemical compound [Pt] BASFCYQUMIYNBI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 229920001721 polyimide Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 239000002356 single layer Substances 0.000 description 4
- VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silicium dioxide Chemical compound O=[Si]=O VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 239000011575 calcium Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000011651 chromium Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000010931 gold Substances 0.000 description 3
- 229910010272 inorganic material Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 239000011229 interlayer Substances 0.000 description 3
- 229910052749 magnesium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 239000007769 metal material Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 229910052709 silver Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 229910052779 Neodymium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 229920001609 Poly(3,4-ethylenedioxythiophene) Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229910004205 SiNX Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- XUIMIQQOPSSXEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silicon Chemical compound [Si] XUIMIQQOPSSXEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- GWEVSGVZZGPLCZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Titan oxide Chemical compound O=[Ti]=O GWEVSGVZZGPLCZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- XLOMVQKBTHCTTD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Zinc monoxide Chemical compound [Zn]=O XLOMVQKBTHCTTD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000002313 adhesive film Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910045601 alloy Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000000956 alloy Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910052782 aluminium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 229910021417 amorphous silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 229910052791 calcium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 229910052804 chromium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 150000001875 compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 230000003247 decreasing effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 229910052737 gold Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 238000002347 injection Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000007924 injection Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000011147 inorganic material Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000003780 insertion Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000037431 insertion Effects 0.000 description 2
- 229910052741 iridium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 229910052744 lithium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 229910052759 nickel Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 229910052763 palladium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 229910052697 platinum Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 229920000553 poly(phenylenevinylene) Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229920000058 polyacrylate Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229910021420 polycrystalline silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 229910052710 silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000010703 silicon Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000010936 titanium Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000012780 transparent material Substances 0.000 description 2
- OYPRJOBELJOOCE-UHFFFAOYSA-N Calcium Chemical compound [Ca] OYPRJOBELJOOCE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VYZAMTAEIAYCRO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Chromium Chemical compound [Cr] VYZAMTAEIAYCRO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000004593 Epoxy Substances 0.000 description 1
- WHXSMMKQMYFTQS-UHFFFAOYSA-N Lithium Chemical compound [Li] WHXSMMKQMYFTQS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FYYHWMGAXLPEAU-UHFFFAOYSA-N Magnesium Chemical compound [Mg] FYYHWMGAXLPEAU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000004698 Polyethylene Substances 0.000 description 1
- BQCADISMDOOEFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silver Chemical compound [Ag] BQCADISMDOOEFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910000831 Steel Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- RTAQQCXQSZGOHL-UHFFFAOYSA-N Titanium Chemical compound [Ti] RTAQQCXQSZGOHL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N aluminium Chemical compound [Al] XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PNEYBMLMFCGWSK-UHFFFAOYSA-N aluminium oxide Inorganic materials [O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[Al+3].[Al+3] PNEYBMLMFCGWSK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000005452 bending Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000015572 biosynthetic process Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910052681 coesite Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- XCJYREBRNVKWGJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N copper(II) phthalocyanine Chemical compound [Cu+2].C12=CC=CC=C2C(N=C2[N-]C(C3=CC=CC=C32)=N2)=NC1=NC([C]1C=CC=CC1=1)=NC=1N=C1[C]3C=CC=CC3=C2[N-]1 XCJYREBRNVKWGJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052593 corundum Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910052906 cristobalite Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000000151 deposition Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000008021 deposition Effects 0.000 description 1
- 125000004386 diacrylate group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000005611 electricity Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000014509 gene expression Effects 0.000 description 1
- PCHJSUWPFVWCPO-UHFFFAOYSA-N gold Chemical compound [Au] PCHJSUWPFVWCPO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- RBTKNAXYKSUFRK-UHFFFAOYSA-N heliogen blue Chemical compound [Cu].[N-]1C2=C(C=CC=C3)C3=C1N=C([N-]1)C3=CC=CC=C3C1=NC([N-]1)=C(C=CC=C3)C3=C1N=C([N-]1)C3=CC=CC=C3C1=N2 RBTKNAXYKSUFRK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000005525 hole transport Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000012535 impurity Substances 0.000 description 1
- PJXISJQVUVHSOJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N indium(III) oxide Inorganic materials [O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[In+3].[In+3] PJXISJQVUVHSOJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- AMGQUBHHOARCQH-UHFFFAOYSA-N indium;oxotin Chemical compound [In].[Sn]=O AMGQUBHHOARCQH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000007641 inkjet printing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000002484 inorganic compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000011810 insulating material Substances 0.000 description 1
- GKOZUEZYRPOHIO-UHFFFAOYSA-N iridium atom Chemical compound [Ir] GKOZUEZYRPOHIO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000000670 limiting effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000004973 liquid crystal related substance Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910044991 metal oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 150000004706 metal oxides Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- IBHBKWKFFTZAHE-UHFFFAOYSA-N n-[4-[4-(n-naphthalen-1-ylanilino)phenyl]phenyl]-n-phenylnaphthalen-1-amine Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1N(C=1C2=CC=CC=C2C=CC=1)C1=CC=C(C=2C=CC(=CC=2)N(C=2C=CC=CC=2)C=2C3=CC=CC=C3C=CC=2)C=C1 IBHBKWKFFTZAHE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QEFYFXOXNSNQGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N neodymium atom Chemical compound [Nd] QEFYFXOXNSNQGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000004767 nitrides Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000003921 oil Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000002894 organic compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000036961 partial effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000000059 patterning Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000000149 penetrating effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229920000515 polycarbonate Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004417 polycarbonate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000573 polyethylene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000139 polyethylene terephthalate Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000005020 polyethylene terephthalate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920002098 polyfluorene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000642 polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 230000000379 polymerizing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001681 protective effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000002990 reinforced plastic Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000007650 screen-printing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000007789 sealing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000377 silicon dioxide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052814 silicon oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000004332 silver Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000007779 soft material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000004544 sputter deposition Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000010935 stainless steel Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910001220 stainless steel Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000010959 steel Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052682 stishovite Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229920003002 synthetic resin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000000057 synthetic resin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052719 titanium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- TVIVIEFSHFOWTE-UHFFFAOYSA-K tri(quinolin-8-yloxy)alumane Chemical compound [Al+3].C1=CN=C2C([O-])=CC=CC2=C1.C1=CN=C2C([O-])=CC=CC2=C1.C1=CN=C2C([O-])=CC=CC2=C1 TVIVIEFSHFOWTE-UHFFFAOYSA-K 0.000 description 1
- 229910052905 tridymite Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000001771 vacuum deposition Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000000007 visual effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910001845 yogo sapphire Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- YVTHLONGBIQYBO-UHFFFAOYSA-N zinc indium(3+) oxygen(2-) Chemical compound [O--].[Zn++].[In+3] YVTHLONGBIQYBO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000011787 zinc oxide Substances 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H05—ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H05K—PRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
- H05K5/00—Casings, cabinets or drawers for electric apparatus
- H05K5/0017—Casings, cabinets or drawers for electric apparatus with operator interface units
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B32—LAYERED PRODUCTS
- B32B—LAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
- B32B3/00—Layered products comprising a layer with external or internal discontinuities or unevennesses, or a layer of non-planar shape; Layered products comprising a layer having particular features of form
- B32B3/02—Layered products comprising a layer with external or internal discontinuities or unevennesses, or a layer of non-planar shape; Layered products comprising a layer having particular features of form characterised by features of form at particular places, e.g. in edge regions
- B32B3/04—Layered products comprising a layer with external or internal discontinuities or unevennesses, or a layer of non-planar shape; Layered products comprising a layer having particular features of form characterised by features of form at particular places, e.g. in edge regions characterised by at least one layer folded at the edge, e.g. over another layer ; characterised by at least one layer enveloping or enclosing a material
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B32—LAYERED PRODUCTS
- B32B—LAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
- B32B3/00—Layered products comprising a layer with external or internal discontinuities or unevennesses, or a layer of non-planar shape; Layered products comprising a layer having particular features of form
- B32B3/26—Layered products comprising a layer with external or internal discontinuities or unevennesses, or a layer of non-planar shape; Layered products comprising a layer having particular features of form characterised by a particular shape of the outline of the cross-section of a continuous layer; characterised by a layer with cavities or internal voids ; characterised by an apertured layer
- B32B3/28—Layered products comprising a layer with external or internal discontinuities or unevennesses, or a layer of non-planar shape; Layered products comprising a layer having particular features of form characterised by a particular shape of the outline of the cross-section of a continuous layer; characterised by a layer with cavities or internal voids ; characterised by an apertured layer characterised by a layer comprising a deformed thin sheet, i.e. the layer having its entire thickness deformed out of the plane, e.g. corrugated, crumpled
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B32—LAYERED PRODUCTS
- B32B—LAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
- B32B37/00—Methods or apparatus for laminating, e.g. by curing or by ultrasonic bonding
- B32B37/0046—Methods or apparatus for laminating, e.g. by curing or by ultrasonic bonding characterised by constructional aspects of the apparatus
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B32—LAYERED PRODUCTS
- B32B—LAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
- B32B37/00—Methods or apparatus for laminating, e.g. by curing or by ultrasonic bonding
- B32B37/14—Methods or apparatus for laminating, e.g. by curing or by ultrasonic bonding characterised by the properties of the layers
- B32B37/16—Methods or apparatus for laminating, e.g. by curing or by ultrasonic bonding characterised by the properties of the layers with all layers existing as coherent layers before laminating
- B32B37/18—Methods or apparatus for laminating, e.g. by curing or by ultrasonic bonding characterised by the properties of the layers with all layers existing as coherent layers before laminating involving the assembly of discrete sheets or panels only
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B32—LAYERED PRODUCTS
- B32B—LAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
- B32B37/00—Methods or apparatus for laminating, e.g. by curing or by ultrasonic bonding
- B32B37/30—Partial laminating
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B32—LAYERED PRODUCTS
- B32B—LAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
- B32B38/00—Ancillary operations in connection with laminating processes
- B32B38/18—Handling of layers or the laminate
- B32B38/1825—Handling of layers or the laminate characterised by the control or constructional features of devices for tensioning, stretching or registration
- B32B38/1833—Positioning, e.g. registration or centering
- B32B38/1841—Positioning, e.g. registration or centering during laying up
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B32—LAYERED PRODUCTS
- B32B—LAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
- B32B38/00—Ancillary operations in connection with laminating processes
- B32B38/18—Handling of layers or the laminate
- B32B38/1866—Handling of layers or the laminate conforming the layers or laminate to a convex or concave profile
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B32—LAYERED PRODUCTS
- B32B—LAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
- B32B7/00—Layered products characterised by the relation between layers; Layered products characterised by the relative orientation of features between layers, or by the relative values of a measurable parameter between layers, i.e. products comprising layers having different physical, chemical or physicochemical properties; Layered products characterised by the interconnection of layers
- B32B7/04—Interconnection of layers
- B32B7/12—Interconnection of layers using interposed adhesives or interposed materials with bonding properties
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
- G02F1/00—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
- G02F1/01—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour
- G02F1/13—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
- G02F1/133—Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
- G02F1/1333—Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
- G02F1/133305—Flexible substrates, e.g. plastics, organic film
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
- G02F1/00—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
- G02F1/01—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour
- G02F1/13—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
- G02F1/133—Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
- G02F1/1333—Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
- G02F1/133308—Support structures for LCD panels, e.g. frames or bezels
- G02F1/133331—Cover glasses
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F1/00—Details not covered by groups G06F3/00 - G06F13/00 and G06F21/00
- G06F1/16—Constructional details or arrangements
- G06F1/1601—Constructional details related to the housing of computer displays, e.g. of CRT monitors, of flat displays
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09F—DISPLAYING; ADVERTISING; SIGNS; LABELS OR NAME-PLATES; SEALS
- G09F9/00—Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements
- G09F9/30—Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements in which the desired character or characters are formed by combining individual elements
- G09F9/301—Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements in which the desired character or characters are formed by combining individual elements flexible foldable or roll-able electronic displays, e.g. thin LCD, OLED
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04M—TELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
- H04M1/00—Substation equipment, e.g. for use by subscribers
- H04M1/02—Constructional features of telephone sets
- H04M1/0202—Portable telephone sets, e.g. cordless phones, mobile phones or bar type handsets
- H04M1/026—Details of the structure or mounting of specific components
- H04M1/0266—Details of the structure or mounting of specific components for a display module assembly
- H04M1/0268—Details of the structure or mounting of specific components for a display module assembly including a flexible display panel
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H05—ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H05K—PRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
- H05K5/00—Casings, cabinets or drawers for electric apparatus
- H05K5/02—Details
- H05K5/0217—Mechanical details of casings
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K50/00—Organic light-emitting devices
- H10K50/80—Constructional details
- H10K50/84—Passivation; Containers; Encapsulations
- H10K50/841—Self-supporting sealing arrangements
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K59/00—Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
- H10K59/80—Constructional details
- H10K59/87—Passivation; Containers; Encapsulations
- H10K59/871—Self-supporting sealing arrangements
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K77/00—Constructional details of devices covered by this subclass and not covered by groups H10K10/80, H10K30/80, H10K50/80 or H10K59/80
- H10K77/10—Substrates, e.g. flexible substrates
- H10K77/111—Flexible substrates
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B32—LAYERED PRODUCTS
- B32B—LAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
- B32B2307/00—Properties of the layers or laminate
- B32B2307/40—Properties of the layers or laminate having particular optical properties
- B32B2307/412—Transparent
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B32—LAYERED PRODUCTS
- B32B—LAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
- B32B2457/00—Electrical equipment
- B32B2457/20—Displays, e.g. liquid crystal displays, plasma displays
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B32—LAYERED PRODUCTS
- B32B—LAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
- B32B2457/00—Electrical equipment
- B32B2457/20—Displays, e.g. liquid crystal displays, plasma displays
- B32B2457/206—Organic displays, e.g. OLED
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B32—LAYERED PRODUCTS
- B32B—LAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
- B32B2457/00—Electrical equipment
- B32B2457/20—Displays, e.g. liquid crystal displays, plasma displays
- B32B2457/208—Touch screens
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K2102/00—Constructional details relating to the organic devices covered by this subclass
- H10K2102/301—Details of OLEDs
- H10K2102/311—Flexible OLED
-
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y02—TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
- Y02E—REDUCTION OF GREENHOUSE GAS [GHG] EMISSIONS, RELATED TO ENERGY GENERATION, TRANSMISSION OR DISTRIBUTION
- Y02E10/00—Energy generation through renewable energy sources
- Y02E10/50—Photovoltaic [PV] energy
- Y02E10/549—Organic PV cells
-
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y02—TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
- Y02P—CLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN THE PRODUCTION OR PROCESSING OF GOODS
- Y02P70/00—Climate change mitigation technologies in the production process for final industrial or consumer products
- Y02P70/50—Manufacturing or production processes characterised by the final manufactured product
-
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y10—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
- Y10T—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER US CLASSIFICATION
- Y10T156/00—Adhesive bonding and miscellaneous chemical manufacture
- Y10T156/10—Methods of surface bonding and/or assembly therefor
-
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y10—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
- Y10T—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER US CLASSIFICATION
- Y10T156/00—Adhesive bonding and miscellaneous chemical manufacture
- Y10T156/10—Methods of surface bonding and/or assembly therefor
- Y10T156/1002—Methods of surface bonding and/or assembly therefor with permanent bending or reshaping or surface deformation of self sustaining lamina
-
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y10—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
- Y10T—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER US CLASSIFICATION
- Y10T156/00—Adhesive bonding and miscellaneous chemical manufacture
- Y10T156/17—Surface bonding means and/or assemblymeans with work feeding or handling means
- Y10T156/1702—For plural parts or plural areas of single part
- Y10T156/1744—Means bringing discrete articles into assembled relationship
-
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y10—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
- Y10T—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER US CLASSIFICATION
- Y10T428/00—Stock material or miscellaneous articles
- Y10T428/24—Structurally defined web or sheet [e.g., overall dimension, etc.]
- Y10T428/24628—Nonplanar uniform thickness material
-
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y10—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
- Y10T—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER US CLASSIFICATION
- Y10T428/00—Stock material or miscellaneous articles
- Y10T428/24—Structurally defined web or sheet [e.g., overall dimension, etc.]
- Y10T428/24628—Nonplanar uniform thickness material
- Y10T428/24653—Differential nonplanarity at margin
Definitions
- aspects of embodiments of the present invention relate to a display device, and a method and apparatus for manufacturing the display device.
- Portable electronic devices based on portability are widely used.
- Portable electronic devices that have recently been widely used include small electronic devices such as mobile phones as well as tablet personal computers (PCs).
- portable electronic devices include a display device for providing visual information such as an image to a user.
- display devices such as flexible display devices
- a set angle for example, a predetermined angle
- flexible display devices that may bend at a set angle may be manufactured using a flexible process, such as being flexibly manufactured. Since a flexible display device may be formed of a flexible material, the flexible display device may have any of various shapes.
- a flexible display device may be manufactured by forming a light-emitting unit on a substrate to form a display unit, and sealing the display unit by using an encapsulation unit, which may increase a lifetime of the display unit.
- the substrate may be formed of a flexible material, and the encapsulation unit may be formed, for example, as a substrate or a thin film.
- Embodiments of the present invention provide for a display device having a curved shape (for example, having an arc shape or a degree of curvature) that may enable efficient mass production, high reliability, and high quality. Further embodiments provide for a method and apparatus for manufacturing the display device.
- a display device includes a cover window including a curved portion, and a panel member laminated on the cover window.
- the panel member may be smaller in at least one of a length or a width than the cover window.
- the display device may further include an adhesive layer between the panel member and the cover window.
- the cover window may further include a flat portion extending from the curved portion.
- the panel member may be laminated entirely on the flat portion.
- the curved portion may include a plurality of curved portions.
- the panel member may include a first panel portion laminated on the flat portion, and a second panel portion extending in a curved shape from the first panel portion and laminated on the curved portion.
- the cover window may have a curved surface having a curvature radius.
- a curvature radius of a portion of the cover window may be different from a curvature radius of another portion of the cover window.
- the panel member may be formed on a recessed outer surface of the cover window or a protruding outer surface of the cover window.
- the panel member may include at least one of a display panel or a touch screen panel (TSP).
- TSP touch screen panel
- the panel member may be flexible.
- a method of manufacturing a display device includes mounting a cover window including a curved portion on a first jig including a curved portion, mounting a panel member on a second jig that conforms to a surface of the first jig, and laminating the cover window to the panel member by moving a first one of the first jig or the second jig to a first other one of the first jig or the second jig.
- At least a portion of the panel member may contact a surface of the second jig.
- the panel member may be bent along an outer surface of the second jig during the mounting of the panel member on the second jig.
- the panel member may be smaller in at least one of a length or a width than the cover window.
- the panel member may be flat during the mounting of the panel member on the second jig.
- the laminating of the cover window to the panel member may include partially curving the panel member by the moving of the first one of the first jig or the second jig.
- the first one of the first jig or the second jig may be above the first other one of the first jig or the second jig, or the first other one of the first jig or the second jig may be above the first one of the first jig or the second jig.
- a second one of the first jig or the second jig may be formed by protruding toward or recessing away from a second other one of the first jig or the second jig.
- the second other one of the first jig or the second jig may be formed by recessing away from or protruding toward the second one of the first jig or the second jig.
- the mounting of the panel member may include fixing the panel member to the second jig.
- the panel member may be flexible.
- Outer surfaces of the cover window and the first jig may be curved surfaces each having a curvature radius.
- a curvature radius of a portion of the cover window may be different from a curvature radius of another portion of the cover window.
- a curvature radius of a portion of an outer surface of the first jig may be different from a curvature radius of another portion of the outer surface of the first jig.
- the panel member may be attached to a recessed outer surface of the cover window or a protruding outer surface of the cover window.
- the panel member may include at least one of a display panel or a touch screen panel (TSP).
- TSP touch screen panel
- an apparatus for manufacturing a display device includes a first jig including a mount surface that is partially curved to conform to a surface of a cover window, a second jig including a surface conforming to the mount surface and configured to contact a panel member, and a driving unit connected to a first one of the first jig or the second jig and configured to move the first one of the first jig or the second jig.
- the first jig may further include a first fixing unit for fixing the cover window to the mount surface.
- the second jig may further include a second fixing unit for fixing the panel member to the surface conforming to the mount surface.
- the first fixing unit or the second fixing unit may include an absorption unit, and an absorption pump for evacuating air from the absorption unit.
- the apparatus may further include a cushion unit at an outer surface of at least one of the first jig or the second jig.
- the cushion unit may include a plurality of cushion units at respective ends of the at least one of the first jig or the second jig.
- a distance between the cushion units may be less than at least one of a length or a width of the panel member.
- a second one of the first jig or the second jig may be formed by protruding toward or recessing away from another one of the first jig or the second jig.
- the other one of the first jig or the second jig may be formed by recessing away from or protruding toward the second one of the first jig or the second jig.
- An outer surface of the cover window and an outer surface of the first jig on which the cover window is configured to be seated may be curved surfaces each having a curvature radius.
- a curvature radius of a portion of the cover window may be different from a curvature radius of another portion of the cover window.
- a curvature radius of a portion of an outer surface of the first jig on which the cover window is configured to be seated may be different from a curvature radius of another portion of the outer surface of the first jig.
- the panel member may be configured to be attached to a recessed outer surface of the cover window or a protruding outer surface of the cover window.
- the panel member may include at least one of a display panel or a touch screen panel (TSP).
- TSP touch screen panel
- the apparatus may further include a clamping unit spaced from the second jig and configured to support the panel member.
- the clamping unit may include a plurality of clamping units.
- a distance between the clamping units may be less than at least one of a length or a width of the panel member when the clamping units support the panel member.
- the apparatus may further include a linear driving unit coupled to the clamping unit and configured to linearly move the clamping unit.
- the linear driving unit may be further configured to linearly move the clamping unit in a same direction as a moving direction of the second jig.
- the linear driving unit may be further configured to linearly move the clamping unit in a diagonal direction of a moving direction of the second jig.
- At least one of the first jig or the second jig may further include a cushion unit at an outer surface of the at least one of the first jig or the second jig.
- a second one of the first jig or the second jig may be formed by protruding toward or recessing away from another one of the first jig or the second jig.
- the other one of the first jig or the second jig may be formed by protruding toward or recessing away from the second one of the first jig or the second jig.
- An outer surface of the cover window and an outer surface of the first jig on which the cover window is configured to be seated may be curved surfaces each having a curvature radius.
- a curvature radius of a portion of the cover window may be different from a curvature radius of another portion of the cover window.
- a curvature radius of a portion of an outer surface of the jig on which the cover window is configured to be seated may be different from a curvature radius of another portion of the outer surface of the first jig.
- the panel member may be configured to be attached to a recessed outer surface of the cover window or a protruding outer surface of the cover window.
- the panel member may include least one of a display panel or a touch screen panel (TSP).
- TSP touch screen panel
- FIG. 1 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device according to an embodiment of the present invention
- FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display panel of the display device of FIG. 1 ;
- FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention
- FIGS. 4 A through 4 C are cross-sectional views illustrating a method of manufacturing the display device of FIG. 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention
- FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device according to another embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 5 according to an embodiment of the present invention
- FIGS. 7 A through 7 C are cross-sectional views illustrating a method of manufacturing the display device of FIG. 5 according to an embodiment of the present invention
- FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 5 according to another embodiment of the present invention.
- FIGS. 9 A through 9 C are cross-sectional views illustrating a method of manufacturing the display device of FIG. 5 according to another embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 5 according to yet another embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method of manufacturing the display device of FIG. 5 according to yet another embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 5 according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 13 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method of manufacturing the display device of FIG. 5 according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device according to yet another embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 15 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 14 , according to an embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 14 , according to another embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 17 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 14 , according to yet another embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 14 , according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 19 , according to an embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 19 , according to another embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 19 , according to yet another embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 23 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 19 , according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 25 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 24 , according to an embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 26 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 24 , according to another embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 24 , according to yet another embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 24 , according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 30 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 29 , according to an embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 31 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 29 , according to another embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 29 , according to yet another embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 33 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 29 , according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 34 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 34 , according to an embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 36 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 34 , according to another embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 34 , according to yet another embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 34 , according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention.
- the term “and/or” includes any and all combinations of one or more of the associated listed items. Expressions such as “at least one of,” when preceding a list of elements, modify the entire list of elements and do not modify the individual elements of the list. As used herein, the singular forms “a,” “an,” and “the” are intended to include the plural forms as well, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise. It will be further understood that the terms “comprises,” “comprising,” “includes,” and/or “including,” when used herein, specify the presence of stated features, integers, steps, operations, elements, and/or components, but do not preclude the presence or addition of one or more other features, integers, steps, operations, elements, components, and/or groups thereof. It will be understood that, although the terms first, second, third, etc., may be used herein to describe various elements, these elements should not be limited by these terms. These terms are only used to distinguish one element from another element.
- examples of display devices include various display devices.
- examples of display devices include liquid crystal display devices and organic light-emitting display devices.
- the display devices are organic light-emitting display devices.
- FIG. 1 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display panel 130 of the display device 100 of FIG. 1 .
- the display device 100 includes a cover window 110 , a panel member (for example, display panel 130 ), and an adhesive layer 120 .
- the cover window 110 is partially curved. That is, the cover window 110 has a flat portion 111 (on which the display panel 130 is laminated, with the adhesive layer 120 therebetween) and at least one end of the flat portion 111 is curved (e.g., a curved portion 112 ). As shown in FIG. 1 , both ends of the flat portion 111 are curved (e.g., two curved portions 112 ). As depicted, the cover window 110 includes the flat portion 111 and curved portions 112 that extend from the flat portion 111 . The curved portions 112 are formed on both ends of the flat portion 111 .
- the panel member may include at least one of the display panel 130 or a touch screen panel (TSP).
- the panel member may include only the display panel 130 and may be attached to the cover window 110 .
- the panel member may include only the TSP and may be attached to the cover window 110 .
- the panel member may include the display panel 130 and the TSP, and may be attached to the cover window 110 .
- the panel member may include the display panel 130 and the TSP, and may be attached to the cover window 110 .
- the panel member includes only the display panel 130 .
- the display panel 130 may be flexible.
- the display panel 130 may be formed such that a size of the display panel 130 is different from a size of the cover window 110 . As shown, the display panel 130 is smaller than the cover window 110 .
- the display panel 130 is shorter in the at least one of a length or a width than the cover window 110 (due to the inward curvature of the cover window 110 ). For convenience of description, it will be assumed that the display panel 130 is shorter in width than the cover window 110 as described below in further detail.
- the display panel 130 may be laminated entirely on the flat portion 111 (and not on any of the curved portions 112 ).
- the display panel 130 includes a first substrate S and a light-emitting unit.
- the display panel 130 may include an encapsulation unit B formed on the light-emitting unit.
- the encapsulation unit B may be formed as a thin film.
- the encapsulation unit B may include a second substrate instead of or in addition to a thin film. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that the encapsulation unit B is formed as a thin film.
- the light-emitting unit is formed on the first substrate S.
- the light-emitting unit includes a thin film transistor (TFT, in this case a driving TFT), a passivation film 131 formed to cover the TFT, and an organic light-emitting device, such as an organic light emitting diode (OLED) 138 formed on the passivation film 131 .
- the first substrate S may be formed of a glass material, but the present invention is not limited thereto and, in other embodiments, the first substrate S may be formed of a plastic material or a metal material such as steel use stainless (SUS, or stainless steel) or titanium (Ti). In another embodiment, the first substrate S may include polyimide (PI). For convenience of description, it will be assumed that the first substrate S is formed of PI.
- a buffer layer 132 formed of an organic compound and/or an inorganic compound such as SiOx (x ⁇ 1) or SiNx (x ⁇ 1) is formed on a top surface of the first substrate S.
- An active layer 133 having a set pattern (for example, a predetermined pattern) is formed on the buffer layer 132 , and then is covered by a gate insulating layer 134 .
- the active layer 133 includes a source region 133 a and a drain region 133 c , and a channel region 133 b located between the source region 133 a and the drain region 133 c .
- the active layer 133 may be formed by forming an amorphous silicon film on the buffer layer 132 , crystallizing the amorphous silicon film to form a polycrystalline silicon film, and patterning the polycrystalline silicon film.
- the source and drain regions 133 a and 133 c of the active layer 133 are doped with impurities according to a type of the TFT such as a driving TFT (for example, driving TFT in FIG. 2 ) or a switching TFT.
- a gate electrode 135 corresponding to the channel region 113 b of the active layer 133 and an interlayer insulating layer 136 covering the gate electrode 135 are formed on a top surface of the gate insulating layer 134 .
- contact holes for example, via-hole H1
- a source electrode 137 a and a drain electrode 137 b are formed on the interlayer insulating layer 136 to respectively contact the source region 133 a and the drain region 133 c.
- a reflective film is formed at the same time (for example, in the same layer) as the source/drain electrodes 137 a and 137 b are formed as described above. Accordingly, each of the source/drain electrodes 137 a and 137 b may be formed of a material having high electrical conductivity and having a thickness great enough to reflect light.
- Each of the source/drain electrodes 137 a and 137 b may be formed of a metal material such as silver (Ag), magnesium (Mg), aluminum (Al), platinum (Pt), palladium (Pd), gold (Au), nickel (Ni), neodymium (Nd), iridium (Ir), chromium (Cr), lithium (Li), calcium (Ca), or a compound or alloy thereof.
- a metal material such as silver (Ag), magnesium (Mg), aluminum (Al), platinum (Pt), palladium (Pd), gold (Au), nickel (Ni), neodymium (Nd), iridium (Ir), chromium (Cr), lithium (Li), calcium (Ca), or a compound or alloy thereof.
- the passivation film 131 is formed on the TFT. Then a pixel electrode 138 a of the OLED 138 is formed on the passivation film 131 .
- the pixel electrode 138 a contacts the drain electrode 137 b of the TFT through a via-hole H2 formed in the passivation film 131 .
- the passivation film 131 may be formed of an inorganic material and/or an organic material and have a single-layer structure or a multi-layer structure. As shown in FIG. 2 , the passivation film 131 is formed as a planarization film having a flat top surface regardless of any roughness or irregularities of a bottom surface.
- the passivation film 131 may be formed of a transparent insulating material to achieve a resonance effect.
- a pixel-defining film 139 is formed of an organic material and/or an inorganic material to cover the pixel electrode 138 a and the passivation film 131 , and is opened to expose the pixel electrode 138 a .
- An organic light-emitting layer 138 b and a counter electrode 138 c are formed on at least the pixel electrode 138 a .
- the pixel electrode 138 a functions as an anode and the counter electrode 138 c functions as a cathode, or vice versa.
- the pixel electrode 138 a may be formed of a material having a high work function, such as indium tin oxide (ITO), indium zinc oxide (IZO), In 2 O 3 , or ZnO.
- the counter electrode 138 c may be formed of a metal material having a low work function such as Ag, Mg, Al, Pt, Pd, Au, Ni, Nd, Ir, Cr, Li, Ca, or a compound or alloy thereof.
- the counter electrode 138 c may be formed of Mg, Ag, or Al to have a small thickness to function as a semi-transmissive reflective film. Accordingly, the counter electrode 138 c may optically resonate to transmit light.
- the pixel electrode 138 a and the counter electrode 138 c are insulated from each other by the organic light-emitting layer 138 b , and apply voltages of different polarities to the organic light-emitting layer 138 b for the organic light-emitting layer 138 b to emit light.
- the organic light-emitting layer 138 b may be formed of a low molecular weight organic material or a high molecular weight organic material.
- the organic light-emitting layer 138 b may have a single-layer or multi-layer structure formed by stacking a hole injection layer (HIL), a hole transport layer (HTL), an emission layer (EML), an electron transport layer (ETL), and an electron injection layer (EIL).
- HIL hole injection layer
- HTL hole transport layer
- EML emission layer
- ETL electron transport layer
- EIL electron injection layer
- the low molecular weight organic material include copper phthalocyanine (CuPc), N,N′-Di(naphthalene-1-yl)-N,N′-diphenyl-benzidine (NPB), and tris-8-hydroxyquinoline aluminum (Alq3).
- the low molecular weight organic material is formed by using vacuum deposition.
- the HIL, the HTL, the ETL, and the EIL may be commonly applied to red, green, and blue pixels. Accordingly, in some embodiments, the common layers may cover all pixels, like the counter electrode 138 c.
- the organic light-emitting layer 138 b may have a structure including an HTL and an EML.
- the HTL may be formed of poly(3,4-ethylenedioxythiophene) (PEDOT) and the EML may be formed of a high molecular weight organic material based on polyphenylene vinylene (PPV) or polyfluorene.
- the high molecular weight organic material may be formed by using screen printing or inkjet printing.
- the organic light-emitting layer 138 b is not limited thereto, and various examples may be formed, applied, deposited, etc., as would be apparent to one of ordinary skill in the art.
- the encapsulation unit B may be formed as a thin film as described above.
- the encapsulation unit B may be formed by alternately stacking at least one organic layer and at least one inorganic layer.
- a plurality of inorganic layers or a plurality of organic layers may be provided.
- the organic layer may be formed of a polymer, and may have a single-layer structure or a multi-layer structure formed of one or more selected from the group including polyethylene terephthalate, polyimide, polycarbonate, epoxy, polyethylene, and polyacrylate.
- the organic layer may be formed of polyacrylate.
- the organic layer may be formed by polymerizing a monomer composition including a diacrylate-based monomer and a triacrylate-based monomer. A monoacrylate-based monomer may be further included in the monomer composition.
- a well-known photoinitiator such as TPO may be further included in the monomer composition, but other embodiments of the present embodiment are not necessarily limited thereto.
- the inorganic layer may have a single-layer structure or a multi-layer structure including a metal oxide or a metal nitride.
- the inorganic layer may include one or more selected from the group including SiNx, Al 2 O 3 , SiO 2 , and TiO 2 .
- an uppermost layer of the encapsulation unit B that is exposed to the outside may be an inorganic layer to reduce or prevent moisture from penetrating into the organic light-emitting device.
- the encapsulation unit B may have at least one sandwich structure in which at least one organic layer is inserted between at least two inorganic layers. In another embodiment, the encapsulation unit B may have at least one sandwich structure in which at least one inorganic layer is inserted between at least two organic layers.
- the encapsulation unit B may include a first inorganic layer, a first organic layer, and a second inorganic layer that are sequentially stacked on the display unit.
- the encapsulation unit B may include a first inorganic layer, a first organic layer, a second inorganic layer, a second organic layer, and a third inorganic layer that are sequentially stacked on the light-emitting unit.
- the encapsulation unit B may include a first inorganic layer, a first organic layer, a second inorganic layer, a second organic layer, a third inorganic layer, a third organic layer, and a fourth inorganic layer that are sequentially stacked on the light-emitting unit.
- a halogenated metal layer including LiF may be further disposed between the light-emitting unit and the first inorganic layer.
- the halogenated metal layer may reduce or prevent the light-emitting unit from being damaged when the first inorganic layer is formed by using sputtering or plasma deposition.
- the first organic layer may have an area smaller than that of the second inorganic layer, and the second organic layer may have an area smaller than that of the third inorganic layer.
- the first organic layer may be completely covered by the second inorganic layer, and the second organic layer may be completely covered by the third inorganic layer.
- the encapsulation unit B may include a second substrate as described above.
- the second substrate may be formed similarly to the first substrate S.
- the second substrate may be formed of a glass material, but like the first substrate S, the present invention is not limited thereto and, in other embodiments, the second substrate may be formed of a different material, such as a plastic material.
- the display device 100 may include a touch panel formed on the display panel 130 as described above.
- the touch panel may be located between the display panel 130 and the adhesive layer 120 .
- the touch panel may be a panel positioned on the display panel 130 .
- the touch panel may be formed on the encapsulation unit B.
- the touch panel may be formed on the cover window 110 to have a panel shape or to have a pattern.
- a method of forming a touch panel is well known to one of ordinary skill in the art, a detailed description thereof will not be given. In addition, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that a touch panel is not formed on the display panel 130 .
- the display device 100 includes the adhesive layer 120 that is located between the display panel 130 and the cover window 110 .
- the adhesive layer 120 may be variously formed.
- the adhesive layer 120 may include an adhesive film such as an optical clear adhesive (OCA) film or an adhesive material.
- OCA optical clear adhesive
- the adhesive layer 120 may have the same size as the display panel 130 . In other embodiments, the adhesive layer 120 may be smaller than the display panel 130 .
- the adhesive layer 120 is attached to one surface of the display panel 130 to laminate the display panel 130 to the cover window 110 . For example, the adhesive layer 120 may be applied to the encapsulation unit B.
- the display device 100 that is partially curved may be attached to various electronic devices, and may easily display images having various shapes.
- a method of manufacturing the display device 100 will now be described with reference to FIGS. 3 through 4 C .
- FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 200 for manufacturing the display device 100 of FIG. 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention.
- FIGS. 4 A through 4 C are cross-sectional views illustrating a method of manufacturing the display device 100 of FIG. 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention.
- the same elements as those in FIG. 1 are denoted by the same reference numerals.
- the apparatus 200 includes a first jig 210 that is partially curved and has a mount surface 211 that conforms to one surface of the cover window 110 .
- the first jig 210 has a shape similar to that of the cover window 110 . That is, the mount surface 211 of the first jig 210 is curved.
- the mount surface 211 has a flat portion on which the flat portion 111 of the cover window is mounted and the mount surface 211 has curved portions on which the curved portions 112 of the cover window are mounted.
- the mount surface 211 may be formed by being recessed in the first jig 210 .
- the apparatus 200 includes a second jig 220 that detachably couples to the first jig 210 .
- One surface of the second jig 220 conforms to the mount surface 211 .
- one surface of the second jig 220 is curved in places to conform to the portions of the mount surface 211 that are curved, and is flat in places to conform to the portion of the mount surface 211 that is flat. That is, the second jig 220 is curved such that the second jig 220 protrudes toward the first jig 210 .
- the display panel 130 is mounted on the flat surface of the second jig 220 .
- At least one of the first jig 210 or the second jig 220 may be formed of an elastic material. In addition, at least one of the first jig 210 or the second jig 220 may be formed of a hard material.
- the elastic material may be a soft material having an elastic force such as silicon, rubber, or a soft synthetic resin.
- the hard material may be a material having a high hardness such as reinforced plastic or a metal.
- first jig 210 and the second jig 220 may be selected in various ways.
- the first jig 210 may be formed of a metal and the second jig 220 may be formed of silicon.
- the first jig 210 may be formed of rubber and the second jig 220 may be formed of plastic.
- both the first jig 210 and the second jig 220 are formed of hard materials.
- the apparatus 200 may include a driving unit (such as second driving unit 225 ) that is connected to at least one of the first jig 210 or the second jig 220 , and that moves the corresponding at least one of the first jig 210 or the second jig 220 .
- the driving unit may include a first driving unit that moves the first jig 210 and the second driving unit 225 that moves the second jig 220 .
- the first driving unit and the second driving unit 225 may be formed similarly. For convenience of description, it will be assumed that the second driving unit 225 is provided.
- the second driving unit 225 may include any of various devices.
- the second driving unit 225 may include a cylinder that operates by air pressure or oil pressure to move the second jig 220 .
- the second driving unit 225 may include a motor that operates by electricity to move the second jig 220 .
- the second driving unit 225 includes a cylinder.
- the apparatus 200 includes a fixing unit (for example, second fixing unit 240 ) that prevents or helps prevent the cover window 110 mounted on the first jig 210 from moving, or that prevents or helps prevent the display panel 130 and the adhesive layer 120 mounted on the second jig 220 from separating from the second jig 220 .
- the fixing unit includes an absorption unit (for example, second absorption unit 241 ) that is formed on at least one of the first jig 210 or the second jig 220 .
- the fixing unit includes an absorption pump (for example, second absorption pump 242 ) that absorbs (for example, vacuums or evacuates) air from the absorption unit.
- the absorption pump may be provided outside a chamber C as described below.
- the fixing unit is not limited thereto and, in other embodiments, may be formed in other various ways as would be apparent to one of ordinary skill in the art.
- the fixing unit may be a separate frame that is formed on the first jig 210 or the second jig 220 .
- the fixing unit may be an adhesive member having an adhesive force.
- the fixing unit may include a first fixing unit that is provided on the first jig 210 , and includes a second fixing unit 240 that is provided on the second jig 220 .
- the first fixing unit and the second fixing unit 240 may be formed similarly.
- the first fixing unit and the second fixing unit 240 may fix the cover window 110 and the display panel 130 , respectively, by using air.
- the first fixing unit and the second fixing unit 240 may fix the cover window 110 and the display panel 130 , respectively, by using a separate frame.
- the apparatus 200 may rapidly and easily manufacture the display device 100 having a curved shape and a simple structure.
- the apparatus 200 may accurately laminate the cover window 110 having a curved shape to the display panel 130 , a defect rate may be reduced or minimized.
- a method of manufacturing the display device 100 by using the apparatus 200 will now be described with reference to FIGS. 4 A through 4 C .
- the cover window 110 is first fabricated.
- the cover window 110 may include any of various materials.
- the cover window 110 may be formed of a glass material or a plastic material.
- the cover window 110 is not limited thereto and, in other embodiments, may include any material as long as the cover window 110 is partially curved or capable of being partially curved.
- the cover window 110 After the cover window 110 is fabricated, it may be flat, in which case the curved portions 112 may be formed by bending both ends of the cover window 110 .
- the curved portions 112 may be bent from the flat portion 111 .
- the curved portions 112 extend from the flat portion 111 as described above, and each has an arc shape having a set radius (for example, a predetermined radius) or degree of curvature.
- each of the curved portions 112 may have, for example, an oval shape instead of the arc shape.
- the display panel 130 may be manufactured before, during, or after the cover window 110 is manufactured.
- a method of manufacturing the display panel 130 may be substantially the same as a method of manufacturing a general display panel (as would be apparent to one of ordinary skill in the art) and thus, a further detailed description thereof will not be given.
- the adhesive layer 120 is attached to one surface of the display panel 130 .
- the adhesive layer 120 may be attached to the encapsulation unit B (or other second substrate) as described above with reference to FIG. 2 .
- the adhesive layer 120 may, for example, be attached as a film to the encapsulation unit B, or be applied as a material to the encapsulation unit B.
- it will be assumed that the adhesive layer 120 is formed as a film.
- the cover window 110 and the display panel 130 are respectively mounted on the first jig 210 and the second jig 220 . That is, the cover window 110 is mounted on the first jig 210 , and the display panel 130 is mounted on the second jig 220 .
- the first jig 210 may be below the second jig 220 (for example, in a gravity direction).
- the distance between the first jig 210 and the second jig 220 is decreased.
- the first jig 210 may move toward the second jig 220 , or the second jig 220 may move toward the first jig 210 .
- both the first jig 210 and the second jig 220 may move closer to each other.
- One surface of the first jig 210 is curved to conform (for example, closely attach) to one surface of the cover window 110 .
- the surface of the first jig 210 is curved by being recessed.
- the display panel 130 is mounted on one surface of the second jig 220 .
- the second fixing unit 240 fixes the display panel 130 to the surface of the second jig 220 .
- a second absorption unit 241 contacts, adheres, or is otherwise attached or fixed to one surface of the display panel 130 .
- the second absorption unit 241 is partially exposed through an outer surface of the second jig 220 .
- the second absorption pump 242 absorbs air from the second absorption unit 241 (for example, by creating a partial vacuum or a pressure difference).
- the second absorption unit 241 Since the display panel 130 closes (for example, occludes) all or a portion of the second absorption unit 241 , and air in the second absorption unit 241 is continuously absorbed (for example, vacuumed or evacuated), the second absorption unit 241 is in an almost vacuum state.
- the second absorption pump 242 operates as described above, the display panel 130 attached to the second jig 220 is not separated from the second jig 220 due to the pressure difference.
- a plurality of second absorption units 241 is provided.
- the second absorption units 241 are exposed or partially exposed through an outer surface of the second jig 220 as described above and are spaced apart from one another by a set interval (for example, a predetermined interval, such as evenly spaced).
- the second jig 220 is moved toward the first jig 210 by driving the second driving unit 225 .
- the second driving unit 225 may be programmed to operate for a set period of time (for example, a predetermined period of time). When the second driving unit 225 operates in this manner, the second jig 220 approaches the first jig 210 . When the second jig 220 is continuously moved toward the first jig 210 , the adhesive layer 120 contacts the cover window 110 .
- sizes of the adhesive layer 120 and the display panel 130 may be the same as or less than a size of the flat portion 111 as described above. That is, the display panel 130 may be formed such that a width of the display panel 130 is less than a width of the cover window 110 , and the adhesive layer 120 may be formed such that a width of the adhesive layer 120 is less than the width of the display panel 130 . Accordingly, when the second jig 220 is moved toward the first jig 210 , the adhesive layer 120 contacts one surface of the flat portion 111 . When the second driving unit 225 continuously operates, the adhesive layer 120 contacting the flat portion 111 is compressed against the flat portion 111 . Thus, the display panel 130 and the cover window 110 may be attached to each other through lamination.
- a load range applied when the first jig 210 and the second jig 220 compress the cover window 110 and the display panel 130 may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
- the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 110 and the display panel 130 may be reduced, and the cover window 110 and the display panel 130 may be delaminated and separated from each other.
- the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 110 and the display panel 130 are attached to each other, the cover window 110 and the display panel 130 may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
- the operation may be performed, for example in an atmospheric state or a vacuum state (such as a near vacuum state).
- the apparatus 200 may include the first jig 210 , and the chamber C in which the second jig 220 is disposed.
- the apparatus 200 may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure of the chamber C. When a pressure in the chamber C is maintained in a vacuum state, vapor formation between the cover window 110 and the display panel 130 when the cover window 110 and the display panel 130 are laminated may be effectively prevented.
- the method may rapidly and accurately manufacture the display device 100 having a curved shape. Since the method accurately laminates the cover window 110 having a curved shape to the display panel 130 , a defect rate may be reduced or minimized, and product quality may be improved.
- FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device 300 according to another embodiment of the present invention.
- the display device 300 includes a cover window 310 , a panel member 390 , and an adhesive layer 320 .
- the cover window 310 includes a flat portion 311 and curved portions 312 .
- the cover window 310 and the adhesive layer 320 are substantially the same as the cover window 110 and adhesive layer 120 of FIG. 1 and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the panel member 390 may include a first panel member 391 that is seated on the flat portion 311 .
- the panel member 390 may include a second panel member 392 at least a portion of which is seated on the curved portions 312 .
- the panel member 390 may include at least one of the display panel 330 or the TSP as described above. For convenience of description, it will be assumed that the panel member 390 includes the display panel 330 .
- the display panel 330 includes a first display panel portion 331 that is laminated on the flat portion 311 .
- the display panel 330 includes second display panel portions 332 that extend from the first display panel portion 331 and are laminated or partially laminated on the curved portions 312 .
- the second display panel portions 332 extend in a curved shape from the first display panel portion 331 . Accordingly, since the display device 300 includes the cover window 310 that is curved and the display device 300 displays through a flat portion 311 and a curved portion 312 , a larger or maximum active area may be obtained.
- the display panel 330 may be smaller in the at least one of a length or a width than the cover window 310 .
- the display device 300 that is partially curved may be attached to various electronic devices, and may easily display images having various shapes. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that the display panel 330 is shorter in width than the cover window 310 as described below in further detail.
- a method of manufacturing the display device 300 will now be described with reference to FIGS. 6 through 7 C .
- FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 400 for manufacturing the display device 300 of FIG. 5 according to an embodiment of the present invention.
- FIGS. 7 A through 7 C are cross-sectional views illustrating a method of manufacturing the display device 300 of FIG. 5 according to an embodiment of the present invention.
- the same members as those of FIG. 5 are denoted by the same reference numerals.
- the apparatus 400 includes a first jig 410 , a second jig 420 , a driving unit (such as first driving unit 415 ), and a fixing unit F (for example, first fixing unit 430 and second fixing unit 440 ).
- the first jig 410 , the second jig 420 , the driving unit, and the fixing unit F are similar to the first jig 210 , the second jig 220 , the driving unit (for example, the second driving unit 225 ), and the fixing unit (for example, second fixing unit 240 ), respectively, as described above and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the driving unit may include the first driving unit 415 and a second driving unit
- the fixing unit F includes the first fixing unit 430 and the second fixing unit 440 .
- the first driving unit 415 , the second driving unit, the first fixing unit 430 , and the second fixing unit 440 are substantially the same as the first driving unit, the second driving unit 225 , the first fixing unit, and the second fixing unit 240 , respectively, as described above and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. However, it will be assumed that the driving unit including only the first driving unit 415 operates.
- the apparatus 400 may include a cushion unit 490 provided on or a part of at least one of the first jig 410 or the second jig 420 .
- a thickness of the cushion unit 490 may be greater than or equal to 0.5 mm and less than or equal to 3 mm.
- the cushion unit 490 is part of a surface of the second jig 420 .
- a plurality of cushion units 490 are part of respective end portions of the second jig 420 to face the first jig 410 .
- the cushion units 490 include a first cushion unit 491 and a second cushion unit 492 that are part of a surface of the second jig 420 and spaced apart by a set interval (for example, a predetermined interval) from each other.
- the distance S1 between the first cushion unit 491 and the second cushion unit 492 is less than the at least one of a length or a width of the display panel 330 .
- the distance S1 between the first cushion unit 491 and the second cushion unit 492 is less than the width of the display panel 330 .
- the cushion units 490 support the display panel 330 and help prevent air bubbles from being formed between the display panel 330 and the curved portions 312 when the second jig 420 and the first jig 410 are moved toward each other with the display panel 330 and the cover window 310 , respectively, therebetween.
- the apparatus 400 may rapidly and easily manufacture the display device 300 having a curved shape and a simple structure.
- the apparatus 400 may accurately laminate the cover window 310 having a curved shape to the display panel 330 , a defect rate may be reduced or minimized.
- the apparatus 400 (such as the second jig 420 ) includes the cushion unit 490 , a defect rate that may increase during lamination of the display panel 330 to the cover window 310 on the curved portions 312 may be reduced.
- a method of manufacturing the display device 300 will now be described with reference to FIGS. 6 through 7 C .
- a method of manufacturing the display device 300 by using the apparatus 400 is similar to that described above.
- the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be manufactured as described above and may be mounted on the first jig 410 and the second jig 420 , respectively (see FIG. 7 A ).
- the first fixing unit 430 and the second fixing unit 440 respectively fix the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 to the first jig 410 and the second jig 420 .
- a first absorption pump 432 operates, a first absorption unit 431 is maintained in a vacuum (or near vacuum) state.
- a second absorption pump 442 operates, a second absorption unit 441 is maintained in a vacuum (or near vacuum) state. Accordingly, the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 are fixed to the first jig 410 and the second jig 420 , respectively.
- the first jig 410 is higher than the second jig 420 (for example, in a gravity direction). At least one of the first jig 410 or the second jig 420 then moves towards the other. For example, the first jig 410 may move toward the second jig 420 , or the second jig 420 may move toward the first jig 410 . In other embodiments, both the first jig 410 and the second jig 420 move closer to each other. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the first jig 410 moves toward the second jig 420 . When the first jig 410 moves toward the second jig 420 , the first driving unit 415 operates. When the first driving unit 415 continuously operates, a curved surface of the cover window 310 contacts the adhesive layer 320 .
- the display panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320 may be flat against the second jig 420 . Then, when the adhesive layer 320 and the cover window 310 contact each other, both ends of the display panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320 may be curved (for example, through contact with the cover window 310 that is curved). Next, a first display panel portion 331 (that is flat) and second display panel portions 332 (that are curved) of the display panel 330 are formed. Accordingly, the first display panel portion 331 and the second display panel portions 332 are formed when the display panel 330 is adhered to the flat portion 311 and the curved portions 312 .
- the cover window 310 may be attached to the display panel 330 through lamination as the first driving unit 415 operates as described above (see FIGS. 5 and 7 C ).
- the display panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320 may be bent along an outer surface of the second jig 420 when the display panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320 are mounted on the second jig 420 .
- a load range applied when the first jig 410 and the second jig 420 compress the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
- the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be reduced, and thus the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be delaminated and separated from each other.
- the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 are attached to each other the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
- the method may rapidly and accurately manufacture the display device 300 having a curved shape. Since the method accurately laminates the cover window 310 having a curved shape to the display panel 330 , a defect rate may be reduced or minimized. In addition, since the method removes air bubbles that may be formed (or prevents air bubbles from being formed) after the display panel 330 and the curved portions 312 are compressed, product quality may be improved.
- FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 500 for manufacturing the display device 300 of FIG. 5 according to another embodiment of the present invention.
- FIGS. 9 A through 9 C are cross-sectional views illustrating a method of manufacturing the display device 300 of FIG. 5 according to another embodiment of the present invention.
- the apparatus 500 includes a first jig 510 , a second jig 520 , a driving unit M (such as first driving unit 515 and second driving unit 525 ), and a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 530 ).
- the first jig 510 , the second jig 520 , the driving unit M, and the fixing unit are substantially the same as those described above and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the driving unit M may include the first driving unit 515 and the second driving unit 525
- the fixing unit includes the first fixing unit 530 (including first absorption unit 531 and first absorption pump 532 ).
- the first driving unit 515 , the second driving unit 525 , and the first fixing unit 530 are substantially the same as those described above and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the apparatus 500 includes a clamping unit 550 that is spaced apart by a set interval (for example, a predetermined interval) from the second jig 520 , and supports the display panel 330 to which the adhesive layer 320 is applied.
- the clamping unit 550 may be spaced apart by a set interval (for example, a predetermined interval) from the first jig 510 , and supports the cover window 310 .
- a set interval for example, a predetermined interval
- the clamping unit 550 supports one or more ends of the display panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320 when they are inserted into the clamping unit 550 .
- a plurality of clamping units 550 are provided, where a distance between the clamping units 550 is less than the at least one of a length or a width of the panel member (for example, display panel 330 ) when the clamping units 550 are fixing the display panel 330 .
- the panel member may include at least one of the display panel 330 or the TSP as described above.
- each of the clamping units 550 is placed at both ends of the cover window 310 in the direction of the at least one of a width or a length of the cover window 310 .
- a distance between the plurality of clamping units 550 is less than a width of the display panel 330 and the panel member includes the display panel 330 .
- the clamping units 550 face respective side surfaces of the second jig 520 , and fix respective ends of the display panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320 .
- the clamping units 550 include a first clamping unit 551 and a second clamping unit 552 that are spaced apart by a set interval (for example, a predetermined interval) from each other.
- the apparatus 500 may rapidly and easily manufacture the display device 300 having a curved shape and a simple structure.
- the apparatus 500 may accurately laminate the cover window 310 having a curved shape to the display panel 330 , a defect rate may be reduced or minimized.
- the apparatus 500 includes the clamping unit 550 to accurately align the display panel 330 and the cover window 310 , working efficiency may be improved.
- FIGS. 9 A through 9 C A method of manufacturing the display device 300 by using the apparatus 500 will now be described with reference to FIGS. 9 A through 9 C .
- the cover window 310 is formed, the display panel 330 is formed, and then the adhesive layer 320 is attached to the display panel 330 .
- the cover window 310 may be mounted on the first jig 510 as described above (see FIG. 9 A ).
- respective ends of the display panel 330 on which the adhesive layer 320 is attached are fixed to the first clamping unit 551 and the second clamping unit 552 .
- the respective ends of the display panel 330 may be fixed by being inserted into insertion grooves formed in the first clamping unit 551 and the second clamping unit 552 .
- middle portions of the display panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320 are curved upward (for example, with respect to a gravity direction). As shown in FIGS. 9 B and 9 C , since a distance S2 between the first clamping unit 551 and the second clamping unit 552 is less than at least one of a width or a length of the display panel 330 , the middle portions of the display panel 330 protrude toward the first jig 510 .
- the display panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320 are fixed, the display panel 330 , the adhesive layer 320 , and the cover window 310 may be compressed by moving at least one of the first jig 510 or the second jig 520 .
- the display panel 330 , the adhesive layer 320 , and the cover window 310 are compressed by moving both the first jig 510 and the second jig 520 .
- the first driving unit 515 and the second driving unit 525 may operate to move the first jig 510 and the second jig 520 closer to each other.
- the middle portions of the display panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320 (which are curved downward) then contact the cover window 310 .
- the middle portions of the display panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320 may first contact a portion of the flat portion 311 .
- the display panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320 are adhered to the cover window 310 from the flat portion 311 as the first contacting portion to the curved portions 312 . That is, the display panel 330 , the adhesive layer 320 , and the cover window 310 contact in an order from the flat portion 311 to the curved portions 312 .
- the second jig 520 may contact the display panel 330 , the display panel 330 may detach from the clamping unit 550 , and the first jig 510 and the second jig 520 may move closer to each other to further laminate the display panel 330 to the cover window 310 .
- a load range applied when the first jig 510 and the second jig 520 compress the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and equal or less than 0.5 MPa.
- the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be reduced, and thus the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be delaminated and separated from each other.
- the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa when the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 are attached to each other, the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
- the method may rapidly and accurately manufacture the display device 300 having a curved shape.
- the method may accurately laminate the cover window 310 having a curved shape to the display panel 330 , a defect rate may be reduced or minimized.
- the method removes air bubbles that may be formed (or prevents air bubbles from being formed) after the display panel 330 and the curved portions 312 are compressed, product quality may be improved.
- a cover window that is partially curved and a display panel are rapidly and accurately laminated to each other, mass production, high reliability, and high quality may be achieved.
- a display device since a display device may be manufactured rapidly, manufacturing time and costs may be reduced.
- FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 600 for manufacturing the display device 300 of FIG. 5 according to yet another embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method of manufacturing the display device 300 of FIG. 5 according to yet another embodiment of the present invention.
- the apparatus 600 includes a first jig 610 , a second jig 620 , a driving unit M (including first driving unit 615 and second driving unit 625 ), a clamping unit 650 , and a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 630 ).
- the first jig 610 and the second jig 620 may be substantially the same as those described above and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the driving unit M may include the first driving unit 615 and the second driving unit 625
- the fixing unit may include the first fixing unit 630 .
- the first driving unit 615 , the second driving unit 625 , and the first fixing unit 630 may be substantially the same as those described above and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the first fixing unit 630 may include a first absorption unit 631 and a first absorption pump 632 .
- the clamping unit 650 may include a first clamping unit 651 and a second clamping unit 652 .
- the first clamping unit 651 and the second clamping unit 652 may be substantially the same as those described above and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the apparatus 600 may include a first linear driving unit 660 and a second linear driving unit 670 which respectively vertically move the first clamping unit 651 and the second clamping unit 652 (for example, in a vertical direction with respect to gravity).
- the first linear driving unit 660 and the second linear driving unit 670 may be formed similarly and thus, the following description will focus on the first linear driving unit 660 .
- the first linear driving unit 660 may include a first shaft 661 that is connected to the first clamping unit 651 and linearly moves.
- the first linear driving unit 660 may include a first driving module 665 that drives the first shaft 661 .
- the first driving module 665 may include, for example, a cylinder or a motor.
- the first driving module 665 includes a motor.
- the first shaft 661 includes a ball screw that is lowered or raised as the first driving module 665 rotates.
- the first linear driving unit 660 may include a first elastic unit 663 that surrounds the first shaft 661 .
- the first elastic unit 663 may include a compression spring, and may be formed of an elastic material such as rubber. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that the first elastic unit 663 includes a compression spring.
- the first elastic unit 663 may surround an outer surface of the first shaft 661 as described above and thus may provide a restoring force to the first clamping unit 651 when the first clamping unit 651 moves.
- the cover window 310 and a panel member may be formed, and then the adhesive layer 320 may be formed on the panel member.
- the panel member may include at least one of the display panel 330 or the TSP as described above. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the panel member includes the display panel 330 . Respective ends of the display panel 330 on which the adhesive layer 320 is formed may be fixed to the first clamping unit 651 and the second clamping unit 652 .
- middle portions of the display panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320 may be curved upward (for example, with respect to a gravity direction).
- a distance S3 between the first clamping unit 651 and the second clamping unit 652 is less than at least one of a width or a length of the display panel 330 , the middle portions may protrude toward the first jig 610 . In this case, it will be assumed that the distance S3 between the first clamping unit 651 and the second clamping unit 652 is less than a width of the display panel 330 .
- the display panel 330 , the adhesive layer 320 , and the cover window 310 may be compressed against one another by moving at least one of the first jig 610 or the second jig 620 .
- the display panel 330 , the adhesive layer 320 , and the cover window 310 are compressed by moving both the first jig 610 and the second jig 620 .
- first linear driving unit 660 and the second linear driving unit 670 may operate to vertically move the first clamping unit 651 and the second clamping unit 652 .
- the first clamping unit 651 and the second clamping unit 652 may move at a speed similar to a speed at which the second jig 620 moves.
- the display panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320 may be raised while maintaining their curved states.
- a distance between the first jig 610 and the second jig 620 reaches a set distance (for example, a predetermined distance)
- the first clamping unit 651 and the second clamping unit 652 may release from (for example, reduce their clamping force from) the display panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320 .
- the first linear driving unit 660 and the second linear driving unit 670 may lower the first clamping unit 651 and the second clamping unit 652 .
- the first driving unit 615 and the second driving unit 625 may continuously operate to bring the first jig 610 and the second jig 620 closer (for example, adjacent) to each other (for example, the second jig 520 may contact the display panel 330 ).
- the display panel 330 , the adhesive layer 320 , and the cover window 310 may be compressed against one another (e.g., starting with the flat portion 311 ).
- a method of compressing the display panel 330 , the adhesive layer 320 , and the cover window 310 may be performed in the same manner as that described above and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- a load range applied when the first jig 610 and the second jig 620 compress the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
- the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be reduced, and the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be delaminated and separated from each other.
- the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 are attached to each other the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
- the method may rapidly and accurately manufacture the display device 300 having a curved shape. Further, the method may reduce or minimize a defect rate by accurately laminating the cover window 310 having a curved shape to the display panel 330 . In addition, the method may improve product quality by removing air bubbles that may be generated (or preventing air bubbles from being generated) after the display panel 330 and the curved portions 312 are compressed.
- FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 700 for manufacturing the display device 300 of FIG. 5 according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 13 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method of manufacturing the display device 300 of FIG. 5 according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention.
- the apparatus 700 may include a first jig 710 , a second jig 720 (including a cushion unit 790 ), a driving unit M (including first driving unit 715 and second driving unit 725 ), a clamping unit 750 (including a first clamping unit 751 and a second clamping unit 752 ), a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 730 ), a first linear driving unit 760 , and a second linear driving unit 770 .
- the first jig 710 and the second jig 720 may be substantially the same as those described above and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the driving unit M may include the first driving unit 715 and the second driving unit 725
- the fixing unit may include the first fixing unit 730 .
- the first driving unit 715 , the second driving unit 725 , and the first fixing unit 730 (which includes first absorption unit 731 and first absorption pump 732 ) may be substantially the same as those described above and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the first linear driving unit 760 and the second linear driving unit 770 may linearly move the first clamping unit 751 and the second clamping unit 752 , respectively.
- the first linear driving unit 760 and the second linear driving unit 770 may linearly move the first clamping unit 751 and the second clamping unit 752 in a diagonal direction, respectively, with respect to the second jig 720 (and, for example, with respect to a gravity direction). Since the second linear driving unit 770 may be formed similarly to the first linear driving unit 760 , the following description will focus on the first linear driving unit 760 .
- the first linear driving unit 760 may include a first shaft 761 , a first driving module 765 , and a first elastic unit 763 .
- the first shaft 761 , the first driving module 765 , and the first elastic unit 763 may be formed in a similar manner to those described above (such as the first linear driving unit 660 in FIGS. 10 - 11 ) except that, the first shaft 761 is disposed in a diagonal direction to diagonally move the first clamping unit 751 with respect to the second jig 720 .
- the first driving module 765 may vary a length of the first shaft 761 . Since the first driving module 765 and the first shaft 761 are diagonally disposed with respect to the second jig 720 as described above, the first clamping unit 751 may be diagonally moved by varying the movement of the first shaft 761 .
- the first clamping unit 751 may diagonally move downward with respect to the second jig 720 as the first shaft 761 moves.
- the first clamping unit 751 may diagonally move upward with respect to the second jig 720 as the first shaft 761 moves.
- the first shaft 761 may include a ball screw as described above and thus may rotate as the first driving module 765 operates.
- the first shaft 761 may diagonally move downward or upward with respect to the second jig 720 as the first driving module 765 rotates.
- the cushion unit 790 may be formed in various ways.
- the cushion unit 790 may be part of an outer surface (e.g., a contacting surface, such as a surface that contacts the cover window 310 or the display panel 330 ) of at least one of the first jig 710 or the second jig 720 .
- the cushion unit 790 may be part of a portion of such an outer surface of at least one of the first jig 710 or the second jig 720 .
- the cushion unit 790 is part of the apparatus 700 and covers such an outer surface of at least one of the first jig 710 or the second jig 720 .
- the cushion unit 790 is part of an entire such outer surface of the second jig 720 .
- a method of manufacturing the display device 300 may be similar to that described above.
- a panel member for example, display panel 330
- the cover window 310 may be prepared, and then the adhesive layer 320 may be applied to the panel member.
- the panel member may include the display panel 330 and the TSP as described above. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the panel member includes the display panel 330 .
- the display panel 330 to which the adhesive layer 320 is applied may be fixed by the first clamping unit 751 and the second clamping unit 752 .
- the display panel 330 , the adhesive layer 320 , and the cover window 310 may be compressed against one another by moving at least one of the first jig 710 or the second jig 720 .
- a method of compressing the display panel 330 , the adhesive layer 320 , and the cover window 310 may be similar to that described above and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the first clamping unit 751 and the second clamping unit 752 may also move.
- the first clamping unit 751 and the second clamping unit 752 may be diagonally moved by the first linear driving unit 760 and the second linear driving unit 770 , respectively.
- the first clamping unit 751 and the second clamping unit 752 may be raised diagonally with respect to the second jig 720 .
- both ends of the display panel 330 may be released from the clamping unit 750 .
- the display panel 330 may be laminated to the cover window 310 by the adhesive layer 320 beginning from a middle portion of the display panel 330 (corresponding to the flat portion 311 of the cover window 310 ).
- the first linear driving unit 760 and the second linear driving unit 770 may operate to lower the first clamping unit 751 and the second clamping unit 752 .
- the first clamping unit 751 and the second clamping unit 752 may be lowered diagonally with respect to the second jig 720 . While the first clamping unit 751 and the second clamping unit 752 are lowered, the first jig 710 and the second jig 720 may get closer to each other to compress the display panel 330 , the adhesive layer 320 , and the cover window 310 against one another. For example, the second jig 720 may contact the display panel 330 .
- a method of adhering the display panel 330 and the cover window 310 through compression may be similar to that described above.
- the cushion unit 790 may spread a force applied to the display panel 330 and the cover window 310 .
- the cushion unit 790 may help prevent the display panel 330 or the cover window 310 from being damaged by partially absorbing a force applied to the display panel 330 and the cover window 310 .
- a load range applied when the first jig 710 and the second jig 720 compress the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
- the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be reduced, and the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be delaminated and separated from each other.
- the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 are attached to each other the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
- the method may rapidly and accurately manufacture the display device 300 . Further, the method may reduce or minimize a defect rate by accurately laminating the cover window 310 having a curved surface to the display panel 330 . In addition, the method may improve product quality by removing air bubbles that may be generated (or preventing air bubbles from being generated) after the display panel 330 and the curved portions 312 are compressed.
- FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device 300 a according to yet another embodiment of the present invention.
- the display device 300 a may include a cover window 310 a and a panel member 390 a as described above.
- the display device 300 a may include a first adhesive layer 320 a that is disposed between a panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a .
- the panel member 390 a may include a display panel 330 a and a TSP 340 a as described above.
- a second adhesive layer 350 a may be provided between the display panel 330 a and the TSP 340 a to attach the display panel 330 a and the TSP 340 a.
- the cover window 310 a may be formed such that at least a portion of the cover window 310 a is curved.
- the cover window 310 may be formed to have a curved surface having a curvature radius of R.
- the cover window 310 a may be formed to have a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius in at least one of a longitudinal direction or a width direction.
- the cover window 310 a may be formed such that a surface on which an image or text is displayed after the panel member 390 a is attached is convex.
- the cover window 310 is formed to have a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius and the curved surface is formed in a width direction of the cover window 310 a.
- the first adhesive layer 320 a and the second adhesive layer 350 a may be formed of the same material.
- the first adhesive layer 320 a and the second adhesive layer 350 a may be formed of a transparent material having an adhesive force.
- the first adhesive layer 320 a and the second adhesive layer 350 a may include an optical clear adhesive (OCA) film or an adhesive material.
- OCA optical clear adhesive
- the display device 300 a since the display device 300 a is formed to have a set or predetermined curvature radius, the display device 300 a may be provided on various members.
- FIG. 15 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 400 a for manufacturing the display device 300 a of FIG. 14 , according to an embodiment of the present invention.
- the apparatus 400 a may include a first jig 410 a , a second jig 420 a , a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 430 a ), and a cushion unit 490 a .
- At least a portion of the first jig 410 a may be formed equally or similarly to an outer surface of the cover window 310 a .
- the first jig 410 a may have a curved surface on which the cover window 310 a having a curved surface with a set or predetermined curvature radius is seated.
- the first jig 410 a may be recessed away from the second jig 420 a.
- An outer surface of the second jig 420 a may protrude toward the first jig 410 a to correspond to or engage with a recessed portion of the first jig 410 a .
- the outer surface of the second jig 420 a may be a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius.
- the driving unit M may include a first driving unit 415 a and a second driving unit 425 a .
- the first driving unit 415 a may linearly move the first jig 410 a toward the second jig 420 a
- the second driving unit 425 a may linearly move the second jig 420 a toward the first jig 410 a
- the first driving unit 415 a and the second driving unit 425 a may be formed in the same manner as or a similar manner to those described above.
- the fixing unit may include a first fixing unit 430 a provided on the first jig 410 a and a second fixing unit provided on the second jig 420 a .
- the fixing unit includes the first fixing unit 430 a .
- the first fixing unit 430 a and the second fixing unit may be formed in the same manner or a similar manner, and thus a detailed description of the second fixing unit will not be given.
- the first fixing unit 430 a may be formed in various ways.
- the first fixing unit 430 a may include an adhesive member, an adhesive chuck, or an electrostatic chuck.
- the first fixing unit 430 a may include a first absorption unit 431 a and a first absorption pump 432 a that is connected to the first absorption unit 431 a .
- the first fixing unit 430 a is not limited thereto, and may include a clamp, or a protrusion that is provided on the first jig 410 a and mechanically restricts the cover window 310 a .
- the first fixing unit 430 a includes the first absorption unit 431 a and the first absorption pump 432 a.
- the cushion unit 490 a may be provided on at least one of the first jig 410 a or the second jig 420 a .
- the cushion unit 490 a is the same as or similar to that described above, and thus a detailed explanation thereof will not be repeated.
- the cushion unit 490 a is provided only on the second jig 420 a and is integrally formed on an outer surface of the second jig 420 a.
- the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be manufactured and prepared.
- a method of manufacturing the cover window 310 a is similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the TSP 340 a and the display panel 330 a may be adhered to each other by using the second adhesive layer 350 a.
- the cover window 310 a may be disposed on the first jig 410 a .
- the cover window 310 a may be formed to have a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius of R as described above and may be seated on an outer surface of the first jig 410 a .
- the first absorption pump 432 a may operate to absorb (e.g., evacuate or vacuum) air out of the first absorption unit 431 a , so that the cover window 310 a may be fixed to the outer surface of the first jig 410 a.
- the TSP 340 a and the display panel 330 a adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 a may be disposed on the second jig 420 a .
- the display panel 330 a may be disposed to face the second jig 420 a
- the TSP 340 a may be disposed to face the first jig 410 a.
- the first adhesive layer 320 a may be coated on the TSP 340 a .
- the first adhesive layer 320 a may be formed of the same material as or a similar material to that of the second adhesive layer 350 a.
- the first jig 410 a and the second jig 420 a may be moved toward each other by driving the first driving unit 415 a and the second driving unit 425 a .
- a protruding portion of the second jig 420 a may first contact the display panel 330 a , and the first adhesive layer 320 a and the cover window 310 a may be sequentially laminated from a central portion of the display panel 330 a to both end portions.
- a load range applied when the first jig 410 a and the second jig 420 a compress the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
- the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be reduced, and the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be delaminated and separated from each other.
- the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a are attached to each other the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
- the cushion unit 490 a may uniformly distribute a force applied to the cover window 310 a , the TSP 340 a , and the display panel 330 a.
- the first driving unit 415 a and the second driving unit 425 a may operate to separate the first jig 410 a and the second jig 420 a .
- An operator may complete an operation by removing the completed display device 300 a from the first jig 410 a or the second jig 420 a.
- the apparatus 400 a may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4 C ) in which the first jig 410 a , the second jig 420 a , the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed.
- the apparatus 400 a may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber.
- the pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a are laminated.
- the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after a lamination process is completed.
- the apparatus 400 a may manufacture any type of display device 300 a .
- the apparatus 400 a may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing vapors or preventing vapors from being generated between the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a when the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a are laminated.
- FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 500 a for manufacturing the display device 300 a of FIG. 14 , according to another embodiment of the present invention.
- the apparatus 500 a includes a first jig 510 a , a second jig 520 a , a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 530 a ), and a cushion unit 590 a .
- the first jig 510 a , the second jig 520 a , the driving unit M, the fixing unit, and the cushion unit 590 a are substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the driving unit M may include a first driving unit 515 a and a second driving unit 525 a
- the fixing unit may include a first fixing unit 530 a .
- the first driving unit 515 a , the second driving unit 525 a , and the first fixing unit 530 a (which includes a first absorption unit 531 a and a first absorption pump 532 a ) are substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the apparatus 500 a includes a clamping unit 550 a that is spaced apart by a set or predetermined interval from at least one of the first jig 510 a or the second jig 520 a , and supports the panel member 390 a .
- the clamping unit 550 a is disposed adjacent to the second jig 520 a.
- the clamping unit 550 a may support one end of the panel member 390 a when the one end of the panel member 390 a is inserted into the clamping unit 550 a .
- a plurality of the clamping units 550 a may be provided, where a distance between the clamping units 550 a is less than a length or a width of the panel member 390 a .
- the panel member 390 a may include at least one of the display panel 330 a or the TSP 340 a as described above. For convenience of description, it will be assumed that the distance between the plurality of clamping units 550 a is less than a width of the panel member 390 a and the panel member 390 a includes the display panel 330 a and the TSP 340 a.
- the plurality of clamping units 550 a face respective side surfaces of the second jig 520 a , and fix both ends of the display panel 330 a , the second adhesive layer 350 a , the TSP 340 a , and the first adhesive layer 320 a .
- the plurality of clamping units 550 a include a first clamping unit 551 a and a second clamping unit 552 a that are spaced apart by a set or predetermined interval from each other.
- the apparatus 500 a may rapidly and easily manufacture the display device 300 a having a curved surface and a simple structure.
- the apparatus 500 a may accurately attach the cover window 310 a having a curved surface to the panel member 390 a , a product defect rate may be reduced or minimized.
- the apparatus 500 a since the apparatus 500 a includes the clamping unit 550 a to accurately align the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a , working efficiency may be improved.
- a method of manufacturing the display device 300 a by using the apparatus 500 a will now be described with reference to FIG. 16 .
- the cover window 310 a may be formed as described above, the display panel 330 a may be formed, and then the TSP 340 a and the display panel 330 a may be adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 a .
- the cover window 310 a may be mounted on the first jig 510 a as described above.
- the cover window 310 a may be formed to have a curved surface having a predetermined curvature radius of R as described above and may be seated on an outer surface of the first jig 510 a .
- a first absorption pump 532 a may operate to absorb air of a first absorption unit 531 a so that the cover window 310 a is fixed to the outer surface of the first jig 510 a.
- the TSP 340 a and the display panel 330 a adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 a as described above may be disposed on the second jig 520 a .
- the display panel 330 a may be disposed to face the second jig 520 a
- the TSP 340 a may be disposed to face the first jig 510 a .
- respective ends of the TSP 340 a on which the first adhesive layer 320 a is attached are fixed to the first clamping unit 551 a and the second clamping unit 552 a .
- the respective ends of panel member 390 a may be fixed by being inserted into grooves formed in the first clamping unit 551 a and the second clamping unit 552 a as described above.
- portions of the display panel 330 a , the second adhesive layer 350 a , the TSP 340 a , and the first adhesive layer 320 a may be curved upward (for example, with respect to a gravity direction).
- a distance between the first clamping unit 551 a and the second clamping unit 552 a is less than at least one of a width or a length of at least one of the display panel 330 a or the TSP 340 a , the portions of the display panel 330 a , the second adhesive layer 350 a , the TSP 340 a , and the first adhesive layer 320 a may protrude toward the first jig 510 a.
- the display panel 330 a , the second adhesive layer 350 a , the TSP 340 a , and the first adhesive layer 320 a are fixed as described above, the display panel 330 a , the second adhesive layer 350 a , the TSP 340 a , the first adhesive layer 320 a , and the cover window 310 a may be compressed against each other by moving at least one of the first jig 510 a or the second jig 520 a .
- the first adhesive layer 320 a and the cover window 310 a are compressed by moving both the first jig 510 a and the second jig 520 a.
- the first driving unit 515 a and the second driving unit 525 a may operate to move the first jig 510 a and the second jig 520 a closer to each other.
- the upwardly curved portions of the display panel 330 a , the second adhesive layer 350 a , the TSP 340 a , and the first adhesive layer 320 a first contact the cover window 310 a .
- the display panel 330 a , the second adhesive layer 350 a , the TSP 340 a , and the first adhesive layer 320 a may be laminated to the cover window 310 a beginning from contact portions with the cover window 310 a toward both end portions.
- a load range applied when the first jig 510 a and the second jig 520 a compress the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
- the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be reduced, and the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be delaminated and separated from each other.
- the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a are attached to each other the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
- the TSP 340 a and the display panel 330 a may be fixed while the first clamping unit 551 a and the second clamping unit 552 a do not move.
- the cushion unit 590 a may uniformly distribute a force applied to the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a when the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a are compressed and laminated.
- the first driving unit 515 a and the second driving unit 525 a may operate to separate the first jig 510 a and the second jig 520 a .
- the operator may complete an operation by removing the completed display device 300 a from the first jig 510 a or the second jig 520 a.
- the apparatus 500 a may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4 C ) in which the first jig 510 a , the second jig 520 a , the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed.
- the apparatus 500 a may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber.
- the pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a are laminated.
- the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after the process is completed.
- the apparatus 500 a may rapidly and accurately manufacture any type of display device 300 a having a curved surface.
- the apparatus 500 a may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by accurately attaching the display panel 330 a and the cover window 310 a having a curved surface.
- the apparatus 500 a may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing air bubbles or preventing air bubbles from being generated after the display panel 330 a and the curved portions are compressed.
- FIG. 17 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 600 a for manufacturing the display device 300 a of FIG. 14 , according to yet another embodiment of the present invention.
- the apparatus 600 a includes a first jig 610 a , a second jig 620 a , a driving unit M, a clamping unit 650 a , a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 630 a ), a linear driving unit L, and a cushion unit 690 a .
- the first jig 610 a , the second jig 620 a , the linear driving unit L, the clamping unit 650 a , the fixing unit, and the cushion unit 690 a may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the driving unit M may include a first driving unit 615 a and a second driving unit 625 a
- the fixing unit may include a first fixing unit 630 a .
- the first driving unit 615 a , the second driving unit 625 a , and the first fixing unit 630 a may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the first fixing unit 630 a may include a first absorption pump 632 a and a first absorption unit 631 a.
- the clamping unit 650 a may include a first clamping unit 651 a and a second clamping unit 652 a .
- the first clamping unit 651 a and the second clamping unit 652 a may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the apparatus 600 a may include a linear driving unit L that includes a first linear driving unit 660 a and a second linear driving unit 670 a that respectively vertically move the first clamping unit 651 a and the second clamping unit 652 a .
- the first linear driving unit 660 a and the second linear driving unit 670 a may respectively linearly move the first clamping unit 651 a and the second clamping unit 652 a in the same direction as a direction in which the second jig 620 a moves.
- the first linear driving unit 660 a and the second linear driving unit 670 a may be formed similarly, and thus the following description will focus on the first linear driving unit 660 a.
- the first linear driving unit 660 a may include a first shaft 661 a that is connected to the first clamping unit 651 a and linearly moves the first clamping unit 651 a .
- the first linear driving unit 660 a may include a first driving module 665 a that drives the first shaft 661 a .
- the first driving module 665 a may include a cylinder or a motor.
- the first driving module 665 a includes a motor.
- the first shaft 661 a includes a ball screw that is lowered or raised as the first driving module 665 a rotates.
- the first linear driving unit 660 a may include a first elastic unit 663 a that surrounds the first shaft 661 a .
- the first elastic unit 663 a may include a compression spring, and may be formed of an elastic material such as rubber. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that the first elastic unit 663 a includes a compression spring.
- the first elastic unit 663 a may surround an outer surface of the first shaft 661 a as described above and thus may provide a restoring force to the first clamping unit 651 a when the first clamping unit 651 a moves.
- the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be manufactured and prepared.
- the panel member 390 a may include at least one of the display panel 330 a or the TSP 340 a as described above. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the panel member 390 a includes both the display panel 330 a and the TSP 340 a.
- the cover window 310 a may be disposed on the first jig 610 a .
- the cover window 310 a may be formed to have a curved surface having a predetermined curvature radius of R as described above, and may be seated on an outer surface of the first jig 610 a .
- a first absorption pump 632 a may absorb air of a first absorption unit 631 a to fix the cover window 310 a to the outer surface of the first jig 610 a.
- the TSP 340 a and the display panel 330 a adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 a as described above may be disposed on the second jig 620 a .
- the display panel 330 a may be disposed to face the second jig 620 a and the TSP 340 a may be disposed to face the first jig 610 a .
- the display panel 330 a and the TSP 340 a may be stacked, and an end of the display panel 330 a and an end of the TSP 340 a may be fixed by being inserted into the first clamping unit 651 a and the second clamping unit 652 a.
- the first adhesive layer 320 a may be formed on the TSP 340 a . Respective ends of the display panel 330 a and the TSP 340 a on which the first adhesive layer 320 a is formed may be fixed to the first clamping unit 651 a and the second clamping unit 652 a.
- one portion of the panel member 390 a may be curved upward (for example, with respect to a gravity direction).
- the upwardly curved portion may protrude toward the first jig 610 a .
- the distance between the first clamping unit 651 a and the second clamping unit 652 a is less than a width of the panel member 390 a.
- the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a may be compressed against each other by moving at least one of the first jig 610 a or the second jig 620 a .
- the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a are compressed by moving both the first jig 610 a and the second jig 620 a.
- first linear driving unit 660 a and the second linear driving unit 670 a may operate to vertically move the first clamping unit 651 a and the second clamping unit 652 a .
- first clamping unit 651 a and the second clamping unit 652 a may move at a speed similar to a speed at which the second jig 620 a moves.
- the panel member 390 a may be raised while maintaining its curved state.
- a distance between the first jig 610 a and the second jig 620 a reaches a set distance (for example, a predetermined distance)
- the first clamping unit 651 a and the second clamping unit 652 a may release from (for example, reduce their clamping force from) the panel member 390 a.
- the first linear driving unit 660 a and the second linear driving unit 670 a may lower the first clamping unit 651 a and the second clamping unit 652 a.
- the first driving unit 615 a and the second driving unit 625 a may continuously operate to bring the first jig 610 a and the second jig 620 a closer (for example, adjacent) to each other (for example, the second jig 620 a may contact panel member 390 a ).
- the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a may be compressed against each other.
- a method of compressing the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a may be performed in the same manner as that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- a load range applied when the first jig 610 a and the second jig 620 a compress the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
- the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be reduced, and the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be delaminated and separated from each other.
- the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a are attached to each other the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
- the cushion unit 690 a may uniformly distribute a force applied to the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a when the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a are laminated due to compression.
- the first driving unit 615 a and the second driving unit 625 a may operate to separate the first jig 610 a and the second jig 620 a .
- the operator may complete an operation by removing the completed display device 300 a from the first jig 610 a or the second jig 620 a.
- the apparatus 600 a may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4 C ) in which the first jig 610 a , the second jig 620 a , the fixing unit, and the driving unit are disposed.
- the apparatus 600 a may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber.
- the pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a are laminated.
- the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after the process is completed.
- the apparatus 600 a may rapidly and accurately manufacture the display device 300 a having a curved surface.
- the apparatus 600 a may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by accurately attaching the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a having a curved surface.
- the apparatus 600 a may improve product quality by removing air bubbles that may be generated (or preventing air bubbles from being generated) when the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a are compressed.
- FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 700 a for manufacturing the display device 300 a of FIG. 14 , according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention.
- the apparatus 700 a may include a first jig 710 a , a second jig 720 a , a driving unit M, a clamping unit 750 a , a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 730 a ), a linear driving unit L, and a cushion unit 790 a .
- the first jig 710 a and the second jig 720 a may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the driving unit M may include a first driving unit 715 a and a second driving unit 725 a
- the fixing unit may include a first fixing unit 730 a
- the first driving unit 715 a , the second driving unit 725 a , and the first fixing unit 730 a (which includes first absorption unit 731 a and first absorption pump 732 a ) may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the clamping unit 750 a may include a first clamping unit 751 a and a second clamping unit 752 a .
- the first clamping unit 751 a and the second clamping unit 752 a may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the linear driving unit L may include a first linear driving unit 760 a and a second linear driving unit 770 a , and the first linear driving unit 760 a and the second linear driving unit 770 a may linearly move the first clamping unit 751 a and the second clamping unit 752 a , respectively.
- the first linear driving unit 760 a and the second linear driving unit 770 a may linearly move the first clamping unit 751 a and the second clamping unit 752 a in a diagonal direction. Since the second linear driving unit 770 a may be formed similarly to the first linear driving unit 760 a , the following description will focus on the first linear driving unit 760 a.
- the first linear driving unit 760 a may include a first shaft 761 a , a first driving module 765 a , and a first elastic unit 763 a .
- the first shaft 761 a , the first driving module 765 a , and the first elastic unit 763 a may be formed in a similar manner to those described above (such as the first linear driving unit 760 in FIGS. 12 - 13 ).
- the first shaft 761 a is disposed in a diagonal direction to diagonally move the first clamping unit 751 a.
- the first driving module 765 a may vary a length of the first shaft 761 a . Since the first driving module 765 a and the first shaft 761 a are diagonally disposed with respect to the second jig 720 a as described above, the first clamping unit 751 a may be diagonally moved by varying the movement of the first shaft 761 a.
- the first clamping unit 751 a may diagonally move downward with respect to the second jig 720 a as the first shaft 761 a moves.
- the first clamping unit 751 a may diagonally move upward with respect to the second jig 720 a as the first shaft 761 a moves.
- the first shaft 761 a may include a ball screw as described above and thus may rotate as the first driving module 765 a operates.
- the first shaft 761 a may diagonally move downward or upward with respect to the second jig 720 a as the first driving module 765 a rotates.
- the cushion unit 790 a may be formed in various ways.
- the cushion unit 790 a may be provided on an outer surface of at least one of the first jig 710 a or the second jig 720 a .
- the cushion unit 790 a is formed on an entire outer surface of the second jig 720 a.
- a method of manufacturing the display device 300 a may be similar to that described above.
- the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a may be manufactured and prepared.
- the panel member 390 a may include the display panel 330 a and the TSP 340 a as described above. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the panel member 390 a includes both the display panel 330 a and the TSP 340 a.
- the cover window 310 a may be disposed on the first jig 710 a .
- the cover window 310 a may be formed to have a curved surface having a predetermined curvature radius of R as described above, and may be seated on an outer surface of the first jig 710 a .
- a first absorption pump 732 a may operate to absorb air of a first absorption unit 731 a so that the cover window 310 a is fixed to the outer surface of the first jig 710 a.
- the display panel 330 a and the TSP 340 a When the display panel 330 a and the TSP 340 a are completely manufactured as described above, the display panel 330 a and the TSP 340 a may be adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 a , and the first adhesive layer 320 a may be coated on the TSP 340 a.
- the TSP 340 a and the display panel 330 a may be disposed on the second jig 720 a .
- the display panel 330 a may be disposed to face the second jig 720
- the TSP 340 a may be disposed to face the first jig 710 a .
- the panel member 390 a manufactured as described above may be fixed by the first clamping unit 751 a and the second clamping unit 752 a .
- a distance between the first clamping unit 751 a and the second clamping unit 752 a is less than at least one of a width or a length of the panel member 390 a
- an upwardly curved portion of the panel member 390 a may protrude toward the first jig 710 a .
- the distance between the first clamping unit 751 a and the second clamping unit 752 a is less than a width of the panel member 390 a .
- the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a may be compressed against each other by moving at least one of the first jig 710 a or the second jig 720 a .
- a method of compressing the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a may be similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the first clamping unit 751 a and the second clamping unit 752 a may also move.
- the first clamping unit 751 a and the second clamping unit 752 a may be diagonally moved by the first linear driving unit 760 a and the second linear driving unit 770 a , respectively.
- the first clamping unit 751 a and the second clamping unit 752 a may be raised diagonally.
- both ends of the panel member 390 a may be released.
- the panel member 390 a may be sequentially adhered to the cover window 310 a beginning from a protruding portion toward both end portions.
- the first linear driving unit 760 a and the second linear driving unit 770 a may operate to lower the first clamping unit 751 a and the second clamping unit 752 a .
- the first clamping unit 751 a and the second clamping unit 752 a may be lowered diagonally.
- first clamping unit 751 a and the second clamping unit 752 a While the first clamping unit 751 a and the second clamping unit 752 a are lowered, the first jig 710 a and the second jig 720 a may get closer to each other to compress the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a .
- a method of adhering the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a through compression may be similar to that described above.
- the cushion unit 790 a may distribute a force applied to the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a .
- the cushion unit 790 a may help prevent the panel member 390 a or the cover window 310 a from being damaged by absorbing part of a force applied to the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a.
- a load range applied when the first jig 710 a and the second jig 720 a compress the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
- the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be reduced, and the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be delaminated and separated from each other.
- the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a are attached to each other the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
- the first driving unit 715 a and the second driving unit 725 a may operate to separate the first jig 710 a and the second jig 720 a .
- the operator may complete an operation by removing the completed display device 300 a from the first jig 710 a or the second jig 720 a.
- the apparatus 700 a may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4 C ) in which the first jig 710 a , the second jig 720 a , the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed.
- the apparatus 700 a may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber.
- the pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a are laminated.
- the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after the process is completed.
- the apparatus 700 a may manufacture the display device 300 a having a curved surface.
- the apparatus 700 a may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by accurately attaching the display panel 330 a and the cover window 310 a having a curved surface.
- the apparatus 700 a may improve quality by removing air bubbles or preventing air bubbles from being generated after the display panel 330 a and the curved portions are compressed.
- FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device 300 b according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention.
- the display device 300 b may include a cover window 310 b and a panel member 390 b as described above.
- the display device 300 b may include a first adhesive layer 320 b that is disposed between the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b .
- the panel member 390 b may include a display panel 330 b and a TSP 340 b as described above.
- a second adhesive layer 350 b may be provided between the display panel 330 b and the TSP 340 b to attach the display panel 330 b and the TSP 340 b.
- the cover window 310 b may be curved.
- the cover window 310 b may be formed such that a surface on which an image or text is displayed is curved after then panel member 390 b is attached.
- the cover window 310 b may be formed to have at least one curved surface having a curvature radius.
- the cover window 310 b may be formed to have a first curved surface having a curvature radius of R1, a second curved surface having a curvature radius of R2, and may further include a third curved surface having a curvature radius of R3 in at least one of a longitudinal direction or a width direction.
- the cover window 310 b may further include curved surfaces having curvature radii of R4, R5, . . . , and RN (N is a natural number) in addition to the curved surfaces having the curvature radii of R1, R2, and R3 (e.g., there may be a separate curvature radius of each portion or curved surface of the cover window 310 b ).
- N is a natural number
- the cover window 310 b is formed to have the first, second, and third curved surfaces having the curvature radii of R1, R2, and R3 in a width direction.
- the first adhesive layer 320 b and the second adhesive layer 350 b may be formed of the same material.
- the first adhesive layer 320 b and the second adhesive layer 350 b may be formed of an adhesive and transparent material.
- the first adhesive layer 320 b and the second adhesive layer 350 b may include an optical clear adhesive film (OCA film) or an adhesive material.
- the display device 300 b since the display device 300 b is formed to have a set or predetermined curvature radius, the display device 300 b may be applied to various members.
- FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 400 b for manufacturing the display device 300 b of FIG. 19 , according to an embodiment of the present invention.
- the apparatus 400 b may include a first jig 410 b , a second jig 420 b , a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 430 b ), and a cushion unit 490 b .
- An outer surface of the first jig 410 b on which the cover window 310 b is seated may be formed equally or similarly to an outer surface of the cover window 310 b contacting the outer surface of the first jig 410 b .
- the first jig 410 b may have at least two curved surfaces having curvature radii of R1, R2′, R3′, . . . , like the cover window 310 b .
- the first jig 410 b may be formed by being recessed away from the second jig 420 b.
- An outer surface of the second jig 420 b may protrude toward the first jig 410 b to correspond to or engage with a recessed portion of the first jig 410 b (e.g., the first jig 410 b may have a recessed outer surface).
- the outer surface of the second jig 420 b may be at least two curved surfaces having set or predetermined curvature radii.
- the driving unit M may include a first driving unit 415 b and a second driving unit 425 b .
- the first driving unit 415 b may linearly move the first jig 410 b toward the second jig 420 b
- the second driving unit 425 b may linearly move the second jig 420 b toward the first jig 410 b
- the first driving unit 415 b and the second driving unit 425 b may be formed in the same manner as or a similar manner to those described above.
- the fixing unit may include a first fixing unit 430 b provided on the first jig 410 b and a second fixing unit provided on the second jig 420 b .
- the fixing unit includes the first fixing unit 430 b .
- the first fixing unit 430 b and the second fixing unit may be formed in the same manner or a similar manner, and thus a detailed description of the second fixing unit will not be given.
- the first fixing unit 430 b may be formed in various ways.
- the first fixing unit 430 b may include an adhesive member, an adhesive chuck, or an electrostatic chuck.
- the first fixing unit 430 b may include a first absorption unit 431 b and a first absorption pump 432 b that is connected to the first absorption unit 431 b .
- the first fixing unit 430 b is not limited thereto, and may include a clamp, or a protrusion that is provided on the first jig 410 b and mechanically restricts the cover window 310 b .
- the first fixing unit 430 b includes the first absorption unit 431 b and the first absorption pump 432 b.
- the cushion unit 490 b may be provided on at least one of the first jig 410 b or the second jig 420 b .
- the cushion unit 490 b is the same as or similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the cushion unit 490 b is provided only on the second jig 420 b and is integrally formed on an outer surface of the second jig 420 b.
- the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be manufactured and prepared.
- a method of manufacturing the cover window 310 b is similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the panel member 390 b may adhere the TSP 340 b and the display panel 330 b by using the second adhesive layer 350 b.
- the cover window 310 b may be disposed on the first jig 410 b .
- the cover window 310 b may be formed to have at least two curved surfaces having curvature radii as described above and may be seated on an outer surface of the first jig 410 b .
- the first absorption pump 432 b may operate to absorb (e.g., evacuate or vacuum) air out of the first absorption unit 431 b , so that the cover window 310 b may be fixed to the outer surface of the first jig 410 b.
- the TSP 340 b and the display panel 330 b adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 b may be disposed on the second jig 420 b .
- the display panel 330 b may be disposed to face the second jig 420 b
- the TSP 340 b may be disposed to face the first jig 410 b.
- the first adhesive layer 320 b may be coated on the TSP 340 b .
- the first adhesive layer 320 b may be formed of the same material as or a similar material to that of the second adhesive layer 350 b.
- the first jig 410 b and the second jig 420 b may be moved toward each other by driving the first driving unit 415 b and the second driving unit 425 b .
- a protruding portion of the second jig 420 b may first contact the display panel 330 b , and the first adhesive layer 320 b and the cover window 310 b may be sequentially laminated from central portions of the display panel 330 b to both end portions.
- a load range applied when the first jig 410 b and the second jig 420 b compress the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
- the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be reduced, and the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be delaminated and separated from each other.
- the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b are attached to each other the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
- the cushion unit 490 b may uniformly distribute a force applied to the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b.
- the first driving unit 415 b and the second driving unit 425 b may operate to separate the first jig 410 b and the second jig 420 b .
- the operator may complete an operation by removing the completed display device 300 b from the first jig 410 b or the second jig 420 b.
- the apparatus 400 b may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4 C ) in which the first jig 410 b , the second jig 420 b , the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed.
- the apparatus 400 b may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber.
- the pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b are laminated.
- the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after the process is completed.
- the apparatus 400 b may manufacture any type of display device 300 b .
- the apparatus 400 b may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing vapors or preventing vapors from being generated between the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b when the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b are laminated.
- FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 500 b for manufacturing the display device 300 b of FIG. 19 , according to another embodiment of the present invention.
- the apparatus 500 b includes a first jig 510 b , a second jig 520 b , a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 530 b ), and a cushion unit 590 b .
- the first jig 510 b , the second jig 520 b , the driving unit M, the fixing unit, and the cushion unit 590 b are substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the driving unit M may include a first driving unit 515 b and a second driving unit 525 b
- the fixing unit may include a first fixing unit 530 b
- the first driving unit 515 b , the second driving unit 525 b , and the first fixing unit 530 b (which includes a first absorption unit 531 b and a first absorption pump 532 b ) are substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the apparatus 500 b includes a clamping unit 550 b that is spaced apart by a set or predetermined interval from at least one of the first jig 510 b or the second jig 520 b , and supports the panel member 390 b .
- the clamping unit 550 b is disposed adjacent to the second jig 520 b.
- the clamping unit 550 b may support one end of the panel member 390 b when the one end of the panel member 390 b is inserted into the clamping unit 550 b .
- a plurality of the clamping units 550 b may be provided, where a distance S4 between the clamping units 550 b is less than a length or a width of the panel member 390 b .
- the panel member 390 b may include at least one of the display panel 330 b or the TSP 340 b as described above.
- the distance S4 between the plurality of clamping units 550 b is less than a width of the panel member 390 b and the panel member 390 b includes the display panel 330 b and the TSP 340 b.
- the plurality of clamping units 550 b face respective side surfaces of the second jig 520 b , and fix both ends of the display panel 330 b , the second adhesive layer 350 b , the TSP 340 b , and the first adhesive layer 320 b .
- the plurality of clamping units 550 b include a first clamping unit 551 b and a second clamping unit 552 b that are spaced apart by a set or predetermined interval from each other.
- the apparatus 500 b may rapidly and easily manufacture the display device 300 b having a curved surface and a simple structure.
- the apparatus 500 b may accurately attach the cover window 310 b having a curved surface to the panel member 390 b , a product defect rate may be reduced or minimized.
- the apparatus 500 b since the apparatus 500 b includes the clamping unit 550 b to accurately align the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b , working efficiency may be improved.
- a method of manufacturing the display device 300 b by using the apparatus 500 b will now be described with reference to FIG. 21 .
- the cover window 310 b may be formed as described above, the display panel 330 b may be formed, and then the TSP 340 b and the display panel 330 b may be adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 b .
- the cover window 310 b may be mounted on the first jig 510 b as described above.
- respective ends of the TSP 340 b on which the first adhesive layer 320 b is attached are fixed to the first clamping unit 551 b and the second clamping unit 552 b .
- the respective ends of panel member 390 b may be fixed by being inserted into grooves formed in the first clamping unit 551 b and the second clamping unit 552 b as described above.
- portions of the display panel 330 b , the second adhesive layer 350 b , the TSP 340 b , and the first adhesive layer 320 b may be curved upward (for example, with respect to a gravity direction).
- a distance S4 between the first clamping unit 551 b and the second clamping unit 552 b is less than at least one of a width or a length of at least one of the display panel 330 b or the TSP 340 b , the portions of the display panel 330 b , the second adhesive layer 350 b , the TSP 340 b , and the first adhesive layer 320 b may protrude toward the first jig 510 b.
- the display panel 330 b , the second adhesive layer 350 b , the TSP 340 b , and the first adhesive layer 320 b are fixed as described above, the display panel 330 b , the second adhesive layer 350 b , the TSP 340 b , the first adhesive layer 320 b , and the cover window 310 b may be compressed against each other by moving at least one of the first jig 510 b or the second jig 520 b .
- the first adhesive layer 320 b and the cover window 310 b are compressed by moving both the first jig 510 b and the second jig 520 b.
- the first driving unit 515 b and the second driving unit 525 b may operate to move the first jig 510 b and the second jig 520 b closer to each other.
- the upwardly curved portions of the display panel 330 b , the second adhesive layer 350 b , the TSP 340 b , and the first adhesive layer 320 b first contact the cover window 310 b .
- the display panel 330 b , the second adhesive layer 350 b , the TSP 340 b , and the first adhesive layer 320 b may be laminated to the cover window 310 b beginning from contact portions with the cover window 310 b toward both end portions.
- a load range applied when the first jig 510 b and the second jig 520 b compress the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
- the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be reduced, and the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be delaminated and separated from each other.
- the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b are attached to each other the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
- the cushion unit 590 b may uniformly distribute a force applied to the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b when the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b are compressed and laminated.
- the apparatus 500 b may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4 C ) in which the first jig 510 b , the second jig 520 b , the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed.
- the apparatus 500 b may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber.
- the pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b are laminated.
- the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after the process is completed.
- the apparatus 500 b may rapidly and accurately manufacture any type of display device 300 b having a curved surface.
- the apparatus 500 b may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by accurately attaching the display panel 330 b and the cover window 310 b having a curved surface.
- the apparatus 500 b may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing air bubbles or preventing air bubbles from being generated after the display panel 330 b and the curved portions are compressed.
- FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 600 b for manufacturing the display device 300 b of FIG. 19 , according to yet another embodiment of the present invention.
- the apparatus 600 b includes a first jig 610 b , a second jig 620 b , a driving unit M, a clamping unit 650 b , a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 630 b ), a linear driving unit L, and a cushion unit 690 b .
- the first jig 610 b , the second jig 620 b , the linear driving unit L, the clamping unit 650 b , the fixing unit, and the cushion unit 690 b may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the driving unit M may include a first driving unit 615 b and a second driving unit 625 b
- the fixing unit may include a first fixing unit 630 b
- the first driving unit 615 b , the second driving unit 625 b , and the first fixing unit 630 b may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the first fixing unit 630 b may include a first absorption pump 632 b and a first absorption unit 631 b.
- the clamping unit 650 b may include a first clamping unit 651 b and a second clamping unit 652 b .
- the first clamping unit 651 b and the second clamping unit 652 b may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the apparatus 600 b may include a linear driving unit L that includes a first linear driving unit 660 b and a second linear driving unit 670 b that respectively vertically move the first clamping unit 651 b and the second clamping unit 652 b .
- the first linear driving unit 660 b and the second linear driving unit 670 b may be formed similarly, and thus the following description will focus on the first linear driving unit 660 b.
- the first linear driving unit 660 b may include a first shaft 661 b that is connected to the first clamping unit 651 b and linearly moves the first clamping unit 651 b .
- the first linear driving unit 660 b may include a first driving module 665 b that drives the first shaft 661 b .
- the first driving module 665 b may include a cylinder or a motor.
- the first driving module 665 b includes a motor.
- the first shaft 661 b includes a ball screw that is lowered or raised as the first driving module 665 b rotates.
- the first linear driving unit 660 b may include a first elastic unit 663 b that surrounds the first shaft 661 b .
- the first elastic unit 663 b may include a compression spring, and may be formed of an elastic material such as rubber. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that the first elastic unit 663 b includes a compression spring.
- the first elastic unit 663 b may surround an outer surface of the first shaft 661 b as described above and thus may provide a restoring force to the first clamping unit 651 b when the first clamping unit 651 b moves.
- the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be manufactured and prepared.
- the panel member 390 b may include at least one of the display panel 330 b or the TSP 340 b as described above. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the panel member 390 b includes both the display panel 330 b and the TSP 340 b.
- the display panel 330 b and the TSP 340 b may be attached by using the second adhesive layer 350 b , and then the first adhesive layer 320 b may be formed on the TSP 340 b . Respective ends of the display panel 330 b and the TSP 340 b on which the first adhesive layer 320 b is formed may be fixed to the first clamping unit 651 b and the second clamping unit 652 b.
- one portion of the panel member 390 b may be curved upward (for example, with respect to a gravity direction).
- a distance S5 between the first clamping unit 651 b and the second clamping unit 652 b is less than at least one of a width or a length of the panel member 390 b
- the upwardly curved portion may protrude toward the first jig 610 b .
- the distance S5 between the first clamping unit 651 b and the second clamping unit 652 b is less than a width of the panel member 390 b.
- the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b may be compressed against each other by moving at least one of the first jig 610 b or the second jig 620 b .
- the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b are compressed by moving both the first jig 610 b and the second jig 620 b.
- first linear driving unit 660 b and the second linear driving unit 670 b may operate to vertically move the first clamping unit 651 b and the second clamping unit 652 b .
- first clamping unit 651 b and the second clamping unit 652 b may move at a speed similar to a speed at which the second jig 620 b moves.
- the panel member 390 b may be raised while maintaining its curved state.
- a distance between the first jig 610 b and the second jig 620 b reaches a set distance (for example, a predetermined distance)
- the first clamping unit 651 b and the second clamping unit 652 b may release from (for example, reduce their clamping force from) the panel member 390 b.
- the first linear driving unit 660 b and the second linear driving unit 670 b may lower the first clamping unit 651 b and the second clamping unit 652 b.
- the first driving unit 615 b and the second driving unit 625 b may continuously operate to bring the first jig 610 b and the second jig 620 b closer (for example, adjacent) to each other (for example, the second jig 620 b may contact panel member 390 b ).
- the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b may be compressed against each other.
- a method of compressing the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b may be performed in the same manner as that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- a load range applied when the first jig 610 b and the second jig 620 b compress the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
- the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be reduced, and the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be delaminated and separated from each other.
- the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b are attached to each other the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
- the cushion unit 690 b may uniformly distribute a force applied to the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b when the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b are laminated due to compression.
- the apparatus 600 b may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4 C ) in which the first jig 610 b , the second jig 620 b , the fixing unit, and the driving unit are disposed.
- the apparatus 600 b may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber.
- the pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b are laminated.
- the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after the process is completed.
- the apparatus 600 b may rapidly and accurately manufacture the display device 300 b having a curved surface.
- the apparatus 600 b may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by accurately attaching the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b having a curved surface.
- the apparatus 600 b may improve product quality by removing air bubbles that may be generated (or preventing air bubbles from being generated) when the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b are compressed.
- FIG. 23 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 700 b for manufacturing the display device 300 b of FIG. 19 , according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention.
- the apparatus 700 b may include a first jig 710 b , a second jig 720 b , a driving unit M, a clamping unit 750 b , a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 730 b ), a linear driving unit L, and a cushion unit 790 b .
- the first jig 710 b and the second jig 720 b may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the driving unit M may include a first driving unit 715 b and a second driving unit 725 b
- the fixing unit may include a first fixing unit 730 b
- the first driving unit 715 b , the second driving unit 725 b , and the first fixing unit 730 b (which includes first absorption unit 731 b and first absorption pump 732 b ) may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the clamping unit 750 b may include a first clamping unit 751 b and a second clamping unit 752 b .
- the first clamping unit 751 b and the second clamping unit 752 b may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the linear driving unit L may include a first linear driving unit 760 b and a second linear driving unit 770 b , and the first linear driving unit 760 b and the second linear driving unit 770 b may linearly move the first clamping unit 751 b and the second clamping unit 752 b , respectively.
- the first linear driving unit 760 b and the second linear driving unit 770 b may linearly move the first clamping unit 751 b and the second clamping unit 752 b in a diagonal direction. Since the second linear driving unit 770 b may be formed similarly to the first linear driving unit 760 b , the following description will focus on the first linear driving unit 760 b.
- the first linear driving unit 760 b may include a first shaft 761 b , a first driving module 765 b , and a first elastic unit 763 b .
- the first shaft 761 b , the first driving module 765 b , and the first elastic unit 763 b may be formed in a similar manner to those described above (such as the first linear driving unit 760 in FIGS. 12 - 13 ).
- the first shaft 761 b is disposed in a diagonal direction to diagonally move the first clamping unit 751 b.
- the first driving module 765 b may vary a length of the first shaft 761 b . Since the first driving module 765 b and the first shaft 761 b are diagonally disposed with respect to the second jig 720 b as described above, the first clamping unit 751 b may be diagonally moved by varying the movement of the first shaft 761 b.
- the first clamping unit 751 b may diagonally move downward with respect to the second jig 720 b as the first shaft 761 b moves.
- the first clamping unit 751 b may diagonally move upward with respect to the second jig 720 b as the first shaft 761 b moves.
- the first shaft 761 b may include a ball screw as described above and thus may rotate as the first driving module 765 b operates.
- the first shaft 761 b may diagonally move downward or upward with respect to the second jig 720 b as the first driving module 765 b rotates.
- the cushion unit 790 b may be formed in various ways.
- the cushion unit 790 b may be provided on an outer surface of at least one of the first jig 710 b or the second jig 720 b .
- the cushion unit 790 b is formed on an entire outer surface of the second jig 720 b.
- a method of manufacturing the display device 300 b may be similar to that described above.
- the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b may be manufactured and prepared.
- the panel member 390 b may include the display panel 330 b and the TSP 340 b as described above. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the panel member 390 b includes both the display panel 330 b and the TSP 340 b.
- the display panel 330 b and the TSP 340 b may be adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 b , and the first adhesive layer 320 b may be coated on the TSP 340 b.
- the panel member 390 b manufactured as described above may be fixed by the first clamping unit 751 b and the second clamping unit 752 b .
- a distance S6 between the first clamping unit 751 b and the second clamping unit 752 b is less than at least one of a width or a length of the panel member 390 b
- an upwardly curved portion of the panel member 390 b may protrude toward the first jig 710 b .
- the distance S6 between the first clamping unit 751 b and the second clamping unit 752 b is less than a width of the panel member 390 b .
- the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b may be compressed against each other by moving at least one of the first jig 710 b or the second jig 720 b .
- a method of compressing the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b may be similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the first clamping unit 751 b and the second clamping unit 752 b may also move.
- the first clamping unit 751 b and the second clamping unit 752 b may be diagonally moved by the first linear driving unit 760 b and the second linear driving unit 770 b , respectively.
- the first clamping unit 751 b and the second clamping unit 752 b may be raised diagonally.
- both ends of the panel member 390 b may be released.
- the panel member 390 b may be sequentially adhered to the cover window 310 b beginning from a protruding portion toward both end portions.
- the first linear driving unit 760 b and the second linear driving unit 770 b may operate to lower the first clamping unit 751 b and the second clamping unit 752 b .
- the first clamping unit 751 b and the second clamping unit 752 b may be lowered diagonally.
- first clamping unit 751 b and the second clamping unit 752 b While the first clamping unit 751 b and the second clamping unit 752 b are lowered, the first jig 710 b and the second jig 720 b may get closer to each other to compress the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b .
- a method of adhering the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b through compression may be similar to that described above.
- the cushion unit 790 b may distribute a force applied to the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b .
- the cushion unit 790 b may help prevent the panel member 390 b or the cover window 310 b from being damaged by absorbing part of a force applied to the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b.
- a load range applied when the first jig 710 b and the second jig 720 b compress the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
- the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be reduced, and the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be delaminated and separated from each other.
- the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b are attached to each other the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
- the apparatus 700 b may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4 C ) in which the first jig 710 b , the second jig 720 b , the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed.
- the apparatus 700 b may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber.
- the pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b are laminated.
- the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after the process is completed.
- the apparatus 700 b may manufacture the display device 300 b having a curved surface.
- the apparatus 700 b may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by accurately attaching the display panel 330 b and the cover window 310 b having a curved surface.
- the apparatus 700 b may improve quality by removing air bubbles or preventing air bubbles from being generated after the display panel 330 b and the curved portions are compressed.
- FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device 300 c according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
- the display device 300 c may include a cover window 310 c and a panel member 390 c .
- the panel member 390 c may include at least one of a TSP 340 c or a display panel 330 c . However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the panel member 390 c includes both the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c.
- the panel member 390 c may include a first adhesive layer 320 c , the TSP 340 c , a second adhesive layer 350 c , and the display panel 330 c .
- the first adhesive layer 320 c , the TSP 340 c , the second adhesive layer 350 c , and the display panel 330 c are the same as or similar to those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- At least a portion of the cover window 310 c may be curved.
- a middle portion of the cover window 310 c may be flat and both ends of the middle portion may be curved.
- the cover window 310 c may be formed of a glass material or a plastic material as described above.
- the cover window 310 c may be formed such that a surface to which the display panel 330 c is attached and on which an image or text is displayed is concave.
- the cover window 310 c , the TSP 340 c , and the display panel 330 c may be adhered and fixed by the first adhesive layer 320 c and the second adhesive layer 350 c.
- the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c may be attached to a protruding outer surface of the cover window 310 c .
- the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c may be provided on a protruding portion, instead of a recessed portion, of the curved cover window 310 c.
- the display device 300 c shaped as described above may be applied to various members.
- FIG. 25 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 400 c for manufacturing the display device 300 c of FIG. 24 , according to an embodiment of the present invention.
- the apparatus 400 c may include a first jig 410 c , a second jig 420 c , a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 430 c ), and a cushion unit 490 c .
- At least a portion of the first jig 410 c may be formed equally or similarly to an outer surface of the cover window 310 c .
- an outer surface of the first jig 410 c on which the cover window 310 c is seated may be the same as or similar in shape to an outer surface of the cover window 310 c seated on the outer surface of the first jig 410 c .
- the first jig 410 c may protrude toward the second jig 420 c.
- An outer surface of the second jig 420 c may be recessed away from the first jig 410 c to correspond to or engage with a protruding portion of the first jig 410 c.
- the driving unit M may include a first driving unit 415 c and a second driving unit 425 c .
- the first driving unit 415 c may linearly move the first jig 410 c toward the second jig 420 c
- the second driving unit 425 c may linearly move the second jig 420 c toward the first jig 410 c .
- the first driving unit 415 c and the second driving unit 425 c may be formed in the same manner as or a similar manner to those described above.
- the fixing unit may include a first fixing unit 430 c provided on the first jig 410 c and a second fixing unit provided on the second jig 420 c .
- the fixing unit includes the first fixing unit 430 c .
- the first fixing unit 430 c and the second fixing unit may be formed in the same manner or a similar manner, and thus a detailed description of the second fixing unit will not be given.
- the first fixing unit 430 c may be formed in various ways.
- the first fixing unit 430 c may include an adhesive member, an adhesive chuck, or an electrostatic chuck.
- the first fixing unit 430 c may include a first absorption unit, and a first absorption pump that is connected to the first absorption unit as described above.
- the first fixing unit 430 c is not limited thereto, and may include a clamp, or a protrusion that is provided on the first jig 410 c and mechanically restricts the cover window 310 c .
- the first fixing unit 430 c includes an adhesive member and is provided on an outer surface of a first cushion unit 493 c.
- the cushion unit 490 c may be provided on at least one of the first jig 410 c or the second jig 420 c .
- a size of the cushion unit 490 c may be less than a size of at least one of the cover window 310 c or the panel member 390 c .
- the cushion unit 490 c may be disposed only on a contact portion with at least one of the cover window 310 c or the panel member 390 c , and may be disposed to extend beyond the contact portion.
- the cushion unit 490 c may be the same as or similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the cushion unit 490 c may include the first cushion unit 493 c that is provided on a surface of the first jig 410 c , and a second cushion unit 491 c that is provided on a surface of the second jig 420 c .
- the first cushion unit 493 c and the second cushion unit 491 c may be integrally formed and respectively provided on the first jig 410 c and the second jig 420 c .
- first cushion units 493 c and the second cushion units 491 c may be formed, and the plurality of first cushion units 493 c and the plurality of second cushion units 491 c may be provided on an outer surface of the first jig 410 c and an outer surface of the second jig 420 c , respectively, and spaced apart from each other.
- first cushion unit 493 c and the second cushion unit 491 c are respectively provided on the first jig 410 c and the second jig 420 c.
- the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be manufactured and prepared.
- a method of manufacturing the cover window 310 c is similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c may be adhered to each other by using the second adhesive layer 350 c.
- the cover window 310 c may be disposed on the first jig 410 c .
- the cover window 310 c may be adhered and fixed to the first fixing unit 430 c .
- a size of the first fixing unit 430 c may be less than a size of the cover window 310 c.
- the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 c may be disposed on the second jig 420 c .
- the display panel 330 c may be disposed to face the second jig 420 c
- the TSP 340 c may be disposed to face the first jig 410 c.
- the first adhesive layer 320 c may be coated on the TSP 340 c .
- the first adhesive layer 320 c may be formed of the same material as or a similar material to that of the second adhesive layer 350 c.
- the first jig 410 c and the second jig 420 c may be moved toward each other by driving the first driving unit 415 c and the second driving unit 425 c.
- a load range applied when the first jig 410 c and the second jig 420 c compress the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
- the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be reduced, and the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be delaminated and separated from each other.
- the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c are attached to each other the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
- the first cushion unit 493 c and the second cushion unit 491 c may uniformly distribute a force applied to the cover window 310 c , the TSP 340 c , and the display panel 330 c.
- the first driving unit 415 c and the second driving unit 425 c may operate to separate the first jig 410 c and the second jig 420 c .
- the operator may complete an operation by removing the completed display device 300 c from the first jig 410 c or the second jig 420 c.
- the apparatus 400 c may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4 C ) in which the first jig 410 c , the second jig 420 c , the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed.
- the apparatus 400 c may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber.
- the pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c are laminated.
- the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after a lamination process is completed.
- the apparatus 400 c may manufacture any type of display device 300 c .
- the apparatus 400 c may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing vapors or preventing vapors from being generated between the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c when the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c are laminated.
- FIG. 26 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 500 c for manufacturing the display device 300 c of FIG. 24 , according to another embodiment of the present invention.
- the apparatus 500 c may include a first jig 510 c , a second jig 520 c , a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 530 c ), a cushion unit 590 c , and a clamping unit 550 c .
- the first jig 510 c , the second jig 520 c , the driving unit M, the fixing unit, and the cushion unit 590 c (including a first cushion unit 593 c and a second cushion unit 591 c ) are the same as or similar to those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the clamping unit 550 c may include a first clamping unit 551 c and a second clamping unit 552 c .
- the first clamping unit 551 c and the second clamping unit 552 c may be disposed to face each other on a side surface of the first jig 510 c or the second jig 520 c .
- the first clamping unit 551 c and the second clamping unit 552 c are disposed to face each other on a side surface of the second jig 520 c .
- the first clamping unit 551 c and the second clamping unit 552 c are formed in the same or similar manner as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be manufactured and prepared.
- a method of manufacturing the cover window 310 c is similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c may be adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 c.
- the cover window 310 c may be disposed on the first jig 510 c .
- the cover window 310 c may be adhered and fixed by a first fixing unit 530 c.
- the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 c as described above may be disposed on the second jig 520 c .
- the display panel 330 c may be disposed to face the second jig 520 c
- the TSP 340 c may be disposed to face the first jig 510 c .
- the display panel 330 c and the TSP 340 c may be stacked, and an end of the display panel 330 c and an end of the TSP 340 c may be fixed by being inserted into the first clamping unit 551 c and the second clamping unit 552 c.
- the first adhesive layer 320 c may be coated on the TSP 340 c .
- the first adhesive layer 320 c may be formed of the same or similar material as that of the second adhesive layer 350 c.
- the first jig 510 c and the second jig 520 c may be moved toward each other by driving a first driving unit 515 c and a second driving unit 525 c .
- a flat portion of the cover window 310 c may first contact the first adhesive layer 320 c , and curved ends of the cover window 310 c may sequentially contact the first adhesive layer 320 c to be laminated.
- a load range applied when the first jig 510 c and the second jig 520 c compress the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
- the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be reduced, and the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be delaminated and separated from each other.
- the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c are attached to each other the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
- the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c may be fixed while the first clamping unit 551 c and the second clamping unit 552 c do not move.
- the first cushion unit 593 c and the second cushion unit 591 c may uniformly distribute a force applied to the cover window 310 c , the TSP 340 c , and the display panel 330 c.
- the first driving unit 515 c and the second driving unit 525 c may operate to separate the first jig 510 c and the second jig 520 c .
- the operator may complete an operation by removing the completed display device 300 c from the first jig 510 c or the second jig 520 c.
- the apparatus 500 c may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4 C ) in which the first jig 510 c , the second jig 520 c , the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed.
- the apparatus 500 c may include a pressure adjustment unit for adjusting a pressure in the chamber.
- the pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c are laminated.
- the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after the process is completed.
- the apparatus 500 c may manufacture any type of display device 300 c .
- the apparatus 500 c may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing vapors or preventing vapors from being generated between the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c when the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c are laminated.
- FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 600 c for manufacturing the display device 300 c of FIG. 24 , according to yet another embodiment of the present invention.
- the apparatus 600 c may include a first jig 610 c , a second jig 620 c , a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 630 c ), a cushion unit 690 c , a clamping unit 650 c , and a linear driving unit L.
- the first jig 610 c , the second jig 620 c , the driving unit M, the fixing unit, the cushion unit 690 c (including a first cushion unit 693 c and a second cushion unit 691 c ), and the clamping unit 650 c are the same as or similar to those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the linear driving unit L may include a first linear driving unit 660 c that is provided on a first clamping unit 651 c and linearly moves the first clamping unit 651 c , and a second linear driving unit 670 c that is provided on a second clamping unit 652 c and linearly moves the second clamping unit 652 c .
- the first linear driving unit 660 c and the second linear driving unit 670 c may respectively linearly move the first clamping unit 651 c and the second clamping unit 652 c in the same direction as a direction in which the second jig 620 c moves (e.g., in a moving direction of the second jig 620 c ).
- the first linear driving unit 660 c and the second linear driving unit 670 c may be formed in the same or similar manner. For convenience of description, the following description will focus on the first linear driving unit 660 c.
- the first linear driving unit 660 c may include a first shaft 661 c that is connected to the first clamping unit 651 c and linearly moves.
- the first linear driving unit 660 c may include a first driving module 665 c that drives the first shaft 661 c .
- the first driving module 665 c may be formed to include a cylinder or a motor. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the first driving module 665 c includes a motor.
- the first shaft 661 c includes a ball screw that is raised and lowered as the first driving module 665 c rotates.
- the first linear driving unit 660 c may include a first elastic unit 663 c that surrounds the first shaft 661 c .
- the first elastic unit 663 c may include a compression spring, or may be formed of an elastic material such as rubber. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the first elastic unit 663 c includes a compression spring.
- the first elastic unit 663 c may be disposed to surround an outer surface of the first shaft 661 c as described above, and thus may provide a restoring force to the first clamping unit 651 c when the first clamping unit 651 c moves.
- the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be manufactured and prepared.
- a method of manufacturing the cover window 310 c is similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c may be adhered to each other by using the second adhesive layer 350 c.
- the cover window 310 c may be disposed on the first jig 610 c .
- the cover window 310 c may be adhered and fixed by the first fixing unit 630 c .
- the cover window 310 c may be disposed such that a protruding portion faces the second jig 620 c.
- the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 c as described above may be disposed on the second jig 620 c .
- the display panel 330 c may be disposed to face the second jig 620 c
- the TSP 340 c may be disposed to face the first jig 610 c .
- the display panel 330 c and the TSP 340 c may be stacked, and an end of the display panel 330 c and an end of the TSP 340 c may be fixed by being inserted into the first clamping unit 651 c and the second clamping unit 652 c .
- a central portion of the display panel 330 c and a central portion of the TSP 340 c may be disposed adjacent to a recessed portion of the second jig 620 c , or may be disposed adjacent to the cover window 310 c .
- a central portion of the display panel 330 c and a central portion of the TSP 340 c are disposed adjacent to a recessed portion of the second jig 620 c.
- the first adhesive layer 320 c may be coated on the TSP 340 c .
- the first adhesive layer 320 c may be formed of the same or similar material as that of the second adhesive layer 350 c .
- the first adhesive layer 320 c may be coated on the TSP 340 c before the display panel 330 c and the TSP 340 c are disposed on the first clamping unit 651 c and the second clamping unit 652 c.
- the first jig 610 c and the second jig 620 c may be moved toward each other by driving a first driving unit 615 c and a second driving unit 625 c .
- the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may sequentially contact and laminated beginning from a flat portion of the cover window 310 c toward both ends of the panel member 390 c.
- a load range applied when the first jig 610 c and the second jig 620 c compress the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
- the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be reduced, and the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be delaminated and separated from each other.
- the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c are attached to each other the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
- the first clamping unit 651 c and the second clamping unit 652 c may fix the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c while linearly moving as the first jig 610 c and the second jig 620 c move.
- the first linear driving unit 660 c and the second linear driving unit 670 c may be controlled based on a linear movement of at least one of the first jig 610 c or the second jig 620 c.
- the first cushion unit 693 c and the second cushion unit 691 c may uniformly distribute a force applied to the cover window 310 c , the TSP 340 c , and the display panel 330 c.
- the first driving unit 615 c and the second driving unit 625 c may operate to separate the first jig 610 c and the second jig 620 c .
- the operator may complete an operation by removing the completed display device 300 c from the first jig 610 c or the second jig 620 c.
- the apparatus 600 c may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4 C ) in which the first jig 610 c , the second jig 620 c , the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed.
- the apparatus 600 c may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber.
- the pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c are laminated.
- the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after a process is completed.
- the apparatus 600 c may manufacture any type of display device 300 c .
- the apparatus 600 c may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing vapors or preventing vapors from being generated between the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c when the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c are laminated.
- FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 700 c for manufacturing the display device 300 c of FIG. 24 , according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention.
- the apparatus 700 c may include a first jig 710 c , a second jig 720 c , a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 730 c ), a cushion unit 790 c , a clamping unit 750 c , and a linear driving unit L.
- the first jig 710 c , the second jig 720 c , the driving unit M, the fixing unit, the cushion unit 790 c , the clamping unit 750 c , and the linear driving unit L are the same as or similar to those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the linear driving unit L may include a first linear driving unit 760 c that is provided on a first clamping unit 751 c and linearly moves the first clamping unit 751 c , and a second linear driving unit 770 c that is provided on a second clamping unit 752 c and linearly moves the second clamping unit 752 c .
- the first linear driving unit 760 c and the second linear driving unit 770 c may respectively linearly move the first clamping unit 751 c and the second clamping unit 752 c in a diagonal direction.
- first linear driving unit 760 c and the second linear driving unit 770 c may linearly move the first clamping unit 751 c and the second clamping unit 752 c such that movement directions of the first clamping unit 751 c and the second clamping unit 752 c form angles with respect to a movement direction of the second jig 720 c.
- the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be manufactured and prepared.
- a method of manufacturing the cover window 310 c is similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c may be adhered to each other by using the second adhesive layer 350 c.
- the cover window 310 c may be disposed on the first jig 710 c .
- the cover window 310 c may be adhered and fixed by the first adhesive layer 320 c.
- the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 c as described above may be disposed on the second jig 720 c .
- the display panel 330 c may be disposed to face the second jig 720 c
- the TSP 340 c may be disposed to face the first jig 710 c .
- the display panel 330 c and the TSP 340 c may be stacked, and an end of the display panel 330 c and an end of the TSP 340 c may be fixed by being inserted into the first clamping unit 751 c and the second clamping unit 752 c .
- the display panel 330 c and the TSP 340 c may be disposed such that central portions are lower in position than other portions due to the first clamping unit 751 c and the second clamping unit 752 c.
- the first adhesive layer 320 c may be coated on the TSP 340 c .
- the first adhesive layer 320 c may be formed of the same or similar material as that of the second adhesive layer 350 c .
- the first adhesive layer 320 c may be coated on the TSP 340 c before the display panel 330 c and the TSP 340 c are disposed on the first clamping unit 751 c and the second clamping unit 752 c as described above.
- the first jig 710 c and the second jig 720 c may be moved toward each other by driving a first driving unit 715 c and a second driving unit 725 c .
- a flat portion of the cover window 310 c may first contact the first adhesive layer 320 c , and both end portions of the cover window 310 c may sequentially contact the first adhesive layer 320 c to be laminated.
- a load range applied when the first jig 710 c and the second jig 720 c compress the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
- the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be reduced, and the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be delaminated and separated from each other.
- the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c are attached to each other the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
- the first clamping unit 751 c and the second clamping unit 752 c may fix the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c while linearly moving as the first jig 710 c and the second jig 720 c move.
- the first linear driving unit 760 c and the second linear driving unit 770 c may be controlled based on a linear movement of at least one of the first jig 710 c or the second jig 720 c.
- a first cushion unit 793 c and a second cushion unit 791 c may uniformly distribute a force applied to the cover window 310 c , the TSP 340 c , and the display panel 330 c.
- the first driving unit 715 c and the second driving unit 725 c may operate to separate the first jig 710 c and the second jig 720 c .
- the operator may complete an operation by removing the completed display device 300 c from the first jig 710 c or the second jig 720 c.
- the apparatus 700 c may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4 C ) in which the first jig 710 c , the second jig 720 c , the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed.
- the apparatus 700 c may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber.
- the pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c are laminated.
- the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after a process is completed.
- the apparatus 700 c may manufacture any type of display device 300 c .
- the apparatus 700 c may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing vapors or preventing vapors from being generated between the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c when the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c are laminated.
- FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device 300 d according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention.
- the display device 300 d may include a cover window 310 d and a panel member 390 d as described above.
- the display device 300 d may include a first adhesive layer 320 d that is disposed between the panel member 390 d and the cover window 310 d .
- the panel member 390 d may include a display panel 330 d and a TSP 340 d as described above.
- a second adhesive layer 350 d may be provided between the display panel 330 d and the TSP 340 d to attach the display panel 330 d and the TSP 340 d.
- the cover window 310 d may be formed such that at least a portion of the cover window 310 d is curved.
- the cover window 310 d may be formed such that a surface to which the panel member 390 d is attached and on which an image or text is displayed is curved.
- the cover window 310 d may be formed to have a curved surface having a curvature radius of R.
- the cover window 310 d may be formed to have a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius in a longitudinal direction or a width direction.
- it will be assumed that the cover window 310 d is formed to have a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius and the curved surface is formed in a width direction of the cover window 310 d.
- the cover window 310 d may be formed such that a convex portion of the cover window 310 d faces the first adhesive layer 320 d .
- the TSP 340 d , the second adhesive layer 350 d , and the display panel 330 d may be attached and fixed to a convex outer surface of the cover window 310 d on the first adhesive layer 320 d.
- the display device 300 d since the display device 300 d is formed to have a set or predetermined curvature radius, the display device 300 d may be applied to various members.
- FIG. 30 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 400 d for manufacturing the display device 300 d of FIG. 29 , according to an embodiment of the present invention.
- the apparatus 400 d may include a first jig 410 d , a second jig 420 d , a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 430 d ), and a cushion unit 490 d (including a first cushion unit 493 d and a second cushion unit 491 d ).
- An outer surface of the first jig 410 d on which the cover window 310 d is seated may be the same as or similar to an outer surface of the cover window 310 d contacting the first jig 410 d .
- the first jig 410 d may have a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius to correspond to the cover window 310 d .
- the first jig 410 d may be formed to protrude toward the second jig 420 d.
- An outer surface of the second jig 420 d may be recessed away from the first jig 410 d to correspond to or engage with a protruding portion of the first jig 410 d .
- the outer surface of the second jig 420 d may be a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius.
- the driving unit M may include a first driving unit 415 d and a second driving unit 425 d .
- the first driving unit 415 d may linearly move the first jig 410 d toward the second jig 420 d
- the second driving unit 425 d may linearly move the second jig 420 d toward the first jig 410 d .
- the first driving unit 415 d and the second driving unit 425 d may be formed in the same manner as or a similar manner to those described above.
- the fixing unit may include a first fixing unit 430 d provided on the first jig 410 d and a second fixing unit provided on the second jig 420 d .
- the fixing unit includes the first fixing unit 430 d .
- the first fixing unit 430 d and the second fixing unit may be formed in the same manner or a similar manner, and thus a detailed description of the second fixing unit will not be given.
- the first fixing unit 430 d may be formed in various ways.
- the first fixing unit 430 d may include an adhesive member, an adhesive chuck, or an electrostatic chuck.
- the first fixing unit 430 d may include a first absorption unit, and a first absorption pump that is connected to the first absorption unit.
- the first fixing unit 430 d is not limited thereto, and may include a clamp, or a protrusion that is provided on the first jig 410 d and mechanically restricts the cover window 310 d .
- the first fixing unit 430 d includes an adhesive member.
- the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be manufactured and prepared.
- a method of manufacturing the cover window 310 d is similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the TSP 340 d and the display panel 330 d may be adhered to each other by using the second adhesive layer 350 d.
- the cover window 310 d may be disposed on the first jig 410 d .
- the cover window 310 d may be formed to have a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius of R as described above and may be seated on an outer surface of the first jig 410 d .
- the first fixing unit 430 d may adhere and fix the cover window 310 d.
- the TSP 340 d and the display panel 330 d adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 d may be disposed on the second jig 420 d .
- the display panel 330 d may be disposed to face the second jig 420 d
- the TSP 340 d may be disposed to face the first jig 410 d.
- the first adhesive layer 320 d may be coated on the TSP 340 d .
- the first adhesive layer 320 d may be formed of the same material as or a similar material to that of the second adhesive layer 350 d.
- the first jig 410 d and the second jig 420 d may be moved toward each other by driving the first driving unit 415 d and the second driving unit 425 d .
- a protruding portion of the cover window 310 d may first contact the first adhesive layer 320 d , and the first adhesive layer 320 d and the cover window 310 d may be sequentially laminated from central portions of the display panel 330 d toward both end portions.
- a load range applied when the first jig 410 d and the second jig 420 d compress the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
- the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be reduced, and the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be delaminated and separated from each other.
- the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d are attached to each other the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
- the cushion unit 490 d may uniformly distribute a force applied to the cover window 310 d , the TSP 340 d , and the display panel 330 d.
- the first driving unit 415 d and the second driving unit 425 d may operate to separate the first jig 410 d and the second jig 420 d .
- the operator may complete an operation by removing the completed display device 300 d from the first jig 410 d or the second jig 420 d.
- the apparatus 400 d may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4 C ) in which the first jig 410 d , the second jig 420 d , the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed.
- the apparatus 400 d may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber.
- the pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d are laminated.
- the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after the process is completed.
- the apparatus 400 d may manufacture any type of display device 300 d .
- the apparatus 400 d may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing vapors or preventing vapors from being generated between the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d when the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d are laminated.
- FIG. 31 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 500 d for manufacturing the display device 300 d of FIG. 29 , according to another embodiment of the present invention.
- the apparatus 500 d may include a first jig 510 d , a second jig 520 d , a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 530 d ), a cushion unit 590 d , and a clamping unit 550 d .
- the first jig 510 d , the second jig 520 d , the driving unit M, the fixing unit, and the cushion unit 590 d (including a first cushion unit 593 d and a second cushion unit 591 d ) are the same as or similar to those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the clamping unit 550 d may include a first clamping unit 551 d and a second clamping unit 552 d .
- the first clamping unit 551 d and the second clamping unit 552 d may be disposed to face each other on a side surface of the first jig 510 d or the second jig 520 d .
- the first clamping unit 551 d and the second clamping unit 552 d are disposed to face each other on a side surface of the second jig 520 d .
- the first clamping unit 551 d and the second clamping unit 552 d are formed in the same or similar manner as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be manufactured and prepared.
- a method of manufacturing the cover window 310 d is similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the TSP 340 d and the display panel 330 d may be adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 d.
- the cover window 310 d may be disposed on the first jig 510 d .
- the cover window 310 d may be formed to have a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius of R as described above and may be seated on an outer surface of the first jig 510 d .
- the cover window 310 d may be adhered and fixed by the first fixing unit 530 d.
- the TSP 340 d and the display panel 330 d adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 d as described above may be disposed on the second jig 520 d .
- the display panel 330 d may be disposed to face the second jig 520 d
- the TSP 340 d may be disposed to face the first jig 510 d .
- the display panel 330 d and the TSP 340 d may be stacked, and an end of the display panel 330 d and an end of the TSP 340 d may be fixed by being inserted into the first clamping unit 551 d and the second clamping unit 552 d.
- the first adhesive layer 320 d may be coated on the TSP 340 d .
- the first adhesive layer 320 d may be formed of the same or similar material as that of the second adhesive layer 350 d.
- the first jig 510 d and the second jig 520 d may be moved toward each other by driving a first driving unit 515 d and a second driving unit 525 d .
- a protruding portion of the cover window 310 d may first contact the first adhesive layer 320 d , and the first adhesive layer 320 d and the cover window 310 d may be sequentially laminated from central portions of the display panel 330 d toward both end portions.
- a load range applied when the first jig 510 d and the second jig 520 d compress the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
- the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be reduced, and the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be delaminated and separated from each other.
- the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d are attached to each other the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
- the TSP 340 d and the display panel 330 d may be fixed while the first clamping unit 551 d and the second clamping unit 552 d do not move.
- the first cushion unit 593 d and the second cushion unit 591 d may uniformly distribute a force applied to the cover window 310 d , the TSP 340 d , and the display panel 330 d.
- the first driving unit 515 d and the second driving unit 525 d may operate to separate the first jig 510 d and the second jig 520 d.
- the operator may complete an operation by removing the completed display device 300 d from the first jig 510 d or the second jig 520 d.
- the apparatus 500 d may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4 C ) in which the first jig 510 d , the second jig 520 d , the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed.
- the apparatus 500 d may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber.
- the pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d are laminated.
- the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after the process is completed.
- the apparatus 500 d may manufacture any type of display device 300 d .
- the apparatus 500 d may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing vapors or preventing vapors from being generated between the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d when the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d are laminated.
- FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 600 d for manufacturing the display device 300 d of FIG. 29 , according to yet another embodiment of the present invention.
- the apparatus 600 d may include a first jig 610 d , a second jig 620 d , a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 630 d ), a cushion unit 690 d , a clamping unit 650 d , and a linear driving unit L.
- the first jig 610 d , the second jig 620 d , the driving unit M, the fixing unit, the cushion unit 690 d , and the clamping unit 650 d are the same as or similar to those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the linear driving unit L may include a first linear driving unit 660 d that is provided on a first clamping unit 651 d and linearly moves the first clamping unit 651 d , and a second linear driving unit 670 d that is provided on a second clamping unit 652 d and linearly moves the second clamping unit 652 d .
- the first linear driving unit 660 d and the second linear driving unit 670 d may respectively linearly move the first clamping unit 651 d and the second clamping unit 652 d in the same direction as a direction in which the second jig 620 d moves.
- the first linear driving unit 660 d and the second linear driving unit 670 d may be formed in the same or similar manner. For convenience of description, the following description will focus on the first linear driving unit 660 d.
- the first linear driving unit 660 d may include a first shaft 661 d that is connected to the first clamping unit 651 d and linearly moves the first clamping unit 651 d .
- the first linear driving unit 660 d may include a first driving module 665 d that drives the first shaft 661 d .
- the first driving module 665 d may be formed to include a cylinder or a motor. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the first driving module 665 d includes a motor.
- the first shaft 661 d includes a ball screw that is raised and lowered as the first driving module 665 d rotates.
- the first linear driving unit 660 d may include a first elastic unit 663 d that surrounds the first shaft 661 d .
- the first elastic unit 663 d may include a compression spring, or may be formed of an elastic material such as rubber. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the first elastic unit 663 d includes a compression spring.
- the first elastic unit 663 d may be disposed to surround an outer surface of the first shaft 661 d as described above, and thus may provide a restoring force to the first clamping unit 651 d when the first clamping unit 651 d moves.
- the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be manufactured and prepared.
- a method of manufacturing the cover window 310 d is similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the TSP 340 d and the display panel 330 d may be adhered to each other by using the second adhesive layer 350 d.
- the cover window 310 d may be disposed on the first jig 610 d .
- the cover window 310 d may be formed to have a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius of R as described above, and may be seated on an outer surface of the first jig 610 d .
- the cover window 310 d may be adhered and fixed by the first fixing unit 630 d.
- the TSP 340 d and the display panel 330 d adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 d as described above may be disposed on the second jig 620 d .
- the display panel 330 d may be disposed to face the second jig 620 d
- the TSP 340 d may be disposed to face the first jig 610 d .
- the display panel 330 d and the TSP 340 d may be stacked, and an end of the display panel 330 d and an end of the TSP 340 d may be fixed by being inserted into a first clamping unit 651 d and a second clamping unit 652 d.
- the display panel 330 d and the TSP 340 d may be disposed such that at least one portion protrudes more than other portions toward the cover window 310 d or toward the second jig 620 d .
- at least one portion of the display panel 330 d and the TSP 340 d protrudes more than other portions toward the second jig 620 d.
- the first adhesive layer 320 d may be coated on the TSP 340 d .
- the first adhesive layer 320 d may be formed of the same or similar material as that of the second adhesive layer 350 d.
- the first jig 610 d and the second jig 620 d may be moved toward each other by driving a first driving unit 615 d and a second driving unit 625 d .
- a protruding portion of the cover window 310 d may first contact the first adhesive layer 320 d , and the first adhesive layer 320 d and the cover window 310 d may be sequentially laminated from central portions of the display panel 330 d toward both end portions.
- a load range applied when the first jig 610 d and the second jig 620 d compress the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
- the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be reduced, and the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be delaminated and separated from each other.
- the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d are attached to each other the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
- the first clamping unit 651 d and the second clamping unit 652 d may fix the TSP 340 d and the display panel 330 d while linearly moving as the first jig 610 d and the second jig 620 d move.
- the first linear driving unit 660 d and the second linear driving unit 670 d may be controlled based on a linear movement of at least one of the first jig 610 d or the second jig 620 d.
- a first cushion unit 693 d and a second cushion unit 691 d may uniformly distribute a force applied to the cover window 310 d , the TSP 340 d , and the display panel 330 d.
- the first driving unit 615 d and the second driving unit 625 d may operate to separate the first jig 610 d and the second jig 620 d .
- the operator may complete an operation by removing the completed display device 300 d from the first jig 610 d or the second jig 620 d.
- the apparatus 600 d may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4 C ) in which the first jig 610 d , the second jig 620 d , the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed.
- the apparatus 600 d may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber.
- the pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d are laminated.
- the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after a process is completed.
- the apparatus 600 d may manufacture any type of display device 300 d .
- the apparatus 600 d may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing vapors or preventing vapors from being generated between the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d when the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d are laminated.
- FIG. 33 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 700 d for manufacturing the display device 300 d of FIG. 29 , according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention.
- the apparatus 700 d may include a first jig 710 d , a second jig 720 d , a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 730 d ), a cushion unit 790 d , a clamping unit 750 d , and a linear driving unit L.
- the first jig 710 d , the second jig 720 d , the driving unit M, the fixing unit, the cushion unit 790 d , the clamping unit 750 d , and the linear driving unit L are the same as or similar to those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the linear driving unit L may include a first linear driving unit 760 d that is provided on the first clamping unit 751 d and linearly moves the first clamping unit 751 d , and a second linear driving unit 770 d that is provided on the second clamping unit 752 d and linearly moves the second clamping unit 752 d .
- the first linear driving unit 760 d and the second linear driving unit 770 d may respectively linearly move the first clamping unit 751 d and the second clamping unit 752 d in a diagonal direction.
- first linear driving unit 760 d and the second linear driving unit 770 d may linearly move the first clamping unit 751 d and the second clamping unit 752 d such that movement directions of the first clamping unit 751 d and the second clamping unit 752 d form angles with respect to a movement direction of the second jig 720 d.
- the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be manufactured and prepared.
- a method of manufacturing the cover window 310 d is similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the TSP 340 d and the display panel 330 d may be adhered to each other by using the second adhesive layer 350 d.
- the cover window 310 d may be disposed on the first jig 710 d .
- the cover window 310 d may be formed to have a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius of R as described above, and may be seated on an outer surface of the first jig 710 d .
- the cover window 310 d may be adhered and fixed by the first fixing unit 730 d.
- the TSP 340 d and the display panel 330 d adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 d as described above may be disposed on the second jig 720 d .
- the display panel 330 d may be disposed to face the second jig 720 d
- the TSP 340 d may be disposed to face the first jig 710 d .
- the display panel 330 d and the TSP 340 d may be stacked, and an end of the display panel 330 d and an end of the TSP 340 d may be fixed by being inserted into the first clamping unit 751 d and the second clamping unit 752 d.
- the display panel 330 d and the TSP 340 d may be disposed such that central portions are lower in position than other portions due to the first clamping unit 751 d and the second clamping unit 752 d . In other embodiments, the display panel 330 d and the TSP 340 d may be disposed such that central portions are higher in position than other portions. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that central portions of the display panel 330 d and the TSP 340 d are lower in position than other portions.
- the first adhesive layer 320 d may be coated on the TSP 340 d .
- the first adhesive layer 320 d may be formed of the same or similar material as that of the second adhesive layer 350 d.
- the first jig 710 d and the second jig 720 d may be moved toward each other by driving a first driving unit 715 d and a second driving unit 725 d .
- a protruding portion of the cover window 310 d may first contact the first adhesive layer 320 d , and the first adhesive layer 320 d and the cover window 310 d may be sequentially laminated from central portions of the display panel 330 d toward both end portions.
- a load range applied when the first jig 710 d and the second jig 720 d compress the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
- the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be reduced, and the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be delaminated and separated from each other.
- the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d are attached to each other the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
- the first clamping unit 751 d and the second clamping unit 752 d may fix the TSP 340 d and the display panel 330 d while linearly moving as the first jig 710 d and the second jig 720 d move.
- the first linear driving unit 760 d and the second linear driving unit 770 d may be controlled based on a linear movement of at least one of the first jig 710 d or the second jig 720 d.
- a first cushion unit 793 d and a second cushion unit 791 d may uniformly distribute a force applied to the cover window 310 d , the TSP 340 d , and the display panel 330 d.
- the first driving unit 715 d and the second driving unit 725 d may operate to separate the first jig 710 d and the second jig 720 d .
- the operator may complete an operation by removing the completed display device 300 d from the first jig 710 d or the second jig 720 d.
- the apparatus 700 d may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4 C ) in which the first jig 710 d , the second jig 720 d , the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed.
- the apparatus 700 d may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber.
- the pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d are laminated.
- the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after a process is completed.
- the apparatus 700 d may manufacture any type of display device 300 d .
- the apparatus 700 d may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing vapors or preventing vapors from being generated between the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d when the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d are laminated.
- FIG. 34 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device 300 e according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention.
- the display device 300 e may include a cover window 310 e and a panel member 390 e as described above.
- the display device 300 e may include a first adhesive layer 320 e that is disposed between the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e .
- the panel member 390 e may include a display panel 330 e and a TSP 340 e as described above.
- a second adhesive layer 350 e may be provided between the display panel 330 e and the TSP 340 e to attach the display panel 330 e and the TSP 340 e.
- At least a portion of the cover window 310 e may be curved.
- the cover window 310 e may be formed such that a surface to which the panel member 390 e is attached and on which an image or text is displayed is concave.
- the cover window 310 e may be formed to have at least one curved surface having a curvature radius.
- the cover window 310 e may be formed to have a first curved surface having a curvature radius of R1, a second curved surface having a curvature radius of R2, and may further include a third curved surface having a curvature radius of R3 in a longitudinal direction or a width direction.
- the cover window 310 e may further include curved surfaces having curvature radii of R4, R5, . . . , and RN (N is a natural number) in addition to the curved surfaces having the curvature radii of R1, R2, and R3.
- N is a natural number
- the cover window 310 e may be formed to protrude toward the first adhesive layer 320 e .
- the TSP 340 e , the second adhesive layer 350 e , and the display panel 330 e may be sequentially stacked and fixed to a protruding outer surface of the cover window 310 e on the first adhesive layer 320 e . Accordingly, since the display device 300 e is formed to have a set or predetermined curvature radii, the display device 300 e may be applied to various members.
- FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 400 e for manufacturing the display device 300 e of FIG. 34 , according to an embodiment of the present invention.
- the apparatus 400 e may include a first jig 410 e , a second jig 420 e , a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 430 e ), and a cushion unit 490 e .
- An outer surface of the first jig 410 e on which the cover window 310 e is seated may be formed equally or similarly to an outer surface of the cover window 310 e contacting the outer surface of the first jig 410 e .
- the first jig 410 e may have at least two curved surfaces having curvature radii of R1, R2′, R3′, . . . , like the cover window 310 e .
- the first jig 410 e may be formed to protrude toward the second jig 420 e.
- An outer surface of the second jig 420 e may be recessed away from the first jig 410 e to correspond to or engage with a protruding portion of the first jig 410 e .
- the outer surface of the second jig 420 e may include at least two curved surfaces having set or predetermined curvature radii.
- the driving unit M may include a first driving unit 415 e and a second driving unit 425 e .
- the first driving unit 415 e may linearly move the first jig 410 e toward the second jig 420 e
- the second driving unit 425 e may linearly move the second jig 420 e toward the first jig 410 e
- the first driving unit 415 e and the second driving unit 425 e may be formed in the same manner as or a similar manner to those described above.
- the fixing unit may include a first fixing unit 430 e provided on the first jig 410 e and a second fixing unit provided on the second jig 420 e .
- the fixing unit includes the first fixing unit 430 e .
- the first fixing unit 430 e and the second fixing unit may be formed in the same manner or a similar manner, and thus a detailed description of the second fixing unit will not be given.
- the first fixing unit 430 e may be formed in various ways.
- the first fixing unit 430 e may include an adhesive member, an adhesive chuck, or an electrostatic chuck.
- the first fixing unit 430 e may include a first absorption unit, and a first absorption pump that is connected to the first absorption unit.
- the first fixing unit 430 e is not limited thereto, and may include a clamp, or a protrusion that is provided on the first jig 410 e and mechanically restricts the cover window 310 e .
- the first fixing unit 430 e includes an adhesive member.
- the cushion unit 490 e may be provided on at least one of the first jig 410 e or the second jig 420 e .
- the cushion unit is the same as or similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the cushion unit is provided on each of the first jig 410 e and the second jig 420 e.
- the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be manufactured and prepared.
- a method of manufacturing the cover window 310 e is similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the TSP 340 e and the display panel 330 e may be adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 e.
- the cover window 310 e may be disposed on the first jig 410 e .
- the cover window 310 e may be formed to have at least two curved surfaces having curvature radii as described above and may be seated on an outer surface of the first jig 410 e .
- the cover window 310 e may be adhered and fixed by the first fixing unit 430 e.
- the TSP 340 e and the display panel 330 e adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 e may be disposed on the second jig 420 e .
- the display panel 330 e may be disposed to face the second jig 420 e
- the TSP 340 e may be disposed to face the first jig 410 e.
- the first adhesive layer 320 e may be coated on the TSP 340 e .
- the first adhesive layer 320 e may be formed of the same material as or a similar material to that of the second adhesive layer 350 e.
- the first jig 410 e and the second jig 420 e may be moved toward each other by driving the first driving unit 415 e and the second driving unit 425 e .
- a protruding portion of the cover window 310 e may first contact the first adhesive layer 320 e , and the first adhesive layer 320 e and the cover window 310 e may be sequentially laminated from central portions of the display panel 330 e to both end portions.
- a load range applied when the first jig 410 e and the second jig 420 e compress the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
- the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be reduced, and the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be delaminated and separated from each other.
- the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e are attached to each other the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
- a first cushion unit 493 e and a second cushion unit 491 e may uniformly distribute a force applied to the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e.
- the first driving unit 415 e and the second driving unit 425 e may operate to separate the first jig 410 e and the second jig 420 e .
- the operator may complete an operation by removing the completed display device 300 e from the first jig 410 e or the second jig 420 e.
- the apparatus 400 e may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4 C ) in which the first jig 410 e , the second jig 420 e , the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed.
- the apparatus 400 e may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber.
- the pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e are laminated.
- the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after the process is completed.
- the apparatus 400 e may manufacture any type of display device 300 e .
- the apparatus 400 e may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing vapors or preventing vapors from being generated between the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e when the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e are laminated.
- FIG. 36 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 500 e for manufacturing the display device 300 e of FIG. 34 , according to another embodiment of the present invention.
- the apparatus 500 e includes a first jig 510 e , a second jig 520 e , a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 530 e ), and a cushion unit 590 e .
- the first jig 510 e , the second jig 520 e , the driving unit M, the fixing unit, and the cushion unit 590 e are substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the driving unit M may include a first driving unit 515 e and a second driving unit 525 e
- the fixing unit may include a first fixing unit 530 e .
- the first driving unit 515 e , the second driving unit 525 e , and the first fixing unit 530 e are substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the apparatus 500 e includes a clamping unit 550 e that is spaced apart by a set or predetermined interval from at least one of the first jig 510 e or the second jig 520 e , and supports the panel member 390 e .
- the clamping unit 550 e is disposed adjacent to the second jig 520 e.
- the clamping unit 550 e may support the panel member 390 e when one end of the panel member 390 e is inserted into the clamping unit 550 e .
- a plurality of the clamping units 550 e may be provided, where a distance S7 between the clamping units 550 e is less than a length or a width of the panel member 390 e .
- the panel member 390 e may include at least one of the display panel 330 e or the TSP 340 e as described above. For convenience of description, it will be assumed that the distance S7 between the plurality of clamping units 550 e is less than a width of the panel member 390 e and the panel member 390 e includes the display panel 330 e and the TSP 340 e.
- the plurality of clamping units 550 e face respective side surfaces of the second jig 520 e , and fix both ends of the display panel 330 e , the second adhesive layer 350 e , the TSP 340 e , and the first adhesive layer 320 e .
- the plurality of clamping units 550 include a first clamping unit 551 e and a second clamping unit 552 e that are spaced apart by a set or predetermined interval from each other.
- the apparatus 500 e may rapidly and easily manufacture the display device 300 e having a curved surface and a simple structure.
- the apparatus 500 e may accurately attach the cover window 310 e having a curved surface to the panel member 390 e , a product defect rate may be reduced or minimized.
- the apparatus 500 e since the apparatus 500 e includes the clamping unit 550 e to accurately align the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e , working efficiency may be improved.
- the cover window 310 e may be formed as described above, the display panel 330 e may be formed, and then the TSP 340 e and the display panel 330 e may be adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 e .
- the cover window 310 e may be mounted on the first jig 510 e as described above.
- the first adhesive layer 320 e may be formed on the TSP 340 e , which may then be fixed to the first clamping unit 551 e and the second clamping unit 552 e .
- a method of fixing the TSP 340 e may include inserting and fixing both ends of the TSP 340 e into insertion grooves formed in the first clamping unit 551 e and the second clamping unit 552 e as described above.
- portions of the display panel 330 e , the second adhesive layer 350 e , the TSP 340 e , and the first adhesive layer 320 e may protrude toward the first jig 510 e or the second jig 520 e .
- the portions may protrude toward the second jig 520 e or protrude toward the first jig 510 e .
- the portions may protrude toward the second jig 520 e or protrude toward the first jig 510 e .
- the first adhesive layer 320 e and the cover window 310 e may be compressed against each other by moving at least one of the first jig 510 e or the second jig 520 e .
- the first adhesive layer 320 e and the cover window 310 e are compressed by moving both the first jig 510 e and the second jig 520 e.
- the first driving unit 515 e and the second driving unit 525 e may operate to move the first jig 510 e and the second jig 520 e closer to each other.
- a protruding portion of the cover window 310 e first contacts the first adhesive layer 320 e .
- the cover window 310 e and the first adhesive layer 320 e may be laminated beginning from a contact portion between the cover window 310 e and the first adhesive layer 320 e toward both end portions.
- a load range applied when the first jig 510 e and the second jig 520 e compress the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
- the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be reduced, and the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be delaminated and separated from each other.
- the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e are attached to each other the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
- a first cushion unit 593 e and a second cushion unit 591 e may uniformly distribute a force applied to the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e when the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e are compressed and laminated.
- the apparatus 500 e may rapidly and accurately manufacture the display device 300 e having a curved surface.
- the apparatus 500 e may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by accurately attaching the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e having a curved surface.
- the apparatus 500 e may improve product quality by removing air bubbles that may be generated (or preventing air bubbles from being generated) when the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e are compressed.
- FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 600 e for manufacturing the display device 300 e of FIG. 34 , according to yet another embodiment of the present invention.
- the apparatus 600 e includes a first jig 610 e , a second jig 620 e , a driving unit M, a clamping unit 650 e , a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 630 e ), a cushion unit 690 e , and a linear moving unit L.
- the first jig 610 e , the second jig 620 e , the driving unit, the clamping unit 650 e , the fixing unit, and the cushion unit 690 e may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the driving unit M may include a first driving unit 615 e and a second driving unit 625 e
- the fixing unit may include a first fixing unit 630 e .
- the first driving unit 615 e , the second driving unit 625 e , and the first fixing unit 630 e may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the clamping unit 650 e may include a first clamping unit 651 e and a second clamping unit 652 e .
- the first clamping unit 651 e and the second clamping unit 652 e may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the linear moving unit L may include a first linear driving unit 660 e and a second linear driving unit 670 e that respectively vertically move the first clamping unit 651 e and the second clamping unit 652 e .
- the first linear driving unit 660 e and the second linear driving unit 670 e are formed similarly, and thus the following description will focus on the first linear driving unit 660 e.
- the first linear driving unit 660 e may include a first shaft 661 e that is connected to the first clamping unit 651 e and linearly moves the first clamping unit 651 e .
- the first linear driving unit 660 e may include a first driving module 665 e that drives the first shaft 661 e .
- the first driving module 665 e may be formed to include a cylinder or a motor. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the first driving module 665 e includes a motor.
- the first shaft 661 e includes a ball screw that is raised and lowered as the first driving module 665 e rotates.
- the first linear driving unit 660 e may include a first elastic unit 663 e that surrounds the first shaft 661 e .
- the first elastic unit 663 e may include a compression spring, or may be formed of an elastic material such as rubber. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the first elastic unit 663 e includes a compression spring.
- the first elastic unit 663 e may be disposed to surround an outer surface of the first shaft 661 e as described above, and thus may provide a restoring force to the first clamping unit 651 e when the first clamping unit 651 e moves.
- the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be manufactured and prepared.
- the panel member 390 e may include at least one of the display panel 330 e or the TSP 340 e .
- the panel member 390 e includes the display panel 330 e and the TSP 340 e.
- the display panel 330 e and the TSP 340 e prepared as described above may be attached by using the second adhesive layer 350 e , and then the first adhesive layer 320 e may be formed on the TSP 340 e .
- both ends of the display panel 330 e and the TSP 340 e on which the first adhesive layer 320 e is formed may be fixed to the first clamping unit 651 e and the second clamping unit 652 e.
- a portion of the panel member 390 e may protrude toward the second jig 620 e or may protrude toward the first jig 610 e .
- a distance S8 between the first clamping unit 651 e and the second clamping unit 652 e is less than a width or a length of the panel member 390 e , a portion of the panel member 390 e may protrude toward the second jig 620 e or protrude toward the first jig 610 e .
- the distance S8 between the first clamping unit 651 e and the second clamping unit 652 e is less than a width of the panel member 390 e and a portion of the panel member 390 e protrudes toward the second jig 620 e.
- the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e may be compressed against each other by moving at least one of the first jig 610 e or the second jig 620 e .
- the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e are compressed against each other by moving both the first jig 610 e and the second jig 620 e.
- the first linear driving unit 660 e and the second linear driving unit 670 e may operate to vertically move the first clamping unit 651 e and the second clamping unit 652 e .
- the first clamping unit 651 e and the second clamping unit 652 e may move at a speed similar to a speed at which the second jig 620 e moves.
- the panel member 390 e may be raised while maintaining its curved state.
- the first clamping unit 651 e and the second clamping unit 652 e may release the panel member 390 e.
- the first linear driving unit 660 e and the second linear driving unit 670 e may operate to lower the first clamping unit 651 e and the second clamping unit 652 e.
- the first driving unit 615 e and the second driving unit 625 e may continuously operate to make the first jig 610 e and the second jig 620 e get closer to each other.
- the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e may be compressed.
- a method of compressing the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e is performed in the same manner as that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- a load range applied when the first jig 610 e and the second jig 620 e compress the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
- the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be reduced, and the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be delaminated and separated from each other.
- the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e are attached to each other the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
- a first cushion unit 693 e and a second cushion unit 691 e may uniformly distribute a force applied to the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e when the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e are compressed and laminated.
- the apparatus 600 e may rapidly and accurately manufacture the display device 300 e having a curved surface.
- the apparatus 600 e may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by accurately attaching the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e having a curved surface.
- the apparatus 600 e may improve product quality by removing air bubbles that may be generated (or preventing air bubbles from being generated) when the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e are compressed.
- FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 700 e for manufacturing the display device 300 e of FIG. 34 , according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention.
- the apparatus 700 e may include a first jig 710 e , a second jig 720 e , a driving unit M, a clamping unit 750 e , a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 730 e ), a linear driving unit L, and a cushion unit 790 e (including a first cushion unit 793 e and a second cushion unit 791 e ).
- the first jig 710 e and the second jig 720 e may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the driving unit M may include a first driving unit 715 e and a second driving unit 725 e
- the fixing unit may include a first fixing unit 730 e .
- the first driving unit 715 e , the second driving unit 725 e , and the first fixing unit 730 e may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the clamping unit 750 e may include a first clamping unit 751 e and a second clamping unit 752 e .
- the first clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the linear driving unit L may include a first linear driving unit 760 e and a second linear driving unit 770 e , and the first linear driving unit 760 e and the second linear driving unit 770 e may linearly move the first clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e , respectively.
- the first linear driving unit 760 e and the second linear driving unit 770 e may linearly move the first clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e in a diagonal direction. Since the second linear driving unit 770 e may be formed similarly to the first linear driving unit 760 e , the following description will focus on the first linear driving unit 760 e.
- the first linear driving unit 760 e may include a first shaft 761 e , a first driving module 765 e , and a first elastic unit 763 e .
- the first shaft 761 e , the first driving module 765 e , and the first elastic unit 763 e may be formed in a similar manner to those described above except that the first shaft 761 e is disposed in a diagonal direction to diagonally move the first clamping unit 751 e.
- the first driving module 765 e may vary a length of the first shaft 761 e . Since the first driving module 765 e and the first shaft 761 e are diagonally disposed with respect to the second jig 720 e as described above, the first clamping unit 751 e may be diagonally moved by varying the movement of the first shaft 761 e.
- the first clamping unit 751 e may diagonally move downward with respect to the second jig 720 e as the first shaft 761 e moves.
- the first clamping unit 751 e may diagonally move upward with respect to the second jig 720 e as the first shaft 761 e moves.
- the first shaft 761 e may include a ball screw as described above and thus may rotate as the first driving module 765 e operates.
- the first shaft 761 e may diagonally move downward or upward with respect to the second jig 720 e as the first driving module 765 e rotates.
- a method of manufacturing the display device 300 e may be similar to that described above.
- the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e may be manufactured and prepared.
- the panel member 390 e may include the display panel 330 e and the TSP 340 e as described above. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the panel member 390 e includes both the display panel 330 e and the TSP 340 e.
- the display panel 330 e and the TSP 340 e are completely manufactured as described above, the display panel 330 e and the TSP 340 e may be adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 e , and the first adhesive layer 320 e may be coated on the TSP 340 e.
- the panel member 390 e manufactured as described above may be fixed by the first clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e .
- the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e may be compressed against each other by moving at least one of the first jig 710 e or the second jig 720 e .
- a method of compressing the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e may be similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
- the first clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e may also move.
- the first clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e may be diagonally moved by the first linear driving unit 760 e and the second linear driving unit 770 e , respectively.
- the first clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e may be raised diagonally.
- both ends of the panel member 390 e may be released.
- the first linear driving unit 760 e and the second linear driving unit 770 e may operate to lower the first clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e .
- the first clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e may be lowered diagonally.
- first clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e While the first clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e are lowered, the first jig 710 e and the second jig 720 e may get closer to each other to compress the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e .
- a method of adhering the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e through compression may be similar to that described above.
- the first cushion unit 793 e and the second cushion unit 791 e may distribute a force applied to the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e .
- the first cushion unit 793 e and the second cushion unit 791 e may help prevent the panel member 390 e or the cover window 310 e from being damaged by absorbing part of a force applied to the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e.
- a load range applied when the first jig 710 e and the second jig 720 e compress the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
- the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be reduced, and the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be delaminated and separated from each other.
- the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e are attached to each other the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
- the apparatus 700 e may rapidly and accurately manufacture the display device 300 e having a curved surface.
- the apparatus 700 e may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by accurately attaching the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e having a curved surface.
- the apparatus 700 e may improve quality by removing air bubbles or preventing air bubbles from being generated when the display panel 330 e and the panel member 390 e are compressed.
- This application relates in general to a display device and more particularly, to a display device and a corresponding method and apparatus for manufacturing the display device that may rapidly, accurately, and cleanly manufacture the display device having a curved shape.
- Small electronic devices having curved display devices have presented challenges in accurately forming and aligning their corresponding cover windows (for example, transparent protective covers) and display panels (such as OLED display panels or flexible OLED display panels), and adhering the cover windows to the display panels via transparent adhesive without quality defects such as air bubbles between the cover windows and the display panels.
- Embodiments of the present invention address these problems by providing a display device having a curved cover window, a display panel and/or touch screen panel (TSP) that fits in the cover window, and an adhesive layer between the display device and the cover window, together with an apparatus and method for manufacturing the display device.
- the cover window is fabricated with a curved shape (such as rounded edges, inward or outward) and mounted on a first jig having a mount surface that conforms to the cover window.
- the cover window may sit in the first jig (through gravity) or attach to the first jig via a fixing unit, such as a vacuum suction device.
- the display panel to which the adhesive layer is attached
- the distance between the jigs is then closed (by moving one or both jigs towards the other using, for example, driving units), allowing the display panel to press up to the cover window and adhere via the adhesive layer, and without forming air bubbles between the cover window and the display panel.
- the display panel may be attached to a clamp unit, such as a pair of clamps, and bent through a clamping force to mate cleanly with the cover window when the jigs are moved towards each other.
- the clamps may be moved via dedicated driving units (for example, which drive ball screws through rotational movement to move the clamps) independently of the jigs, and may move, for example vertically or diagonally with respect to the jigs (and with respect to a gravity direction).
Landscapes
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Optics & Photonics (AREA)
- Nonlinear Science (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
- Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Mathematical Physics (AREA)
- Crystallography & Structural Chemistry (AREA)
- General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
- Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Devices For Indicating Variable Information By Combining Individual Elements (AREA)
- Electroluminescent Light Sources (AREA)
- Vehicle Body Suspensions (AREA)
- Diaphragms For Electromechanical Transducers (AREA)
- Measuring Pulse, Heart Rate, Blood Pressure Or Blood Flow (AREA)
Abstract
A display device includes a cover window including a curved portion, and a panel member laminated on the cover window. A method of manufacturing a display device includes mounting a cover window including a curved portion on a first jig including a curved portion, mounting a panel member on a second jig that conforms to a surface of the first jig, and laminating the cover window to the panel member by moving a first one of the first jig or the second jig to a first other one of the first jig or the second jig. An apparatus for manufacturing a display device includes a first jig including a mount surface that is partially curved to conform to a surface of a cover window, a second jig including a surface conforming to the mount surface and configured to contact a panel member, and a driving unit.
Description
- This application is a continuation of, and claims priority to and the benefit of U.S. application Ser. No. 14/794,720, filed on Jul. 8, 2015, which is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/931,795, filed on Jun. 28, 2013, now U.S. Pat. No. 11,523,522 B2, issued on Dec. 6, 2022, which claims priority to and the benefit of Korean Patent Application Nos. 10-2012-0071375, filed on Jun. 29, 2012, 10-2013-0014650, filed on Feb. 8, 2013, and 10-2013-0062110, filed on May 30, 2013 in the Korean Intellectual Property Office, the entire contents of all of which are incorporated herein by reference.
- Aspects of embodiments of the present invention relate to a display device, and a method and apparatus for manufacturing the display device.
- Electronic devices based on portability are widely used. Portable electronic devices that have recently been widely used include small electronic devices such as mobile phones as well as tablet personal computers (PCs). In order to support various functions, portable electronic devices include a display device for providing visual information such as an image to a user. Recently, as sizes of components for driving display devices have decreased, the importance of display devices in electronic devices has increased. Accordingly, display devices (such as flexible display devices) that bend at a set angle (for example, a predetermined angle) have been developed.
- In general, flexible display devices that may bend at a set angle may be manufactured using a flexible process, such as being flexibly manufactured. Since a flexible display device may be formed of a flexible material, the flexible display device may have any of various shapes. A flexible display device may be manufactured by forming a light-emitting unit on a substrate to form a display unit, and sealing the display unit by using an encapsulation unit, which may increase a lifetime of the display unit. The substrate may be formed of a flexible material, and the encapsulation unit may be formed, for example, as a substrate or a thin film. As designs of electronic devices have recently been diversified, demands for flexible display devices have increased.
- Embodiments of the present invention provide for a display device having a curved shape (for example, having an arc shape or a degree of curvature) that may enable efficient mass production, high reliability, and high quality. Further embodiments provide for a method and apparatus for manufacturing the display device.
- According to an embodiment of the present invention, a display device is provided. The display device includes a cover window including a curved portion, and a panel member laminated on the cover window.
- The panel member may be smaller in at least one of a length or a width than the cover window.
- The display device may further include an adhesive layer between the panel member and the cover window.
- The cover window may further include a flat portion extending from the curved portion.
- The panel member may be laminated entirely on the flat portion.
- The curved portion may include a plurality of curved portions.
- The panel member may include a first panel portion laminated on the flat portion, and a second panel portion extending in a curved shape from the first panel portion and laminated on the curved portion.
- The cover window may have a curved surface having a curvature radius.
- A curvature radius of a portion of the cover window may be different from a curvature radius of another portion of the cover window.
- The panel member may be formed on a recessed outer surface of the cover window or a protruding outer surface of the cover window.
- The panel member may include at least one of a display panel or a touch screen panel (TSP).
- The panel member may be flexible.
- According to another embodiment of the present invention, a method of manufacturing a display device is provided. The method includes mounting a cover window including a curved portion on a first jig including a curved portion, mounting a panel member on a second jig that conforms to a surface of the first jig, and laminating the cover window to the panel member by moving a first one of the first jig or the second jig to a first other one of the first jig or the second jig.
- At least a portion of the panel member may contact a surface of the second jig.
- The panel member may be bent along an outer surface of the second jig during the mounting of the panel member on the second jig.
- The panel member may be smaller in at least one of a length or a width than the cover window.
- The panel member may be flat during the mounting of the panel member on the second jig. The laminating of the cover window to the panel member may include partially curving the panel member by the moving of the first one of the first jig or the second jig.
- The first one of the first jig or the second jig may be above the first other one of the first jig or the second jig, or the first other one of the first jig or the second jig may be above the first one of the first jig or the second jig.
- A second one of the first jig or the second jig may be formed by protruding toward or recessing away from a second other one of the first jig or the second jig.
- The second other one of the first jig or the second jig may be formed by recessing away from or protruding toward the second one of the first jig or the second jig.
- The mounting of the panel member may include fixing the panel member to the second jig.
- The panel member may be flexible.
- Outer surfaces of the cover window and the first jig may be curved surfaces each having a curvature radius.
- A curvature radius of a portion of the cover window may be different from a curvature radius of another portion of the cover window. A curvature radius of a portion of an outer surface of the first jig may be different from a curvature radius of another portion of the outer surface of the first jig.
- The panel member may be attached to a recessed outer surface of the cover window or a protruding outer surface of the cover window.
- The panel member may include at least one of a display panel or a touch screen panel (TSP).
- According to yet another embodiment of the present invention, an apparatus for manufacturing a display device is provided. The apparatus includes a first jig including a mount surface that is partially curved to conform to a surface of a cover window, a second jig including a surface conforming to the mount surface and configured to contact a panel member, and a driving unit connected to a first one of the first jig or the second jig and configured to move the first one of the first jig or the second jig.
- The first jig may further include a first fixing unit for fixing the cover window to the mount surface. The second jig may further include a second fixing unit for fixing the panel member to the surface conforming to the mount surface.
- The first fixing unit or the second fixing unit may include an absorption unit, and an absorption pump for evacuating air from the absorption unit.
- The apparatus may further include a cushion unit at an outer surface of at least one of the first jig or the second jig.
- The cushion unit may include a plurality of cushion units at respective ends of the at least one of the first jig or the second jig. A distance between the cushion units may be less than at least one of a length or a width of the panel member.
- A second one of the first jig or the second jig may be formed by protruding toward or recessing away from another one of the first jig or the second jig.
- The other one of the first jig or the second jig may be formed by recessing away from or protruding toward the second one of the first jig or the second jig.
- An outer surface of the cover window and an outer surface of the first jig on which the cover window is configured to be seated may be curved surfaces each having a curvature radius.
- A curvature radius of a portion of the cover window may be different from a curvature radius of another portion of the cover window. A curvature radius of a portion of an outer surface of the first jig on which the cover window is configured to be seated may be different from a curvature radius of another portion of the outer surface of the first jig.
- The panel member may be configured to be attached to a recessed outer surface of the cover window or a protruding outer surface of the cover window.
- The panel member may include at least one of a display panel or a touch screen panel (TSP).
- The apparatus may further include a clamping unit spaced from the second jig and configured to support the panel member.
- The clamping unit may include a plurality of clamping units. A distance between the clamping units may be less than at least one of a length or a width of the panel member when the clamping units support the panel member.
- The apparatus may further include a linear driving unit coupled to the clamping unit and configured to linearly move the clamping unit.
- The linear driving unit may be further configured to linearly move the clamping unit in a same direction as a moving direction of the second jig.
- The linear driving unit may be further configured to linearly move the clamping unit in a diagonal direction of a moving direction of the second jig.
- At least one of the first jig or the second jig may further include a cushion unit at an outer surface of the at least one of the first jig or the second jig.
- A second one of the first jig or the second jig may be formed by protruding toward or recessing away from another one of the first jig or the second jig.
- The other one of the first jig or the second jig may be formed by protruding toward or recessing away from the second one of the first jig or the second jig.
- An outer surface of the cover window and an outer surface of the first jig on which the cover window is configured to be seated may be curved surfaces each having a curvature radius.
- A curvature radius of a portion of the cover window may be different from a curvature radius of another portion of the cover window. A curvature radius of a portion of an outer surface of the jig on which the cover window is configured to be seated may be different from a curvature radius of another portion of the outer surface of the first jig.
- The panel member may be configured to be attached to a recessed outer surface of the cover window or a protruding outer surface of the cover window.
- The panel member may include least one of a display panel or a touch screen panel (TSP).
- The above and other features and aspects of the present invention will become more apparent by describing in detail exemplary embodiments thereof with reference to the attached drawings in which:
-
FIG. 1 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device according to an embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display panel of the display device ofFIG. 1 ; -
FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device ofFIG. 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention; -
FIGS. 4A through 4C are cross-sectional views illustrating a method of manufacturing the display device ofFIG. 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device according to another embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device ofFIG. 5 according to an embodiment of the present invention; -
FIGS. 7A through 7C are cross-sectional views illustrating a method of manufacturing the display device ofFIG. 5 according to an embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device ofFIG. 5 according to another embodiment of the present invention; -
FIGS. 9A through 9C are cross-sectional views illustrating a method of manufacturing the display device ofFIG. 5 according to another embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device ofFIG. 5 according to yet another embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method of manufacturing the display device ofFIG. 5 according to yet another embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device ofFIG. 5 according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention; and -
FIG. 13 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method of manufacturing the display device ofFIG. 5 according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention. -
FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device according to yet another embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 15 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device ofFIG. 14 , according to an embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device ofFIG. 14 , according to another embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 17 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device ofFIG. 14 , according to yet another embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device ofFIG. 14 , according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device ofFIG. 19 , according to an embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device ofFIG. 19 , according to another embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device ofFIG. 19 , according to yet another embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 23 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device ofFIG. 19 , according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device according to still another embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 25 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device ofFIG. 24 , according to an embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 26 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device ofFIG. 24 , according to another embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device ofFIG. 24 , according to yet another embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device ofFIG. 24 , according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 30 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device ofFIG. 29 , according to an embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 31 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device ofFIG. 29 , according to another embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device ofFIG. 29 , according to yet another embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 33 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device ofFIG. 29 , according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 34 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device ofFIG. 34 , according to an embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 36 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device ofFIG. 34 , according to another embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device ofFIG. 34 , according to yet another embodiment of the present invention; -
FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device ofFIG. 34 , according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention. - Hereinafter, the present invention will be described more fully with reference to the accompanying drawings, in which exemplary embodiments are shown. The present invention may, however, be embodied in many different forms and should not be construed as being limited to the embodiments set forth herein. These embodiments are provided to make this disclosure more thorough, and to help convey concepts of the invention to one of ordinary skill in the art. The terminology used herein is for describing particular embodiments only and is not intended to be limiting of the present invention.
- As used herein, the term “and/or” includes any and all combinations of one or more of the associated listed items. Expressions such as “at least one of,” when preceding a list of elements, modify the entire list of elements and do not modify the individual elements of the list. As used herein, the singular forms “a,” “an,” and “the” are intended to include the plural forms as well, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise. It will be further understood that the terms “comprises,” “comprising,” “includes,” and/or “including,” when used herein, specify the presence of stated features, integers, steps, operations, elements, and/or components, but do not preclude the presence or addition of one or more other features, integers, steps, operations, elements, components, and/or groups thereof. It will be understood that, although the terms first, second, third, etc., may be used herein to describe various elements, these elements should not be limited by these terms. These terms are only used to distinguish one element from another element.
- In the embodiments of the present invention, examples of display devices include various display devices. For example, examples of display devices include liquid crystal display devices and organic light-emitting display devices. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the display devices are organic light-emitting display devices. Herein, the use of the term “may,” when describing embodiments of the present invention, refers to “one or more embodiments of the present invention.” In addition, the use of alternative language, such as “or,” when describing embodiments of the present invention, refers to “one or more embodiments of the present invention” for each corresponding item listed.
-
FIG. 1 is a cross-sectional view illustrating adisplay device 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention.FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view illustrating adisplay panel 130 of thedisplay device 100 ofFIG. 1 . - Referring to
FIGS. 1 and 2 , thedisplay device 100 includes acover window 110, a panel member (for example, display panel 130), and anadhesive layer 120. InFIG. 1 , thecover window 110 is partially curved. That is, thecover window 110 has a flat portion 111 (on which thedisplay panel 130 is laminated, with theadhesive layer 120 therebetween) and at least one end of theflat portion 111 is curved (e.g., a curved portion 112). As shown inFIG. 1 , both ends of theflat portion 111 are curved (e.g., two curved portions 112). As depicted, thecover window 110 includes theflat portion 111 andcurved portions 112 that extend from theflat portion 111. Thecurved portions 112 are formed on both ends of theflat portion 111. - The panel member may include at least one of the
display panel 130 or a touch screen panel (TSP). In one embodiment, the panel member may include only thedisplay panel 130 and may be attached to thecover window 110. In another embodiment, the panel member may include only the TSP and may be attached to thecover window 110. In yet another embodiment, the panel member may include thedisplay panel 130 and the TSP, and may be attached to thecover window 110. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the panel member includes only thedisplay panel 130. - The
display panel 130 may be flexible. Thedisplay panel 130 may be formed such that a size of thedisplay panel 130 is different from a size of thecover window 110. As shown, thedisplay panel 130 is smaller than thecover window 110. For example, thedisplay panel 130 is shorter in the at least one of a length or a width than the cover window 110 (due to the inward curvature of the cover window 110). For convenience of description, it will be assumed that thedisplay panel 130 is shorter in width than thecover window 110 as described below in further detail. For example, thedisplay panel 130 may be laminated entirely on the flat portion 111 (and not on any of the curved portions 112). Thedisplay panel 130 includes a first substrate S and a light-emitting unit. - The
display panel 130 may include an encapsulation unit B formed on the light-emitting unit. The encapsulation unit B may be formed as a thin film. In another embodiment, the encapsulation unit B may include a second substrate instead of or in addition to a thin film. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that the encapsulation unit B is formed as a thin film. - In
FIG. 2 , the light-emitting unit is formed on the first substrate S. The light-emitting unit includes a thin film transistor (TFT, in this case a driving TFT), apassivation film 131 formed to cover the TFT, and an organic light-emitting device, such as an organic light emitting diode (OLED) 138 formed on thepassivation film 131. The first substrate S may be formed of a glass material, but the present invention is not limited thereto and, in other embodiments, the first substrate S may be formed of a plastic material or a metal material such as steel use stainless (SUS, or stainless steel) or titanium (Ti). In another embodiment, the first substrate S may include polyimide (PI). For convenience of description, it will be assumed that the first substrate S is formed of PI. - A
buffer layer 132 formed of an organic compound and/or an inorganic compound such as SiOx (x≥1) or SiNx (x≥1) is formed on a top surface of the first substrate S. Anactive layer 133 having a set pattern (for example, a predetermined pattern) is formed on thebuffer layer 132, and then is covered by agate insulating layer 134. Theactive layer 133 includes asource region 133 a and adrain region 133 c, and achannel region 133 b located between thesource region 133 a and thedrain region 133 c. Theactive layer 133 may be formed by forming an amorphous silicon film on thebuffer layer 132, crystallizing the amorphous silicon film to form a polycrystalline silicon film, and patterning the polycrystalline silicon film. The source and drainregions active layer 133 are doped with impurities according to a type of the TFT such as a driving TFT (for example, driving TFT inFIG. 2 ) or a switching TFT. - A
gate electrode 135 corresponding to the channel region 113 b of theactive layer 133 and an interlayer insulatinglayer 136 covering thegate electrode 135 are formed on a top surface of thegate insulating layer 134. After contact holes (for example, via-hole H1) are formed in theinterlayer insulating layer 136 and thegate insulating layer 134, asource electrode 137 a and adrain electrode 137 b are formed on theinterlayer insulating layer 136 to respectively contact thesource region 133 a and thedrain region 133 c. - In some embodiments, a reflective film is formed at the same time (for example, in the same layer) as the source/
drain electrodes drain electrodes drain electrodes - The
passivation film 131 is formed on the TFT. Then apixel electrode 138 a of theOLED 138 is formed on thepassivation film 131. Thepixel electrode 138 a contacts thedrain electrode 137 b of the TFT through a via-hole H2 formed in thepassivation film 131. Thepassivation film 131 may be formed of an inorganic material and/or an organic material and have a single-layer structure or a multi-layer structure. As shown inFIG. 2 , thepassivation film 131 is formed as a planarization film having a flat top surface regardless of any roughness or irregularities of a bottom surface. Thepassivation film 131 may be formed of a transparent insulating material to achieve a resonance effect. - After the
pixel electrode 138 a is formed on thepassivation film 131, a pixel-definingfilm 139 is formed of an organic material and/or an inorganic material to cover thepixel electrode 138 a and thepassivation film 131, and is opened to expose thepixel electrode 138 a. An organic light-emittinglayer 138 b and acounter electrode 138 c are formed on at least thepixel electrode 138 a. Thepixel electrode 138 a functions as an anode and thecounter electrode 138 c functions as a cathode, or vice versa. - The
pixel electrode 138 a may be formed of a material having a high work function, such as indium tin oxide (ITO), indium zinc oxide (IZO), In2O3, or ZnO. Thecounter electrode 138 c may be formed of a metal material having a low work function such as Ag, Mg, Al, Pt, Pd, Au, Ni, Nd, Ir, Cr, Li, Ca, or a compound or alloy thereof. For example, thecounter electrode 138 c may be formed of Mg, Ag, or Al to have a small thickness to function as a semi-transmissive reflective film. Accordingly, thecounter electrode 138 c may optically resonate to transmit light. - The
pixel electrode 138 a and thecounter electrode 138 c are insulated from each other by the organic light-emittinglayer 138 b, and apply voltages of different polarities to the organic light-emittinglayer 138 b for the organic light-emittinglayer 138 b to emit light. The organic light-emittinglayer 138 b may be formed of a low molecular weight organic material or a high molecular weight organic material. - If the organic light-emitting
layer 138 b is formed of a low molecular weight organic material, the light-emittinglayer 138 b may have a single-layer or multi-layer structure formed by stacking a hole injection layer (HIL), a hole transport layer (HTL), an emission layer (EML), an electron transport layer (ETL), and an electron injection layer (EIL). Examples of the low molecular weight organic material include copper phthalocyanine (CuPc), N,N′-Di(naphthalene-1-yl)-N,N′-diphenyl-benzidine (NPB), and tris-8-hydroxyquinoline aluminum (Alq3). The low molecular weight organic material is formed by using vacuum deposition. The HIL, the HTL, the ETL, and the EIL may be commonly applied to red, green, and blue pixels. Accordingly, in some embodiments, the common layers may cover all pixels, like thecounter electrode 138 c. - If the organic light-emitting
layer 138 b is formed of a high molecular weight organic material, the organic light-emittinglayer 138 b may have a structure including an HTL and an EML. The HTL may be formed of poly(3,4-ethylenedioxythiophene) (PEDOT) and the EML may be formed of a high molecular weight organic material based on polyphenylene vinylene (PPV) or polyfluorene. The high molecular weight organic material may be formed by using screen printing or inkjet printing. The organic light-emittinglayer 138 b is not limited thereto, and various examples may be formed, applied, deposited, etc., as would be apparent to one of ordinary skill in the art. - The encapsulation unit B may be formed as a thin film as described above. In further detail, the encapsulation unit B may be formed by alternately stacking at least one organic layer and at least one inorganic layer. In some embodiments, a plurality of inorganic layers or a plurality of organic layers may be provided.
- The organic layer may be formed of a polymer, and may have a single-layer structure or a multi-layer structure formed of one or more selected from the group including polyethylene terephthalate, polyimide, polycarbonate, epoxy, polyethylene, and polyacrylate. In one embodiment, the organic layer may be formed of polyacrylate. In further detail, the organic layer may be formed by polymerizing a monomer composition including a diacrylate-based monomer and a triacrylate-based monomer. A monoacrylate-based monomer may be further included in the monomer composition. In one embodiment, a well-known photoinitiator such as TPO may be further included in the monomer composition, but other embodiments of the present embodiment are not necessarily limited thereto.
- The inorganic layer may have a single-layer structure or a multi-layer structure including a metal oxide or a metal nitride. In further detail, the inorganic layer may include one or more selected from the group including SiNx, Al2O3, SiO2, and TiO2. In one embodiment, an uppermost layer of the encapsulation unit B that is exposed to the outside may be an inorganic layer to reduce or prevent moisture from penetrating into the organic light-emitting device.
- The encapsulation unit B may have at least one sandwich structure in which at least one organic layer is inserted between at least two inorganic layers. In another embodiment, the encapsulation unit B may have at least one sandwich structure in which at least one inorganic layer is inserted between at least two organic layers.
- The encapsulation unit B may include a first inorganic layer, a first organic layer, and a second inorganic layer that are sequentially stacked on the display unit. In another embodiment, the encapsulation unit B may include a first inorganic layer, a first organic layer, a second inorganic layer, a second organic layer, and a third inorganic layer that are sequentially stacked on the light-emitting unit. In another embodiment, the encapsulation unit B may include a first inorganic layer, a first organic layer, a second inorganic layer, a second organic layer, a third inorganic layer, a third organic layer, and a fourth inorganic layer that are sequentially stacked on the light-emitting unit.
- A halogenated metal layer including LiF may be further disposed between the light-emitting unit and the first inorganic layer. The halogenated metal layer may reduce or prevent the light-emitting unit from being damaged when the first inorganic layer is formed by using sputtering or plasma deposition.
- The first organic layer may have an area smaller than that of the second inorganic layer, and the second organic layer may have an area smaller than that of the third inorganic layer. In one embodiment, the first organic layer may be completely covered by the second inorganic layer, and the second organic layer may be completely covered by the third inorganic layer.
- The encapsulation unit B may include a second substrate as described above. The second substrate may be formed similarly to the first substrate S. For example, the second substrate may be formed of a glass material, but like the first substrate S, the present invention is not limited thereto and, in other embodiments, the second substrate may be formed of a different material, such as a plastic material.
- The
display device 100 may include a touch panel formed on thedisplay panel 130 as described above. The touch panel may be located between thedisplay panel 130 and theadhesive layer 120. In other embodiments, the touch panel may be a panel positioned on thedisplay panel 130. For example, the touch panel may be formed on the encapsulation unit B. In another embodiment, the touch panel may be formed on thecover window 110 to have a panel shape or to have a pattern. As a method of forming a touch panel is well known to one of ordinary skill in the art, a detailed description thereof will not be given. In addition, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that a touch panel is not formed on thedisplay panel 130. - The
display device 100 includes theadhesive layer 120 that is located between thedisplay panel 130 and thecover window 110. Theadhesive layer 120 may be variously formed. For example, theadhesive layer 120 may include an adhesive film such as an optical clear adhesive (OCA) film or an adhesive material. - The
adhesive layer 120 may have the same size as thedisplay panel 130. In other embodiments, theadhesive layer 120 may be smaller than thedisplay panel 130. Theadhesive layer 120 is attached to one surface of thedisplay panel 130 to laminate thedisplay panel 130 to thecover window 110. For example, theadhesive layer 120 may be applied to the encapsulation unit B. - Accordingly, the
display device 100 that is partially curved may be attached to various electronic devices, and may easily display images having various shapes. A method of manufacturing thedisplay device 100 will now be described with reference toFIGS. 3 through 4C . -
FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view illustrating anapparatus 200 for manufacturing thedisplay device 100 ofFIG. 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention.FIGS. 4A through 4C are cross-sectional views illustrating a method of manufacturing thedisplay device 100 ofFIG. 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention. The same elements as those inFIG. 1 are denoted by the same reference numerals. - Referring to
FIGS. 3 through 4C , theapparatus 200 includes afirst jig 210 that is partially curved and has amount surface 211 that conforms to one surface of thecover window 110. InFIGS. 3 through 4C , thefirst jig 210 has a shape similar to that of thecover window 110. That is, themount surface 211 of thefirst jig 210 is curved. In addition, themount surface 211 has a flat portion on which theflat portion 111 of the cover window is mounted and themount surface 211 has curved portions on which thecurved portions 112 of the cover window are mounted. For example, themount surface 211 may be formed by being recessed in thefirst jig 210. - The
apparatus 200 includes asecond jig 220 that detachably couples to thefirst jig 210. One surface of thesecond jig 220 conforms to themount surface 211. InFIGS. 3 through 4C , one surface of thesecond jig 220 is curved in places to conform to the portions of themount surface 211 that are curved, and is flat in places to conform to the portion of themount surface 211 that is flat. That is, thesecond jig 220 is curved such that thesecond jig 220 protrudes toward thefirst jig 210. Thedisplay panel 130 is mounted on the flat surface of thesecond jig 220. - At least one of the
first jig 210 or thesecond jig 220 may be formed of an elastic material. In addition, at least one of thefirst jig 210 or thesecond jig 220 may be formed of a hard material. - In particular, the elastic material may be a soft material having an elastic force such as silicon, rubber, or a soft synthetic resin. The hard material may be a material having a high hardness such as reinforced plastic or a metal.
- Materials of the
first jig 210 and thesecond jig 220 may be selected in various ways. For example, thefirst jig 210 may be formed of a metal and thesecond jig 220 may be formed of silicon. In another embodiment, thefirst jig 210 may be formed of rubber and thesecond jig 220 may be formed of plastic. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that both thefirst jig 210 and thesecond jig 220 are formed of hard materials. - The
apparatus 200 may include a driving unit (such as second driving unit 225) that is connected to at least one of thefirst jig 210 or thesecond jig 220, and that moves the corresponding at least one of thefirst jig 210 or thesecond jig 220. The driving unit may include a first driving unit that moves thefirst jig 210 and thesecond driving unit 225 that moves thesecond jig 220. The first driving unit and thesecond driving unit 225 may be formed similarly. For convenience of description, it will be assumed that thesecond driving unit 225 is provided. - The
second driving unit 225 may include any of various devices. For example, thesecond driving unit 225 may include a cylinder that operates by air pressure or oil pressure to move thesecond jig 220. In other embodiments, thesecond driving unit 225 may include a motor that operates by electricity to move thesecond jig 220. For convenience of description, it will be assumed that thesecond driving unit 225 includes a cylinder. - The
apparatus 200 includes a fixing unit (for example, second fixing unit 240) that prevents or helps prevent thecover window 110 mounted on thefirst jig 210 from moving, or that prevents or helps prevent thedisplay panel 130 and theadhesive layer 120 mounted on thesecond jig 220 from separating from thesecond jig 220. The fixing unit includes an absorption unit (for example, second absorption unit 241) that is formed on at least one of thefirst jig 210 or thesecond jig 220. In addition, the fixing unit includes an absorption pump (for example, second absorption pump 242) that absorbs (for example, vacuums or evacuates) air from the absorption unit. In particular, the absorption pump may be provided outside a chamber C as described below. The fixing unit is not limited thereto and, in other embodiments, may be formed in other various ways as would be apparent to one of ordinary skill in the art. For example, the fixing unit may be a separate frame that is formed on thefirst jig 210 or thesecond jig 220. As another example, the fixing unit may be an adhesive member having an adhesive force. - The fixing unit may include a first fixing unit that is provided on the
first jig 210, and includes asecond fixing unit 240 that is provided on thesecond jig 220. The first fixing unit and thesecond fixing unit 240 may be formed similarly. For example, the first fixing unit and thesecond fixing unit 240 may fix thecover window 110 and thedisplay panel 130, respectively, by using air. In other embodiments, the first fixing unit and thesecond fixing unit 240 may fix thecover window 110 and thedisplay panel 130, respectively, by using a separate frame. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that only thesecond fixing unit 240 is used and thedisplay panel 130 is fixed by using air. - Accordingly, the
apparatus 200 may rapidly and easily manufacture thedisplay device 100 having a curved shape and a simple structure. In addition, since theapparatus 200 may accurately laminate thecover window 110 having a curved shape to thedisplay panel 130, a defect rate may be reduced or minimized. A method of manufacturing thedisplay device 100 by using theapparatus 200 will now be described with reference toFIGS. 4A through 4C . - In order to manufacture the
display device 100, thecover window 110 is first fabricated. Thecover window 110 may include any of various materials. For example, thecover window 110 may be formed of a glass material or a plastic material. Thecover window 110 is not limited thereto and, in other embodiments, may include any material as long as thecover window 110 is partially curved or capable of being partially curved. - After the
cover window 110 is fabricated, it may be flat, in which case thecurved portions 112 may be formed by bending both ends of thecover window 110. For example, thecurved portions 112 may be bent from theflat portion 111. InFIGS. 4A and 4C , thecurved portions 112 extend from theflat portion 111 as described above, and each has an arc shape having a set radius (for example, a predetermined radius) or degree of curvature. In other embodiments, each of thecurved portions 112 may have, for example, an oval shape instead of the arc shape. - The
display panel 130 may be manufactured before, during, or after thecover window 110 is manufactured. A method of manufacturing thedisplay panel 130 may be substantially the same as a method of manufacturing a general display panel (as would be apparent to one of ordinary skill in the art) and thus, a further detailed description thereof will not be given. - Once the
display panel 130 is prepared, theadhesive layer 120 is attached to one surface of thedisplay panel 130. For example, theadhesive layer 120 may be attached to the encapsulation unit B (or other second substrate) as described above with reference toFIG. 2 . Theadhesive layer 120 may, for example, be attached as a film to the encapsulation unit B, or be applied as a material to the encapsulation unit B. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that theadhesive layer 120 is formed as a film. - After the
adhesive layer 120 is attached to thedisplay panel 130, thecover window 110 and thedisplay panel 130 are respectively mounted on thefirst jig 210 and thesecond jig 220. That is, thecover window 110 is mounted on thefirst jig 210, and thedisplay panel 130 is mounted on thesecond jig 220. Thefirst jig 210 may be below the second jig 220 (for example, in a gravity direction). - Next, the distance between the
first jig 210 and thesecond jig 220 is decreased. For example, thefirst jig 210 may move toward thesecond jig 220, or thesecond jig 220 may move toward thefirst jig 210. In other embodiments, both thefirst jig 210 and thesecond jig 220 may move closer to each other. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that thesecond jig 220 moves. - One surface of the
first jig 210 is curved to conform (for example, closely attach) to one surface of thecover window 110. InFIGS. 4A and 4C , the surface of thefirst jig 210 is curved by being recessed. In addition, thedisplay panel 130 is mounted on one surface of thesecond jig 220. Thesecond fixing unit 240 fixes thedisplay panel 130 to the surface of thesecond jig 220. - In
FIGS. 4B and 4C , when thedisplay panel 130 is mounted on thesecond jig 220, asecond absorption unit 241 contacts, adheres, or is otherwise attached or fixed to one surface of thedisplay panel 130. Thesecond absorption unit 241 is partially exposed through an outer surface of thesecond jig 220. When thedisplay panel 130 is positioned in this manner, thesecond absorption pump 242 absorbs air from the second absorption unit 241 (for example, by creating a partial vacuum or a pressure difference). Since thedisplay panel 130 closes (for example, occludes) all or a portion of thesecond absorption unit 241, and air in thesecond absorption unit 241 is continuously absorbed (for example, vacuumed or evacuated), thesecond absorption unit 241 is in an almost vacuum state. When thesecond absorption pump 242 operates as described above, thedisplay panel 130 attached to thesecond jig 220 is not separated from thesecond jig 220 due to the pressure difference. - In
FIGS. 3 through 4C , a plurality ofsecond absorption units 241 is provided. Thesecond absorption units 241 are exposed or partially exposed through an outer surface of thesecond jig 220 as described above and are spaced apart from one another by a set interval (for example, a predetermined interval, such as evenly spaced). - When the
cover window 110, theadhesive layer 120, and thedisplay panel 130 are prepared as described above, thesecond jig 220 is moved toward thefirst jig 210 by driving thesecond driving unit 225. For example, thesecond driving unit 225 may be programmed to operate for a set period of time (for example, a predetermined period of time). When thesecond driving unit 225 operates in this manner, thesecond jig 220 approaches thefirst jig 210. When thesecond jig 220 is continuously moved toward thefirst jig 210, theadhesive layer 120 contacts thecover window 110. - In
FIG. 4C , sizes of theadhesive layer 120 and thedisplay panel 130 may be the same as or less than a size of theflat portion 111 as described above. That is, thedisplay panel 130 may be formed such that a width of thedisplay panel 130 is less than a width of thecover window 110, and theadhesive layer 120 may be formed such that a width of theadhesive layer 120 is less than the width of thedisplay panel 130. Accordingly, when thesecond jig 220 is moved toward thefirst jig 210, theadhesive layer 120 contacts one surface of theflat portion 111. When thesecond driving unit 225 continuously operates, theadhesive layer 120 contacting theflat portion 111 is compressed against theflat portion 111. Thus, thedisplay panel 130 and thecover window 110 may be attached to each other through lamination. - In particular, when the
cover window 110 and thedisplay panel 130 contact each other, a load range applied when thefirst jig 210 and thesecond jig 220 compress thecover window 110 and thedisplay panel 130 may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between thecover window 110 and thedisplay panel 130 may be reduced, and thecover window 110 and thedisplay panel 130 may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and thecover window 110 and thedisplay panel 130 are attached to each other, thecover window 110 and thedisplay panel 130 may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability. - The operation may be performed, for example in an atmospheric state or a vacuum state (such as a near vacuum state). The
apparatus 200 may include thefirst jig 210, and the chamber C in which thesecond jig 220 is disposed. In addition, theapparatus 200 may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure of the chamber C. When a pressure in the chamber C is maintained in a vacuum state, vapor formation between thecover window 110 and thedisplay panel 130 when thecover window 110 and thedisplay panel 130 are laminated may be effectively prevented. - Accordingly, the method may rapidly and accurately manufacture the
display device 100 having a curved shape. Since the method accurately laminates thecover window 110 having a curved shape to thedisplay panel 130, a defect rate may be reduced or minimized, and product quality may be improved. -
FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view illustrating adisplay device 300 according to another embodiment of the present invention. - Referring to
FIG. 5 , thedisplay device 300 includes acover window 310, apanel member 390, and anadhesive layer 320. Thecover window 310 includes aflat portion 311 andcurved portions 312. Thecover window 310 and theadhesive layer 320 are substantially the same as thecover window 110 andadhesive layer 120 ofFIG. 1 and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - The
panel member 390 may include afirst panel member 391 that is seated on theflat portion 311. In addition, thepanel member 390 may include asecond panel member 392 at least a portion of which is seated on thecurved portions 312. Thepanel member 390 may include at least one of thedisplay panel 330 or the TSP as described above. For convenience of description, it will be assumed that thepanel member 390 includes thedisplay panel 330. - In further detail, the
display panel 330 includes a firstdisplay panel portion 331 that is laminated on theflat portion 311. In addition, thedisplay panel 330 includes seconddisplay panel portions 332 that extend from the firstdisplay panel portion 331 and are laminated or partially laminated on thecurved portions 312. The seconddisplay panel portions 332 extend in a curved shape from the firstdisplay panel portion 331. Accordingly, since thedisplay device 300 includes thecover window 310 that is curved and thedisplay device 300 displays through aflat portion 311 and acurved portion 312, a larger or maximum active area may be obtained. Further, due to the inward curvature of thecover window 310, thedisplay panel 330 may be smaller in the at least one of a length or a width than thecover window 310. In addition, thedisplay device 300 that is partially curved may be attached to various electronic devices, and may easily display images having various shapes. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that thedisplay panel 330 is shorter in width than thecover window 310 as described below in further detail. - A method of manufacturing the
display device 300 will now be described with reference toFIGS. 6 through 7C . -
FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view illustrating anapparatus 400 for manufacturing thedisplay device 300 ofFIG. 5 according to an embodiment of the present invention.FIGS. 7A through 7C are cross-sectional views illustrating a method of manufacturing thedisplay device 300 ofFIG. 5 according to an embodiment of the present invention. The same members as those ofFIG. 5 are denoted by the same reference numerals. - Referring to
FIGS. 6 through 7C , theapparatus 400 includes afirst jig 410, asecond jig 420, a driving unit (such as first driving unit 415), and a fixing unit F (for example, first fixingunit 430 and second fixing unit 440). Thefirst jig 410, thesecond jig 420, the driving unit, and the fixing unit F are similar to thefirst jig 210, thesecond jig 220, the driving unit (for example, the second driving unit 225), and the fixing unit (for example, second fixing unit 240), respectively, as described above and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - The driving unit may include the
first driving unit 415 and a second driving unit, and the fixing unit F includes thefirst fixing unit 430 and thesecond fixing unit 440. Thefirst driving unit 415, the second driving unit, thefirst fixing unit 430, and thesecond fixing unit 440 are substantially the same as the first driving unit, thesecond driving unit 225, the first fixing unit, and thesecond fixing unit 240, respectively, as described above and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. However, it will be assumed that the driving unit including only thefirst driving unit 415 operates. - The
apparatus 400 may include acushion unit 490 provided on or a part of at least one of thefirst jig 410 or thesecond jig 420. In this embodiment, a thickness of thecushion unit 490 may be greater than or equal to 0.5 mm and less than or equal to 3 mm. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that thecushion unit 490 is part of a surface of thesecond jig 420. - In
FIGS. 6 through 7C , a plurality ofcushion units 490 are part of respective end portions of thesecond jig 420 to face thefirst jig 410. Thecushion units 490 include afirst cushion unit 491 and asecond cushion unit 492 that are part of a surface of thesecond jig 420 and spaced apart by a set interval (for example, a predetermined interval) from each other. The distance S1 between thefirst cushion unit 491 and thesecond cushion unit 492 is less than the at least one of a length or a width of thedisplay panel 330. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that the distance S1 between thefirst cushion unit 491 and thesecond cushion unit 492 is less than the width of thedisplay panel 330. - The
cushion units 490 support thedisplay panel 330 and help prevent air bubbles from being formed between thedisplay panel 330 and thecurved portions 312 when thesecond jig 420 and thefirst jig 410 are moved toward each other with thedisplay panel 330 and thecover window 310, respectively, therebetween. - Accordingly, the
apparatus 400 may rapidly and easily manufacture thedisplay device 300 having a curved shape and a simple structure. In addition, since theapparatus 400 may accurately laminate thecover window 310 having a curved shape to thedisplay panel 330, a defect rate may be reduced or minimized. Further, since the apparatus 400 (such as the second jig 420) includes thecushion unit 490, a defect rate that may increase during lamination of thedisplay panel 330 to thecover window 310 on thecurved portions 312 may be reduced. - A method of manufacturing the
display device 300 will now be described with reference toFIGS. 6 through 7C . - A method of manufacturing the
display device 300 by using theapparatus 400 is similar to that described above. For example, thecover window 310 and thedisplay panel 330 may be manufactured as described above and may be mounted on thefirst jig 410 and thesecond jig 420, respectively (seeFIG. 7A ). Next, thefirst fixing unit 430 and thesecond fixing unit 440 respectively fix thecover window 310 and thedisplay panel 330 to thefirst jig 410 and thesecond jig 420. When afirst absorption pump 432 operates, afirst absorption unit 431 is maintained in a vacuum (or near vacuum) state. Likewise, when asecond absorption pump 442 operates, asecond absorption unit 441 is maintained in a vacuum (or near vacuum) state. Accordingly, thecover window 310 and thedisplay panel 330 are fixed to thefirst jig 410 and thesecond jig 420, respectively. - In
FIGS. 6 through 7C , thefirst jig 410 is higher than the second jig 420 (for example, in a gravity direction). At least one of thefirst jig 410 or thesecond jig 420 then moves towards the other. For example, thefirst jig 410 may move toward thesecond jig 420, or thesecond jig 420 may move toward thefirst jig 410. In other embodiments, both thefirst jig 410 and thesecond jig 420 move closer to each other. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that thefirst jig 410 moves toward thesecond jig 420. When thefirst jig 410 moves toward thesecond jig 420, thefirst driving unit 415 operates. When thefirst driving unit 415 continuously operates, a curved surface of thecover window 310 contacts theadhesive layer 320. - At first, the
display panel 330 and theadhesive layer 320 may be flat against thesecond jig 420. Then, when theadhesive layer 320 and thecover window 310 contact each other, both ends of thedisplay panel 330 and theadhesive layer 320 may be curved (for example, through contact with thecover window 310 that is curved). Next, a first display panel portion 331 (that is flat) and second display panel portions 332 (that are curved) of thedisplay panel 330 are formed. Accordingly, the firstdisplay panel portion 331 and the seconddisplay panel portions 332 are formed when thedisplay panel 330 is adhered to theflat portion 311 and thecurved portions 312. Thecover window 310 may be attached to thedisplay panel 330 through lamination as thefirst driving unit 415 operates as described above (seeFIGS. 5 and 7C ). In other embodiments, thedisplay panel 330 and theadhesive layer 320 may be bent along an outer surface of thesecond jig 420 when thedisplay panel 330 and theadhesive layer 320 are mounted on thesecond jig 420. - In particular, when the
cover window 310 and thedisplay panel 330 contact each other, a load range applied when thefirst jig 410 and thesecond jig 420 compress thecover window 310 and thedisplay panel 330 may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between thecover window 310 and thedisplay panel 330 may be reduced, and thus thecover window 310 and thedisplay panel 330 may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and thecover window 310 and thedisplay panel 330 are attached to each other, thecover window 310 and thedisplay panel 330 may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability. - Accordingly, the method may rapidly and accurately manufacture the
display device 300 having a curved shape. Since the method accurately laminates thecover window 310 having a curved shape to thedisplay panel 330, a defect rate may be reduced or minimized. In addition, since the method removes air bubbles that may be formed (or prevents air bubbles from being formed) after thedisplay panel 330 and thecurved portions 312 are compressed, product quality may be improved. -
FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view illustrating anapparatus 500 for manufacturing thedisplay device 300 ofFIG. 5 according to another embodiment of the present invention.FIGS. 9A through 9C are cross-sectional views illustrating a method of manufacturing thedisplay device 300 ofFIG. 5 according to another embodiment of the present invention. - Referring to
FIGS. 8 through 9C , theapparatus 500 includes afirst jig 510, asecond jig 520, a driving unit M (such asfirst driving unit 515 and second driving unit 525), and a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 530). Thefirst jig 510, thesecond jig 520, the driving unit M, and the fixing unit are substantially the same as those described above and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. The driving unit M may include thefirst driving unit 515 and thesecond driving unit 525, and the fixing unit includes the first fixing unit 530 (includingfirst absorption unit 531 and first absorption pump 532). Thefirst driving unit 515, thesecond driving unit 525, and thefirst fixing unit 530 are substantially the same as those described above and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - The
apparatus 500 includes aclamping unit 550 that is spaced apart by a set interval (for example, a predetermined interval) from thesecond jig 520, and supports thedisplay panel 330 to which theadhesive layer 320 is applied. In other embodiments, theclamping unit 550 may be spaced apart by a set interval (for example, a predetermined interval) from thefirst jig 510, and supports thecover window 310. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that theclamping unit 550 is disposed adjacent to thesecond jig 520. - The
clamping unit 550 supports one or more ends of thedisplay panel 330 and theadhesive layer 320 when they are inserted into theclamping unit 550. InFIGS. 8 through 9C , a plurality of clampingunits 550 are provided, where a distance between the clampingunits 550 is less than the at least one of a length or a width of the panel member (for example, display panel 330) when the clampingunits 550 are fixing thedisplay panel 330. The panel member may include at least one of thedisplay panel 330 or the TSP as described above. Particularly, each of the clampingunits 550 is placed at both ends of thecover window 310 in the direction of the at least one of a width or a length of thecover window 310. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that a distance between the plurality of clampingunits 550 is less than a width of thedisplay panel 330 and the panel member includes thedisplay panel 330. - In
FIGS. 8 through 9C , the clampingunits 550 face respective side surfaces of thesecond jig 520, and fix respective ends of thedisplay panel 330 and theadhesive layer 320. The clampingunits 550 include afirst clamping unit 551 and asecond clamping unit 552 that are spaced apart by a set interval (for example, a predetermined interval) from each other. - Accordingly, the
apparatus 500 may rapidly and easily manufacture thedisplay device 300 having a curved shape and a simple structure. In addition, since theapparatus 500 may accurately laminate thecover window 310 having a curved shape to thedisplay panel 330, a defect rate may be reduced or minimized. Further, since theapparatus 500 includes theclamping unit 550 to accurately align thedisplay panel 330 and thecover window 310, working efficiency may be improved. - A method of manufacturing the
display device 300 by using theapparatus 500 will now be described with reference toFIGS. 9A through 9C . - First, the
cover window 310 is formed, thedisplay panel 330 is formed, and then theadhesive layer 320 is attached to thedisplay panel 330. Thecover window 310 may be mounted on thefirst jig 510 as described above (seeFIG. 9A ). Next, respective ends of thedisplay panel 330 on which theadhesive layer 320 is attached are fixed to thefirst clamping unit 551 and thesecond clamping unit 552. For example, the respective ends of thedisplay panel 330 may be fixed by being inserted into insertion grooves formed in thefirst clamping unit 551 and thesecond clamping unit 552. - Once the
display panel 330 and theadhesive layer 320 are fixed in this manner, middle portions of thedisplay panel 330 and theadhesive layer 320 are curved upward (for example, with respect to a gravity direction). As shown inFIGS. 9B and 9C , since a distance S2 between thefirst clamping unit 551 and thesecond clamping unit 552 is less than at least one of a width or a length of thedisplay panel 330, the middle portions of thedisplay panel 330 protrude toward thefirst jig 510. When thedisplay panel 330 and theadhesive layer 320 are fixed, thedisplay panel 330, theadhesive layer 320, and thecover window 310 may be compressed by moving at least one of thefirst jig 510 or thesecond jig 520. For convenience of description, it will be assumed that thedisplay panel 330, theadhesive layer 320, and thecover window 310 are compressed by moving both thefirst jig 510 and thesecond jig 520. - When the
first jig 510 and thesecond jig 520 move, thefirst driving unit 515 and thesecond driving unit 525 may operate to move thefirst jig 510 and thesecond jig 520 closer to each other. The middle portions of thedisplay panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320 (which are curved downward) then contact thecover window 310. For example, the middle portions of thedisplay panel 330 and theadhesive layer 320 may first contact a portion of theflat portion 311. When thefirst jig 510 and thesecond jig 520 continuously move, thedisplay panel 330 and theadhesive layer 320 are adhered to thecover window 310 from theflat portion 311 as the first contacting portion to thecurved portions 312. That is, thedisplay panel 330, theadhesive layer 320, and thecover window 310 contact in an order from theflat portion 311 to thecurved portions 312. - At some point (for example, after the
adhesive layer 320 contacts the flat portion 311), thesecond jig 520 may contact thedisplay panel 330, thedisplay panel 330 may detach from theclamping unit 550, and thefirst jig 510 and thesecond jig 520 may move closer to each other to further laminate thedisplay panel 330 to thecover window 310. - In particular, when the
cover window 310 and thedisplay panel 330 contact each other as described above, a load range applied when thefirst jig 510 and thesecond jig 520 compress thecover window 310 and thedisplay panel 330 may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and equal or less than 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between thecover window 310 and thedisplay panel 330 may be reduced, and thus thecover window 310 and thedisplay panel 330 may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa, when thecover window 310 and thedisplay panel 330 are attached to each other, thecover window 310 and thedisplay panel 330 may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability. - Accordingly, the method may rapidly and accurately manufacture the
display device 300 having a curved shape. In addition, since the method may accurately laminate thecover window 310 having a curved shape to thedisplay panel 330, a defect rate may be reduced or minimized. Further, since the method removes air bubbles that may be formed (or prevents air bubbles from being formed) after thedisplay panel 330 and thecurved portions 312 are compressed, product quality may be improved. - According to embodiments of the present invention, since a cover window that is partially curved and a display panel are rapidly and accurately laminated to each other, mass production, high reliability, and high quality may be achieved. In addition, since a display device may be manufactured rapidly, manufacturing time and costs may be reduced.
-
FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view illustrating anapparatus 600 for manufacturing thedisplay device 300 ofFIG. 5 according to yet another embodiment of the present invention.FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method of manufacturing thedisplay device 300 ofFIG. 5 according to yet another embodiment of the present invention. - Referring to
FIGS. 10 and 11 , theapparatus 600 includes afirst jig 610, asecond jig 620, a driving unit M (includingfirst driving unit 615 and second driving unit 625), aclamping unit 650, and a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 630). Thefirst jig 610 and thesecond jig 620 may be substantially the same as those described above and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - The driving unit M may include the
first driving unit 615 and thesecond driving unit 625, and the fixing unit may include thefirst fixing unit 630. Thefirst driving unit 615, thesecond driving unit 625, and thefirst fixing unit 630 may be substantially the same as those described above and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. Thefirst fixing unit 630 may include afirst absorption unit 631 and afirst absorption pump 632. - The
clamping unit 650 may include afirst clamping unit 651 and asecond clamping unit 652. Thefirst clamping unit 651 and thesecond clamping unit 652 may be substantially the same as those described above and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - The
apparatus 600 may include a firstlinear driving unit 660 and a second linear drivingunit 670 which respectively vertically move thefirst clamping unit 651 and the second clamping unit 652 (for example, in a vertical direction with respect to gravity). The firstlinear driving unit 660 and the second linear drivingunit 670 may be formed similarly and thus, the following description will focus on the firstlinear driving unit 660. - The first
linear driving unit 660 may include afirst shaft 661 that is connected to thefirst clamping unit 651 and linearly moves. In one embodiment, the firstlinear driving unit 660 may include afirst driving module 665 that drives thefirst shaft 661. Thefirst driving module 665 may include, for example, a cylinder or a motor. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that thefirst driving module 665 includes a motor. It will be further assumed that thefirst shaft 661 includes a ball screw that is lowered or raised as thefirst driving module 665 rotates. - The first
linear driving unit 660 may include a firstelastic unit 663 that surrounds thefirst shaft 661. The firstelastic unit 663 may include a compression spring, and may be formed of an elastic material such as rubber. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that the firstelastic unit 663 includes a compression spring. The firstelastic unit 663 may surround an outer surface of thefirst shaft 661 as described above and thus may provide a restoring force to thefirst clamping unit 651 when thefirst clamping unit 651 moves. - A method of manufacturing the
display device 300 by using theapparatus 600 will be described. Thecover window 310 and a panel member (for example, display panel 330) may be formed, and then theadhesive layer 320 may be formed on the panel member. The panel member may include at least one of thedisplay panel 330 or the TSP as described above. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the panel member includes thedisplay panel 330. Respective ends of thedisplay panel 330 on which theadhesive layer 320 is formed may be fixed to thefirst clamping unit 651 and thesecond clamping unit 652. Once thedisplay panel 330 is fixed to thefirst clamping unit 651 and thesecond clamping unit 652, middle portions of thedisplay panel 330 and theadhesive layer 320 may be curved upward (for example, with respect to a gravity direction). In further detail, since a distance S3 between thefirst clamping unit 651 and thesecond clamping unit 652 is less than at least one of a width or a length of thedisplay panel 330, the middle portions may protrude toward thefirst jig 610. In this case, it will be assumed that the distance S3 between thefirst clamping unit 651 and thesecond clamping unit 652 is less than a width of thedisplay panel 330. - After the
display panel 330 and theadhesive layer 320 are disposed in this manner, thedisplay panel 330, theadhesive layer 320, and thecover window 310 may be compressed against one another by moving at least one of thefirst jig 610 or thesecond jig 620. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that thedisplay panel 330, theadhesive layer 320, and thecover window 310 are compressed by moving both thefirst jig 610 and thesecond jig 620. - While the
first jig 610 and thesecond jig 620 move in this manner, the firstlinear driving unit 660 and the second linear drivingunit 670 may operate to vertically move thefirst clamping unit 651 and thesecond clamping unit 652. Thefirst clamping unit 651 and thesecond clamping unit 652 may move at a speed similar to a speed at which thesecond jig 620 moves. - When the
second jig 620, thefirst clamping unit 651, and thesecond clamping unit 652 are raised in this manner, thedisplay panel 330 and theadhesive layer 320 may be raised while maintaining their curved states. When a distance between thefirst jig 610 and thesecond jig 620 reaches a set distance (for example, a predetermined distance), thefirst clamping unit 651 and thesecond clamping unit 652 may release from (for example, reduce their clamping force from) thedisplay panel 330 and theadhesive layer 320. During or after this releasing of thefirst clamping unit 651 and thesecond clamping unit 652, the firstlinear driving unit 660 and the second linear drivingunit 670 may lower thefirst clamping unit 651 and thesecond clamping unit 652. - Next, the
first driving unit 615 and thesecond driving unit 625 may continuously operate to bring thefirst jig 610 and thesecond jig 620 closer (for example, adjacent) to each other (for example, thesecond jig 520 may contact the display panel 330). As thefirst jig 610 and thesecond jig 620 move closer, thedisplay panel 330, theadhesive layer 320, and thecover window 310 may be compressed against one another (e.g., starting with the flat portion 311). A method of compressing thedisplay panel 330, theadhesive layer 320, and thecover window 310 may be performed in the same manner as that described above and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - In particular, when the
cover window 310 and thedisplay panel 330 contact each other, a load range applied when thefirst jig 610 and thesecond jig 620 compress thecover window 310 and thedisplay panel 330 may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between thecover window 310 and thedisplay panel 330 may be reduced, and thecover window 310 and thedisplay panel 330 may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and thecover window 310 and thedisplay panel 330 are attached to each other, thecover window 310 and thedisplay panel 330 may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability. - Accordingly, the method may rapidly and accurately manufacture the
display device 300 having a curved shape. Further, the method may reduce or minimize a defect rate by accurately laminating thecover window 310 having a curved shape to thedisplay panel 330. In addition, the method may improve product quality by removing air bubbles that may be generated (or preventing air bubbles from being generated) after thedisplay panel 330 and thecurved portions 312 are compressed. -
FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view illustrating anapparatus 700 for manufacturing thedisplay device 300 ofFIG. 5 according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention.FIG. 13 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method of manufacturing thedisplay device 300 ofFIG. 5 according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention. - Referring to
FIGS. 12 and 13 , theapparatus 700 may include afirst jig 710, a second jig 720 (including a cushion unit 790), a driving unit M (includingfirst driving unit 715 and second driving unit 725), a clamping unit 750 (including afirst clamping unit 751 and a second clamping unit 752), a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 730), a firstlinear driving unit 760, and a second linear drivingunit 770. Thefirst jig 710 and thesecond jig 720 may be substantially the same as those described above and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - The driving unit M may include the
first driving unit 715 and thesecond driving unit 725, and the fixing unit may include thefirst fixing unit 730. Thefirst driving unit 715, thesecond driving unit 725, and the first fixing unit 730 (which includesfirst absorption unit 731 and first absorption pump 732) may be substantially the same as those described above and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - The first
linear driving unit 760 and the second linear drivingunit 770 may linearly move thefirst clamping unit 751 and thesecond clamping unit 752, respectively. The firstlinear driving unit 760 and the second linear drivingunit 770 may linearly move thefirst clamping unit 751 and thesecond clamping unit 752 in a diagonal direction, respectively, with respect to the second jig 720 (and, for example, with respect to a gravity direction). Since the second linear drivingunit 770 may be formed similarly to the firstlinear driving unit 760, the following description will focus on the firstlinear driving unit 760. - In further detail, the first
linear driving unit 760 may include afirst shaft 761, afirst driving module 765, and a firstelastic unit 763. Thefirst shaft 761, thefirst driving module 765, and the firstelastic unit 763 may be formed in a similar manner to those described above (such as the firstlinear driving unit 660 inFIGS. 10-11 ) except that, thefirst shaft 761 is disposed in a diagonal direction to diagonally move thefirst clamping unit 751 with respect to thesecond jig 720. - When the first
linear driving unit 760 operates, thefirst driving module 765 may vary a length of thefirst shaft 761. Since thefirst driving module 765 and thefirst shaft 761 are diagonally disposed with respect to thesecond jig 720 as described above, thefirst clamping unit 751 may be diagonally moved by varying the movement of thefirst shaft 761. - For example, when the
first driving module 765 operates to diagonally move thefirst shaft 761 downward with respect to thesecond jig 720, thefirst clamping unit 751 may diagonally move downward with respect to thesecond jig 720 as thefirst shaft 761 moves. Likewise, when thefirst driving module 765 operates in an opposite direction to diagonally move thefirst shaft 761 upward with respect to thesecond jig 720, thefirst clamping unit 751 may diagonally move upward with respect to thesecond jig 720 as thefirst shaft 761 moves. Thefirst shaft 761 may include a ball screw as described above and thus may rotate as thefirst driving module 765 operates. Thefirst shaft 761 may diagonally move downward or upward with respect to thesecond jig 720 as thefirst driving module 765 rotates. - The
cushion unit 790 may be formed in various ways. For example, thecushion unit 790 may be part of an outer surface (e.g., a contacting surface, such as a surface that contacts thecover window 310 or the display panel 330) of at least one of thefirst jig 710 or thesecond jig 720. In another embodiment, thecushion unit 790 may be part of a portion of such an outer surface of at least one of thefirst jig 710 or thesecond jig 720. In another embodiment, thecushion unit 790 is part of theapparatus 700 and covers such an outer surface of at least one of thefirst jig 710 or thesecond jig 720. For ease of description, it will be assumed that thecushion unit 790 is part of an entire such outer surface of thesecond jig 720. - A method of manufacturing the
display device 300 may be similar to that described above. In further detail, a panel member (for example, display panel 330) and thecover window 310 may be prepared, and then theadhesive layer 320 may be applied to the panel member. The panel member may include thedisplay panel 330 and the TSP as described above. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the panel member includes thedisplay panel 330. Thedisplay panel 330 to which theadhesive layer 320 is applied may be fixed by thefirst clamping unit 751 and thesecond clamping unit 752. When the fixing is completed, thedisplay panel 330, theadhesive layer 320, and thecover window 310 may be compressed against one another by moving at least one of thefirst jig 710 or thesecond jig 720. A method of compressing thedisplay panel 330, theadhesive layer 320, and thecover window 310 may be similar to that described above and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - When the
first jig 710 and thesecond jig 720 move in this manner, thefirst clamping unit 751 and thesecond clamping unit 752 may also move. Thefirst clamping unit 751 and thesecond clamping unit 752 may be diagonally moved by the firstlinear driving unit 760 and the second linear drivingunit 770, respectively. Thefirst clamping unit 751 and thesecond clamping unit 752 may be raised diagonally with respect to thesecond jig 720. - When the
first clamping unit 751 and thesecond clamping unit 752 are raised and then an interval between thefirst jig 710 and thesecond jig 720 reaches a preset interval, both ends of thedisplay panel 330 may be released from theclamping unit 750. Thedisplay panel 330 may be laminated to thecover window 310 by theadhesive layer 320 beginning from a middle portion of the display panel 330 (corresponding to theflat portion 311 of the cover window 310). - During or after the releasing of the
first clamping unit 751 and thesecond clamping unit 752 from thedisplay panel 330, the firstlinear driving unit 760 and the second linear drivingunit 770 may operate to lower thefirst clamping unit 751 and thesecond clamping unit 752. Thefirst clamping unit 751 and thesecond clamping unit 752 may be lowered diagonally with respect to thesecond jig 720. While thefirst clamping unit 751 and thesecond clamping unit 752 are lowered, thefirst jig 710 and thesecond jig 720 may get closer to each other to compress thedisplay panel 330, theadhesive layer 320, and thecover window 310 against one another. For example, thesecond jig 720 may contact thedisplay panel 330. A method of adhering thedisplay panel 330 and thecover window 310 through compression may be similar to that described above. - When the
display panel 330 and thecover window 310 are compressed by moving thefirst jig 710 and thesecond jig 720, thecushion unit 790 may spread a force applied to thedisplay panel 330 and thecover window 310. In addition, thecushion unit 790 may help prevent thedisplay panel 330 or thecover window 310 from being damaged by partially absorbing a force applied to thedisplay panel 330 and thecover window 310. - In particular, when the
cover window 310 and thedisplay panel 330 contact each other, a load range applied when thefirst jig 710 and thesecond jig 720 compress thecover window 310 and thedisplay panel 330 may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between thecover window 310 and thedisplay panel 330 may be reduced, and thecover window 310 and thedisplay panel 330 may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and thecover window 310 and thedisplay panel 330 are attached to each other, thecover window 310 and thedisplay panel 330 may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability. - Accordingly, the method may rapidly and accurately manufacture the
display device 300. Further, the method may reduce or minimize a defect rate by accurately laminating thecover window 310 having a curved surface to thedisplay panel 330. In addition, the method may improve product quality by removing air bubbles that may be generated (or preventing air bubbles from being generated) after thedisplay panel 330 and thecurved portions 312 are compressed. -
FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view illustrating adisplay device 300 a according to yet another embodiment of the present invention. - Referring to
FIG. 14 , thedisplay device 300 a may include acover window 310 a and apanel member 390 a as described above. In addition, thedisplay device 300 a may include a firstadhesive layer 320 a that is disposed between apanel member 390 a and thecover window 310 a. Thepanel member 390 a may include adisplay panel 330 a and aTSP 340 a as described above. In particular, a secondadhesive layer 350 a may be provided between thedisplay panel 330 a and theTSP 340 a to attach thedisplay panel 330 a and theTSP 340 a. - The
cover window 310 a may be formed such that at least a portion of thecover window 310 a is curved. In particular, thecover window 310 may be formed to have a curved surface having a curvature radius of R. Thecover window 310 a may be formed to have a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius in at least one of a longitudinal direction or a width direction. In addition, thecover window 310 a may be formed such that a surface on which an image or text is displayed after thepanel member 390 a is attached is convex. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that thecover window 310 is formed to have a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius and the curved surface is formed in a width direction of thecover window 310 a. - The first
adhesive layer 320 a and the secondadhesive layer 350 a may be formed of the same material. In further detail, the firstadhesive layer 320 a and the secondadhesive layer 350 a may be formed of a transparent material having an adhesive force. For example, the firstadhesive layer 320 a and the secondadhesive layer 350 a may include an optical clear adhesive (OCA) film or an adhesive material. - Accordingly, since the
display device 300 a is formed to have a set or predetermined curvature radius, thedisplay device 300 a may be provided on various members. -
FIG. 15 is a cross-sectional view illustrating anapparatus 400 a for manufacturing thedisplay device 300 a ofFIG. 14 , according to an embodiment of the present invention. - Referring to
FIG. 15 , theapparatus 400 a may include afirst jig 410 a, asecond jig 420 a, a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixingunit 430 a), and acushion unit 490 a. At least a portion of thefirst jig 410 a may be formed equally or similarly to an outer surface of thecover window 310 a. In further detail, thefirst jig 410 a may have a curved surface on which thecover window 310 a having a curved surface with a set or predetermined curvature radius is seated. In particular, thefirst jig 410 a may be recessed away from thesecond jig 420 a. - An outer surface of the
second jig 420 a may protrude toward thefirst jig 410 a to correspond to or engage with a recessed portion of thefirst jig 410 a. The outer surface of thesecond jig 420 a may be a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius. - The driving unit M may include a
first driving unit 415 a and asecond driving unit 425 a. Thefirst driving unit 415 a may linearly move thefirst jig 410 a toward thesecond jig 420 a, and thesecond driving unit 425 a may linearly move thesecond jig 420 a toward thefirst jig 410 a. Thefirst driving unit 415 a and thesecond driving unit 425 a may be formed in the same manner as or a similar manner to those described above. - In addition, the fixing unit may include a
first fixing unit 430 a provided on thefirst jig 410 a and a second fixing unit provided on thesecond jig 420 a. For convenience of description, it will be assumed that the fixing unit includes thefirst fixing unit 430 a. In addition, thefirst fixing unit 430 a and the second fixing unit may be formed in the same manner or a similar manner, and thus a detailed description of the second fixing unit will not be given. - The
first fixing unit 430 a may be formed in various ways. For example, thefirst fixing unit 430 a may include an adhesive member, an adhesive chuck, or an electrostatic chuck. In addition, thefirst fixing unit 430 a may include afirst absorption unit 431 a and afirst absorption pump 432 a that is connected to thefirst absorption unit 431 a. In particular, thefirst fixing unit 430 a is not limited thereto, and may include a clamp, or a protrusion that is provided on thefirst jig 410 a and mechanically restricts thecover window 310 a. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that thefirst fixing unit 430 a includes thefirst absorption unit 431 a and thefirst absorption pump 432 a. - The
cushion unit 490 a may be provided on at least one of thefirst jig 410 a or thesecond jig 420 a. In this case, thecushion unit 490 a is the same as or similar to that described above, and thus a detailed explanation thereof will not be repeated. In addition, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that thecushion unit 490 a is provided only on thesecond jig 420 a and is integrally formed on an outer surface of thesecond jig 420 a. - A method of manufacturing the
display device 300 a by using theapparatus 400 a will now be described. First, thecover window 310 a and thepanel member 390 a may be manufactured and prepared. In this case, a method of manufacturing thecover window 310 a is similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. In addition, theTSP 340 a and thedisplay panel 330 a may be adhered to each other by using the secondadhesive layer 350 a. - After the
cover window 310 a and thepanel member 390 a are manufactured and prepared as described above, thecover window 310 a may be disposed on thefirst jig 410 a. Thecover window 310 a may be formed to have a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius of R as described above and may be seated on an outer surface of thefirst jig 410 a. Thefirst absorption pump 432 a may operate to absorb (e.g., evacuate or vacuum) air out of thefirst absorption unit 431 a, so that thecover window 310 a may be fixed to the outer surface of thefirst jig 410 a. - While the process is performed, the
TSP 340 a and thedisplay panel 330 a adhered by using the secondadhesive layer 350 a may be disposed on thesecond jig 420 a. Thedisplay panel 330 a may be disposed to face thesecond jig 420 a, and theTSP 340 a may be disposed to face thefirst jig 410 a. - After the
TSP 340 a and thedisplay panel 330 a are disposed as described above, the firstadhesive layer 320 a may be coated on theTSP 340 a. The firstadhesive layer 320 a may be formed of the same material as or a similar material to that of the secondadhesive layer 350 a. - When the
cover window 310 a, theTSP 340 a, and thedisplay panel 330 a are completely disposed as described above, thefirst jig 410 a and thesecond jig 420 a may be moved toward each other by driving thefirst driving unit 415 a and thesecond driving unit 425 a. A protruding portion of thesecond jig 420 a may first contact thedisplay panel 330 a, and the firstadhesive layer 320 a and thecover window 310 a may be sequentially laminated from a central portion of thedisplay panel 330 a to both end portions. - In particular, when the
cover window 310 a and thepanel member 390 a contact each other, a load range applied when thefirst jig 410 a and thesecond jig 420 a compress thecover window 310 a and thepanel member 390 a may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between thecover window 310 a and thepanel member 390 a may be reduced, and thecover window 310 a and thepanel member 390 a may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and thecover window 310 a and thepanel member 390 a are attached to each other, thecover window 310 a and thepanel member 390 a may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability. - While the process is performed, the
cushion unit 490 a may uniformly distribute a force applied to thecover window 310 a, theTSP 340 a, and thedisplay panel 330 a. - When the process is completed, the
first driving unit 415 a and thesecond driving unit 425 a may operate to separate thefirst jig 410 a and thesecond jig 420 a. An operator may complete an operation by removing the completeddisplay device 300 a from thefirst jig 410 a or thesecond jig 420 a. - The operation may be performed in a vacuum state. In further detail, the
apparatus 400 a may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C inFIG. 4C ) in which thefirst jig 410 a, thesecond jig 420 a, the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed. In addition, theapparatus 400 a may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber. The pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when thecover window 310 a and thepanel member 390 a are laminated. In addition, the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after a lamination process is completed. - Accordingly, the
apparatus 400 a may manufacture any type ofdisplay device 300 a. In addition, theapparatus 400 a may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing vapors or preventing vapors from being generated between thecover window 310 a and thepanel member 390 a when thecover window 310 a and thepanel member 390 a are laminated. -
FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view illustrating anapparatus 500 a for manufacturing thedisplay device 300 a ofFIG. 14 , according to another embodiment of the present invention. - Referring to
FIG. 16 , theapparatus 500 a includes afirst jig 510 a, asecond jig 520 a, a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixingunit 530 a), and acushion unit 590 a. In this case, thefirst jig 510 a, thesecond jig 520 a, the driving unit M, the fixing unit, and thecushion unit 590 a are substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - The driving unit M may include a
first driving unit 515 a and asecond driving unit 525 a, and the fixing unit may include afirst fixing unit 530 a. Thefirst driving unit 515 a, thesecond driving unit 525 a, and thefirst fixing unit 530 a (which includes afirst absorption unit 531 a and afirst absorption pump 532 a) are substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - The
apparatus 500 a includes aclamping unit 550 a that is spaced apart by a set or predetermined interval from at least one of thefirst jig 510 a or thesecond jig 520 a, and supports thepanel member 390 a. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that theclamping unit 550 a is disposed adjacent to thesecond jig 520 a. - The
clamping unit 550 a may support one end of thepanel member 390 a when the one end of thepanel member 390 a is inserted into theclamping unit 550 a. A plurality of the clampingunits 550 a may be provided, where a distance between the clampingunits 550 a is less than a length or a width of thepanel member 390 a. Thepanel member 390 a may include at least one of thedisplay panel 330 a or theTSP 340 a as described above. For convenience of description, it will be assumed that the distance between the plurality of clampingunits 550 a is less than a width of thepanel member 390 a and thepanel member 390 a includes thedisplay panel 330 a and theTSP 340 a. - In particular, the plurality of clamping
units 550 a face respective side surfaces of thesecond jig 520 a, and fix both ends of thedisplay panel 330 a, the secondadhesive layer 350 a, theTSP 340 a, and the firstadhesive layer 320 a. The plurality of clampingunits 550 a include afirst clamping unit 551 a and asecond clamping unit 552 a that are spaced apart by a set or predetermined interval from each other. - Accordingly, the
apparatus 500 a may rapidly and easily manufacture thedisplay device 300 a having a curved surface and a simple structure. In addition, since theapparatus 500 a may accurately attach thecover window 310 a having a curved surface to thepanel member 390 a, a product defect rate may be reduced or minimized. - In particular, since the
apparatus 500 a includes theclamping unit 550 a to accurately align thepanel member 390 a and thecover window 310 a, working efficiency may be improved. - A method of manufacturing the
display device 300 a by using theapparatus 500 a will now be described with reference toFIG. 16 . - The
cover window 310 a may be formed as described above, thedisplay panel 330 a may be formed, and then theTSP 340 a and thedisplay panel 330 a may be adhered by using the secondadhesive layer 350 a. Thecover window 310 a may be mounted on thefirst jig 510 a as described above. Thecover window 310 a may be formed to have a curved surface having a predetermined curvature radius of R as described above and may be seated on an outer surface of thefirst jig 510 a. Afirst absorption pump 532 a may operate to absorb air of afirst absorption unit 531 a so that thecover window 310 a is fixed to the outer surface of thefirst jig 510 a. - While the process is performed, the
TSP 340 a and thedisplay panel 330 a adhered by using the secondadhesive layer 350 a as described above may be disposed on thesecond jig 520 a. Thedisplay panel 330 a may be disposed to face thesecond jig 520 a, and theTSP 340 a may be disposed to face thefirst jig 510 a. In particular, respective ends of theTSP 340 a on which the firstadhesive layer 320 a is attached are fixed to thefirst clamping unit 551 a and thesecond clamping unit 552 a. For example, the respective ends ofpanel member 390 a may be fixed by being inserted into grooves formed in thefirst clamping unit 551 a and thesecond clamping unit 552 a as described above. - Once the
display panel 330 a, the secondadhesive layer 350 a, theTSP 340 a, and the firstadhesive layer 320 a are fixed in this manner, portions of thedisplay panel 330 a, the secondadhesive layer 350 a, theTSP 340 a, and the firstadhesive layer 320 a may be curved upward (for example, with respect to a gravity direction). In further detail, since a distance between thefirst clamping unit 551 a and thesecond clamping unit 552 a is less than at least one of a width or a length of at least one of thedisplay panel 330 a or theTSP 340 a, the portions of thedisplay panel 330 a, the secondadhesive layer 350 a, theTSP 340 a, and the firstadhesive layer 320 a may protrude toward thefirst jig 510 a. - When the
display panel 330 a, the secondadhesive layer 350 a, theTSP 340 a, and the firstadhesive layer 320 a are fixed as described above, thedisplay panel 330 a, the secondadhesive layer 350 a, theTSP 340 a, the firstadhesive layer 320 a, and thecover window 310 a may be compressed against each other by moving at least one of thefirst jig 510 a or thesecond jig 520 a. For convenience of description, it will be assumed that the firstadhesive layer 320 a and thecover window 310 a are compressed by moving both thefirst jig 510 a and thesecond jig 520 a. - When the
first jig 510 a and thesecond jig 520 a move, thefirst driving unit 515 a and thesecond driving unit 525 a may operate to move thefirst jig 510 a and thesecond jig 520 a closer to each other. - The upwardly curved portions of the
display panel 330 a, the secondadhesive layer 350 a, theTSP 340 a, and the firstadhesive layer 320 a first contact thecover window 310 a. When thefirst jig 510 a and thesecond jig 520 a continuously move, thedisplay panel 330 a, the secondadhesive layer 350 a, theTSP 340 a, and the firstadhesive layer 320 a may be laminated to thecover window 310 a beginning from contact portions with thecover window 310 a toward both end portions. - In particular, when the
cover window 310 a and thepanel member 390 a contact each other, a load range applied when thefirst jig 510 a and thesecond jig 520 a compress thecover window 310 a and thepanel member 390 a may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between thecover window 310 a and thepanel member 390 a may be reduced, and thecover window 310 a and thepanel member 390 a may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and thecover window 310 a and thepanel member 390 a are attached to each other, thecover window 310 a and thepanel member 390 a may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability. - In addition, when the
first jig 510 a and thesecond jig 520 a move as described above, theTSP 340 a and thedisplay panel 330 a may be fixed while thefirst clamping unit 551 a and thesecond clamping unit 552 a do not move. - The
cushion unit 590 a may uniformly distribute a force applied to thepanel member 390 a and thecover window 310 a when thepanel member 390 a and thecover window 310 a are compressed and laminated. - When the process is completed, the
first driving unit 515 a and thesecond driving unit 525 a may operate to separate thefirst jig 510 a and thesecond jig 520 a. The operator may complete an operation by removing the completeddisplay device 300 a from thefirst jig 510 a or thesecond jig 520 a. - The operation may be performed in a vacuum state. In further detail, the
apparatus 500 a may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C inFIG. 4C ) in which thefirst jig 510 a, thesecond jig 520 a, the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed. In addition, theapparatus 500 a may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber. The pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when thecover window 310 a and thepanel member 390 a are laminated. In addition, the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after the process is completed. - Accordingly, the
apparatus 500 a may rapidly and accurately manufacture any type ofdisplay device 300 a having a curved surface. In particular, theapparatus 500 a may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by accurately attaching thedisplay panel 330 a and thecover window 310 a having a curved surface. - In addition, the
apparatus 500 a may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing air bubbles or preventing air bubbles from being generated after thedisplay panel 330 a and the curved portions are compressed. -
FIG. 17 is a cross-sectional view illustrating anapparatus 600 a for manufacturing thedisplay device 300 a ofFIG. 14 , according to yet another embodiment of the present invention. - Referring to
FIG. 17 , theapparatus 600 a includes afirst jig 610 a, asecond jig 620 a, a driving unit M, aclamping unit 650 a, a fixing unit (for example, first fixingunit 630 a), a linear driving unit L, and acushion unit 690 a. Thefirst jig 610 a, thesecond jig 620 a, the linear driving unit L, theclamping unit 650 a, the fixing unit, and thecushion unit 690 a may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - The driving unit M may include a
first driving unit 615 a and asecond driving unit 625 a, and the fixing unit may include afirst fixing unit 630 a. Thefirst driving unit 615 a, thesecond driving unit 625 a, and thefirst fixing unit 630 a may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. In particular, thefirst fixing unit 630 a may include afirst absorption pump 632 a and afirst absorption unit 631 a. - The
clamping unit 650 a may include afirst clamping unit 651 a and asecond clamping unit 652 a. Thefirst clamping unit 651 a and thesecond clamping unit 652 a may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - The
apparatus 600 a may include a linear driving unit L that includes a firstlinear driving unit 660 a and a second linear drivingunit 670 a that respectively vertically move thefirst clamping unit 651 a and thesecond clamping unit 652 a. In particular, the firstlinear driving unit 660 a and the second linear drivingunit 670 a may respectively linearly move thefirst clamping unit 651 a and thesecond clamping unit 652 a in the same direction as a direction in which thesecond jig 620 a moves. The firstlinear driving unit 660 a and the second linear drivingunit 670 a may be formed similarly, and thus the following description will focus on the firstlinear driving unit 660 a. - The first
linear driving unit 660 a may include afirst shaft 661 a that is connected to thefirst clamping unit 651 a and linearly moves thefirst clamping unit 651 a. In addition, the firstlinear driving unit 660 a may include afirst driving module 665 a that drives thefirst shaft 661 a. Thefirst driving module 665 a may include a cylinder or a motor. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that thefirst driving module 665 a includes a motor. It will be further assumed that thefirst shaft 661 a includes a ball screw that is lowered or raised as thefirst driving module 665 a rotates. - The first
linear driving unit 660 a may include a firstelastic unit 663 a that surrounds thefirst shaft 661 a. The firstelastic unit 663 a may include a compression spring, and may be formed of an elastic material such as rubber. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that the firstelastic unit 663 a includes a compression spring. - The first
elastic unit 663 a may surround an outer surface of thefirst shaft 661 a as described above and thus may provide a restoring force to thefirst clamping unit 651 a when thefirst clamping unit 651 a moves. - A method of manufacturing the
display device 300 a by using theapparatus 600 a will be described. Thecover window 310 a and thepanel member 390 a may be manufactured and prepared. Thepanel member 390 a may include at least one of thedisplay panel 330 a or theTSP 340 a as described above. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that thepanel member 390 a includes both thedisplay panel 330 a and theTSP 340 a. - Next, the
cover window 310 a may be disposed on thefirst jig 610 a. Thecover window 310 a may be formed to have a curved surface having a predetermined curvature radius of R as described above, and may be seated on an outer surface of thefirst jig 610 a. Afirst absorption pump 632 a may absorb air of afirst absorption unit 631 a to fix thecover window 310 a to the outer surface of thefirst jig 610 a. - While the process is performed, the
TSP 340 a and thedisplay panel 330 a adhered by using the secondadhesive layer 350 a as described above may be disposed on thesecond jig 620 a. Thedisplay panel 330 a may be disposed to face thesecond jig 620 a and theTSP 340 a may be disposed to face thefirst jig 610 a. In particular, thedisplay panel 330 a and theTSP 340 a may be stacked, and an end of thedisplay panel 330 a and an end of theTSP 340 a may be fixed by being inserted into thefirst clamping unit 651 a and thesecond clamping unit 652 a. - Next, the first
adhesive layer 320 a may be formed on theTSP 340 a. Respective ends of thedisplay panel 330 a and theTSP 340 a on which the firstadhesive layer 320 a is formed may be fixed to thefirst clamping unit 651 a and thesecond clamping unit 652 a. - Once the
panel member 390 a is fixed to thefirst clamping unit 651 a and thesecond clamping unit 652 a, one portion of thepanel member 390 a may be curved upward (for example, with respect to a gravity direction). In further detail, since a distance between thefirst clamping unit 651 a and thesecond clamping unit 652 a is less than at least one of a width or a length of thepanel member 390 a, the upwardly curved portion may protrude toward thefirst jig 610 a. In this case, it will be assumed that the distance between thefirst clamping unit 651 a and thesecond clamping unit 652 a is less than a width of thepanel member 390 a. - After the
panel member 390 a is disposed in this manner, thepanel member 390 a and thecover window 310 a may be compressed against each other by moving at least one of thefirst jig 610 a or thesecond jig 620 a. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that thepanel member 390 a and thecover window 310 a are compressed by moving both thefirst jig 610 a and thesecond jig 620 a. - While the
first jig 610 a and thesecond jig 620 a move in this manner, the firstlinear driving unit 660 a and the second linear drivingunit 670 a may operate to vertically move thefirst clamping unit 651 a and thesecond clamping unit 652 a. In particular, thefirst clamping unit 651 a and thesecond clamping unit 652 a may move at a speed similar to a speed at which thesecond jig 620 a moves. - When the
second jig 620 a, thefirst clamping unit 651 a, and thesecond clamping unit 652 a are raised in this manner, thepanel member 390 a may be raised while maintaining its curved state. When a distance between thefirst jig 610 a and thesecond jig 620 a reaches a set distance (for example, a predetermined distance), thefirst clamping unit 651 a and thesecond clamping unit 652 a may release from (for example, reduce their clamping force from) thepanel member 390 a. - During or after this releasing of the
first clamping unit 651 a and thesecond clamping unit 652 a, the firstlinear driving unit 660 a and the second linear drivingunit 670 a may lower thefirst clamping unit 651 a and thesecond clamping unit 652 a. - Next, the
first driving unit 615 a and thesecond driving unit 625 a may continuously operate to bring thefirst jig 610 a and thesecond jig 620 a closer (for example, adjacent) to each other (for example, thesecond jig 620 a may contactpanel member 390 a). As thefirst jig 610 a and thesecond jig 620 a move closer, thepanel member 390 a and thecover window 310 a may be compressed against each other. A method of compressing thepanel member 390 a and thecover window 310 a may be performed in the same manner as that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - In particular, when the
cover window 310 a and thepanel member 390 a contact each other, a load range applied when thefirst jig 610 a and thesecond jig 620 a compress thecover window 310 a and thepanel member 390 a may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between thecover window 310 a and thepanel member 390 a may be reduced, and thecover window 310 a and thepanel member 390 a may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and thecover window 310 a and thepanel member 390 a are attached to each other, thecover window 310 a and thepanel member 390 a may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability. - The
cushion unit 690 a may uniformly distribute a force applied to thecover window 310 a and thepanel member 390 a when thecover window 310 a and thepanel member 390 a are laminated due to compression. - When the process is completed, the
first driving unit 615 a and thesecond driving unit 625 a may operate to separate thefirst jig 610 a and thesecond jig 620 a. The operator may complete an operation by removing the completeddisplay device 300 a from thefirst jig 610 a or thesecond jig 620 a. - The operation may be performed in a vacuum state. In further detail, the
apparatus 600 a may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C inFIG. 4C ) in which thefirst jig 610 a, thesecond jig 620 a, the fixing unit, and the driving unit are disposed. In addition, theapparatus 600 a may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber. The pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when thecover window 310 a and thepanel member 390 a are laminated. In addition, the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after the process is completed. - Accordingly, the
apparatus 600 a may rapidly and accurately manufacture thedisplay device 300 a having a curved surface. In particular, theapparatus 600 a may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by accurately attaching thepanel member 390 a and thecover window 310 a having a curved surface. - In addition, the
apparatus 600 a may improve product quality by removing air bubbles that may be generated (or preventing air bubbles from being generated) when thepanel member 390 a and thecover window 310 a are compressed. -
FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view illustrating anapparatus 700 a for manufacturing thedisplay device 300 a ofFIG. 14 , according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention. - Referring to
FIG. 18 , theapparatus 700 a may include afirst jig 710 a, asecond jig 720 a, a driving unit M, aclamping unit 750 a, a fixing unit (for example, first fixingunit 730 a), a linear driving unit L, and acushion unit 790 a. Thefirst jig 710 a and thesecond jig 720 a may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - The driving unit M may include a
first driving unit 715 a and asecond driving unit 725 a, and the fixing unit may include afirst fixing unit 730 a. Thefirst driving unit 715 a, thesecond driving unit 725 a, and thefirst fixing unit 730 a (which includesfirst absorption unit 731 a andfirst absorption pump 732 a) may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - In addition, the
clamping unit 750 a may include afirst clamping unit 751 a and asecond clamping unit 752 a. Thefirst clamping unit 751 a and thesecond clamping unit 752 a may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - The linear driving unit L may include a first
linear driving unit 760 a and a second linear drivingunit 770 a, and the firstlinear driving unit 760 a and the second linear drivingunit 770 a may linearly move thefirst clamping unit 751 a and thesecond clamping unit 752 a, respectively. In particular, the firstlinear driving unit 760 a and the second linear drivingunit 770 a may linearly move thefirst clamping unit 751 a and thesecond clamping unit 752 a in a diagonal direction. Since the second linear drivingunit 770 a may be formed similarly to the firstlinear driving unit 760 a, the following description will focus on the firstlinear driving unit 760 a. - In further detail, the first
linear driving unit 760 a may include afirst shaft 761 a, afirst driving module 765 a, and a firstelastic unit 763 a. Thefirst shaft 761 a, thefirst driving module 765 a, and the firstelastic unit 763 a may be formed in a similar manner to those described above (such as the firstlinear driving unit 760 inFIGS. 12-13 ). Thefirst shaft 761 a is disposed in a diagonal direction to diagonally move thefirst clamping unit 751 a. - In particular, when the first
linear driving unit 760 a operates, thefirst driving module 765 a may vary a length of thefirst shaft 761 a. Since thefirst driving module 765 a and thefirst shaft 761 a are diagonally disposed with respect to thesecond jig 720 a as described above, thefirst clamping unit 751 a may be diagonally moved by varying the movement of thefirst shaft 761 a. - For example, when the
first driving module 765 a operates to diagonally move thefirst shaft 761 a downward with respect to thesecond jig 720 a, thefirst clamping unit 751 a may diagonally move downward with respect to thesecond jig 720 a as thefirst shaft 761 a moves. - When the
first driving module 765 a operates in an opposite direction to diagonally move thefirst shaft 761 a upward with respect to thesecond jig 720 a, thefirst clamping unit 751 a may diagonally move upward with respect to thesecond jig 720 a as thefirst shaft 761 a moves. - The
first shaft 761 a may include a ball screw as described above and thus may rotate as thefirst driving module 765 a operates. In particular, thefirst shaft 761 a may diagonally move downward or upward with respect to thesecond jig 720 a as thefirst driving module 765 a rotates. - The
cushion unit 790 a may be formed in various ways. For example, thecushion unit 790 a may be provided on an outer surface of at least one of thefirst jig 710 a or thesecond jig 720 a. For ease of description, it will be assumed that thecushion unit 790 a is formed on an entire outer surface of thesecond jig 720 a. - A method of manufacturing the
display device 300 a may be similar to that described above. In further detail, thepanel member 390 a and thecover window 310 a may be manufactured and prepared. Thepanel member 390 a may include thedisplay panel 330 a and theTSP 340 a as described above. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that thepanel member 390 a includes both thedisplay panel 330 a and theTSP 340 a. - After the
cover window 310 a and thepanel member 390 a are manufactured and prepared as described above, thecover window 310 a may be disposed on thefirst jig 710 a. Thecover window 310 a may be formed to have a curved surface having a predetermined curvature radius of R as described above, and may be seated on an outer surface of thefirst jig 710 a. Afirst absorption pump 732 a may operate to absorb air of afirst absorption unit 731 a so that thecover window 310 a is fixed to the outer surface of thefirst jig 710 a. - When the
display panel 330 a and theTSP 340 a are completely manufactured as described above, thedisplay panel 330 a and theTSP 340 a may be adhered by using the secondadhesive layer 350 a, and the firstadhesive layer 320 a may be coated on theTSP 340 a. - Next, the
TSP 340 a and thedisplay panel 330 a may be disposed on thesecond jig 720 a. Thedisplay panel 330 a may be disposed to face thesecond jig 720, and theTSP 340 a may be disposed to face thefirst jig 710 a. Thepanel member 390 a manufactured as described above may be fixed by thefirst clamping unit 751 a and thesecond clamping unit 752 a. In further detail, since a distance between thefirst clamping unit 751 a and thesecond clamping unit 752 a is less than at least one of a width or a length of thepanel member 390 a, an upwardly curved portion of thepanel member 390 a may protrude toward thefirst jig 710 a. In this case, it will be assumed that the distance between thefirst clamping unit 751 a and thesecond clamping unit 752 a is less than a width of thepanel member 390 a. When the fixing is completed, thepanel member 390 a and thecover window 310 a may be compressed against each other by moving at least one of thefirst jig 710 a or thesecond jig 720 a. A method of compressing thepanel member 390 a and thecover window 310 a may be similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - When the
first jig 710 a and thesecond jig 720 a move in this manner, thefirst clamping unit 751 a and thesecond clamping unit 752 a may also move. In particular, thefirst clamping unit 751 a and thesecond clamping unit 752 a may be diagonally moved by the firstlinear driving unit 760 a and the second linear drivingunit 770 a, respectively. Thefirst clamping unit 751 a and thesecond clamping unit 752 a may be raised diagonally. - When the
first clamping unit 751 a and thesecond clamping unit 752 a are raised and then an interval between thefirst jig 710 a and thesecond jig 720 a reaches a preset interval, both ends of thepanel member 390 a may be released. Thepanel member 390 a may be sequentially adhered to thecover window 310 a beginning from a protruding portion toward both end portions. - After the releasing of the
first clamping unit 751 a and thesecond clamping unit 752 a, the firstlinear driving unit 760 a and the second linear drivingunit 770 a may operate to lower thefirst clamping unit 751 a and thesecond clamping unit 752 a. Thefirst clamping unit 751 a and thesecond clamping unit 752 a may be lowered diagonally. - While the
first clamping unit 751 a and thesecond clamping unit 752 a are lowered, thefirst jig 710 a and thesecond jig 720 a may get closer to each other to compress thepanel member 390 a and thecover window 310 a. In this case, a method of adhering thepanel member 390 a and thecover window 310 a through compression may be similar to that described above. - When the
panel member 390 a and thecover window 310 a are compressed by moving thefirst jig 710 a and thesecond jig 720 a as described above, thecushion unit 790 a may distribute a force applied to thepanel member 390 a and thecover window 310 a. In addition, thecushion unit 790 a may help prevent thepanel member 390 a or thecover window 310 a from being damaged by absorbing part of a force applied to thepanel member 390 a and thecover window 310 a. - In particular, when the
cover window 310 a and thedisplay panel 330 a contact each other, a load range applied when thefirst jig 710 a and thesecond jig 720 a compress thecover window 310 a and thepanel member 390 a may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between thecover window 310 a and thepanel member 390 a may be reduced, and thecover window 310 a and thepanel member 390 a may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and thecover window 310 a and thepanel member 390 a are attached to each other, thecover window 310 a and thepanel member 390 a may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability. - After the process is completed, the
first driving unit 715 a and thesecond driving unit 725 a may operate to separate thefirst jig 710 a and thesecond jig 720 a. The operator may complete an operation by removing the completeddisplay device 300 a from thefirst jig 710 a or thesecond jig 720 a. - The operation may be performed in a vacuum state. In further detail, the
apparatus 700 a may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C inFIG. 4C ) in which thefirst jig 710 a, thesecond jig 720 a, the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed. In addition, theapparatus 700 a may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber. The pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when thecover window 310 a and thepanel member 390 a are laminated. In addition, the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after the process is completed. - Accordingly, the
apparatus 700 a may manufacture thedisplay device 300 a having a curved surface. In particular, theapparatus 700 a may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by accurately attaching thedisplay panel 330 a and thecover window 310 a having a curved surface. - In addition, the
apparatus 700 a may improve quality by removing air bubbles or preventing air bubbles from being generated after thedisplay panel 330 a and the curved portions are compressed. -
FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view illustrating adisplay device 300 b according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention. - Referring to
FIG. 19 , thedisplay device 300 b may include acover window 310 b and apanel member 390 b as described above. In addition, thedisplay device 300 b may include a firstadhesive layer 320 b that is disposed between thepanel member 390 b and thecover window 310 b. Thepanel member 390 b may include adisplay panel 330 b and aTSP 340 b as described above. In particular, a secondadhesive layer 350 b may be provided between thedisplay panel 330 b and theTSP 340 b to attach thedisplay panel 330 b and theTSP 340 b. - At least a portion of the
cover window 310 b may be curved. Thecover window 310 b may be formed such that a surface on which an image or text is displayed is curved after thenpanel member 390 b is attached. In particular, thecover window 310 b may be formed to have at least one curved surface having a curvature radius. In some embodiments, thecover window 310 b may be formed to have a first curved surface having a curvature radius of R1, a second curved surface having a curvature radius of R2, and may further include a third curved surface having a curvature radius of R3 in at least one of a longitudinal direction or a width direction. In other embodiments, thecover window 310 b may further include curved surfaces having curvature radii of R4, R5, . . . , and RN (N is a natural number) in addition to the curved surfaces having the curvature radii of R1, R2, and R3 (e.g., there may be a separate curvature radius of each portion or curved surface of thecover window 310 b). However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that thecover window 310 b is formed to have the first, second, and third curved surfaces having the curvature radii of R1, R2, and R3 in a width direction. - The first
adhesive layer 320 b and the secondadhesive layer 350 b may be formed of the same material. In further detail, the firstadhesive layer 320 b and the secondadhesive layer 350 b may be formed of an adhesive and transparent material. For example, the firstadhesive layer 320 b and the secondadhesive layer 350 b may include an optical clear adhesive film (OCA film) or an adhesive material. - Accordingly, since the
display device 300 b is formed to have a set or predetermined curvature radius, thedisplay device 300 b may be applied to various members. -
FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view illustrating anapparatus 400 b for manufacturing thedisplay device 300 b ofFIG. 19 , according to an embodiment of the present invention. - Referring to
FIG. 20 , theapparatus 400 b may include afirst jig 410 b, asecond jig 420 b, a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixingunit 430 b), and acushion unit 490 b. An outer surface of thefirst jig 410 b on which thecover window 310 b is seated may be formed equally or similarly to an outer surface of thecover window 310 b contacting the outer surface of thefirst jig 410 b. In further detail, thefirst jig 410 b may have at least two curved surfaces having curvature radii of R1, R2′, R3′, . . . , like thecover window 310 b. In particular, thefirst jig 410 b may be formed by being recessed away from thesecond jig 420 b. - An outer surface of the
second jig 420 b may protrude toward thefirst jig 410 b to correspond to or engage with a recessed portion of thefirst jig 410 b (e.g., thefirst jig 410 b may have a recessed outer surface). The outer surface of thesecond jig 420 b may be at least two curved surfaces having set or predetermined curvature radii. - The driving unit M may include a
first driving unit 415 b and asecond driving unit 425 b. Thefirst driving unit 415 b may linearly move thefirst jig 410 b toward thesecond jig 420 b, and thesecond driving unit 425 b may linearly move thesecond jig 420 b toward thefirst jig 410 b. Thefirst driving unit 415 b and thesecond driving unit 425 b may be formed in the same manner as or a similar manner to those described above. - In addition, the fixing unit may include a
first fixing unit 430 b provided on thefirst jig 410 b and a second fixing unit provided on thesecond jig 420 b. For convenience of description, it will be assumed that the fixing unit includes thefirst fixing unit 430 b. In addition, thefirst fixing unit 430 b and the second fixing unit may be formed in the same manner or a similar manner, and thus a detailed description of the second fixing unit will not be given. - The
first fixing unit 430 b may be formed in various ways. For example, thefirst fixing unit 430 b may include an adhesive member, an adhesive chuck, or an electrostatic chuck. In addition, thefirst fixing unit 430 b may include afirst absorption unit 431 b and afirst absorption pump 432 b that is connected to thefirst absorption unit 431 b. In particular, thefirst fixing unit 430 b is not limited thereto, and may include a clamp, or a protrusion that is provided on thefirst jig 410 b and mechanically restricts thecover window 310 b. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that thefirst fixing unit 430 b includes thefirst absorption unit 431 b and thefirst absorption pump 432 b. - The
cushion unit 490 b may be provided on at least one of thefirst jig 410 b or thesecond jig 420 b. In this case, thecushion unit 490 b is the same as or similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. In addition, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that thecushion unit 490 b is provided only on thesecond jig 420 b and is integrally formed on an outer surface of thesecond jig 420 b. - A method of manufacturing the
display device 300 b by using theapparatus 400 b will now be described. First, thecover window 310 b and thepanel member 390 b may be manufactured and prepared. In this case, a method of manufacturing thecover window 310 b is similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. In addition, thepanel member 390 b may adhere theTSP 340 b and thedisplay panel 330 b by using the secondadhesive layer 350 b. - After the
cover window 310 b and thepanel member 390 b are manufactured and prepared as described above, thecover window 310 b may be disposed on thefirst jig 410 b. Thecover window 310 b may be formed to have at least two curved surfaces having curvature radii as described above and may be seated on an outer surface of thefirst jig 410 b. Thefirst absorption pump 432 b may operate to absorb (e.g., evacuate or vacuum) air out of thefirst absorption unit 431 b, so that thecover window 310 b may be fixed to the outer surface of thefirst jig 410 b. - While the process is performed, the
TSP 340 b and thedisplay panel 330 b adhered by using the secondadhesive layer 350 b may be disposed on thesecond jig 420 b. Thedisplay panel 330 b may be disposed to face thesecond jig 420 b, and theTSP 340 b may be disposed to face thefirst jig 410 b. - After the
TSP 340 b and thedisplay panel 330 b are disposed as described above, the firstadhesive layer 320 b may be coated on theTSP 340 b. The firstadhesive layer 320 b may be formed of the same material as or a similar material to that of the secondadhesive layer 350 b. - When the
cover window 310 b, theTSP 340 b, and thedisplay panel 330 b are completely disposed as described above, thefirst jig 410 b and thesecond jig 420 b may be moved toward each other by driving thefirst driving unit 415 b and thesecond driving unit 425 b. A protruding portion of thesecond jig 420 b may first contact thedisplay panel 330 b, and the firstadhesive layer 320 b and thecover window 310 b may be sequentially laminated from central portions of thedisplay panel 330 b to both end portions. - In particular, when the
cover window 310 b and thepanel member 390 b contact each other, a load range applied when thefirst jig 410 b and thesecond jig 420 b compress thecover window 310 b and thepanel member 390 b may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between thecover window 310 b and thepanel member 390 b may be reduced, and thecover window 310 b and thepanel member 390 b may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and thecover window 310 b and thepanel member 390 b are attached to each other, thecover window 310 b and thepanel member 390 b may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability. - While the process is performed, the
cushion unit 490 b may uniformly distribute a force applied to thepanel member 390 b and thecover window 310 b. - When the process is completed, the
first driving unit 415 b and thesecond driving unit 425 b may operate to separate thefirst jig 410 b and thesecond jig 420 b. The operator may complete an operation by removing the completeddisplay device 300 b from thefirst jig 410 b or thesecond jig 420 b. - The operation may be performed in a vacuum state. In further detail, the
apparatus 400 b may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C inFIG. 4C ) in which thefirst jig 410 b, thesecond jig 420 b, the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed. In addition, theapparatus 400 b may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber. The pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when thecover window 310 b and thepanel member 390 b are laminated. In addition, the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after the process is completed. - Accordingly, the
apparatus 400 b may manufacture any type ofdisplay device 300 b. In addition, theapparatus 400 b may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing vapors or preventing vapors from being generated between thecover window 310 b and thepanel member 390 b when thecover window 310 b and thepanel member 390 b are laminated. -
FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view illustrating anapparatus 500 b for manufacturing thedisplay device 300 b ofFIG. 19 , according to another embodiment of the present invention. - Referring to
FIG. 21 , theapparatus 500 b includes afirst jig 510 b, asecond jig 520 b, a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixingunit 530 b), and acushion unit 590 b. In this case, thefirst jig 510 b, thesecond jig 520 b, the driving unit M, the fixing unit, and thecushion unit 590 b are substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - The driving unit M may include a
first driving unit 515 b and asecond driving unit 525 b, and the fixing unit may include afirst fixing unit 530 b. Thefirst driving unit 515 b, thesecond driving unit 525 b, and thefirst fixing unit 530 b (which includes afirst absorption unit 531 b and afirst absorption pump 532 b) are substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - The
apparatus 500 b includes aclamping unit 550 b that is spaced apart by a set or predetermined interval from at least one of thefirst jig 510 b or thesecond jig 520 b, and supports thepanel member 390 b. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that theclamping unit 550 b is disposed adjacent to thesecond jig 520 b. - The
clamping unit 550 b may support one end of thepanel member 390 b when the one end of thepanel member 390 b is inserted into theclamping unit 550 b. A plurality of the clampingunits 550 b may be provided, where a distance S4 between the clampingunits 550 b is less than a length or a width of thepanel member 390 b. Thepanel member 390 b may include at least one of thedisplay panel 330 b or theTSP 340 b as described above. For convenience of description, it will be assumed that the distance S4 between the plurality of clampingunits 550 b is less than a width of thepanel member 390 b and thepanel member 390 b includes thedisplay panel 330 b and theTSP 340 b. - In particular, the plurality of clamping
units 550 b face respective side surfaces of thesecond jig 520 b, and fix both ends of thedisplay panel 330 b, the secondadhesive layer 350 b, theTSP 340 b, and the firstadhesive layer 320 b. The plurality of clampingunits 550 b include a first clamping unit 551 b and asecond clamping unit 552 b that are spaced apart by a set or predetermined interval from each other. - Accordingly, the
apparatus 500 b may rapidly and easily manufacture thedisplay device 300 b having a curved surface and a simple structure. In addition, since theapparatus 500 b may accurately attach thecover window 310 b having a curved surface to thepanel member 390 b, a product defect rate may be reduced or minimized. - In particular, since the
apparatus 500 b includes theclamping unit 550 b to accurately align thepanel member 390 b and thecover window 310 b, working efficiency may be improved. - A method of manufacturing the
display device 300 b by using theapparatus 500 b will now be described with reference toFIG. 21 . - The
cover window 310 b may be formed as described above, thedisplay panel 330 b may be formed, and then theTSP 340 b and thedisplay panel 330 b may be adhered by using the secondadhesive layer 350 b. Thecover window 310 b may be mounted on thefirst jig 510 b as described above. - Next, respective ends of the
TSP 340 b on which the firstadhesive layer 320 b is attached are fixed to the first clamping unit 551 b and thesecond clamping unit 552 b. For example, the respective ends ofpanel member 390 b may be fixed by being inserted into grooves formed in the first clamping unit 551 b and thesecond clamping unit 552 b as described above. - Once the
display panel 330 b, the secondadhesive layer 350 b, theTSP 340 b, and the firstadhesive layer 320 b are fixed in this manner, portions of thedisplay panel 330 b, the secondadhesive layer 350 b, theTSP 340 b, and the firstadhesive layer 320 b may be curved upward (for example, with respect to a gravity direction). In further detail, since a distance S4 between the first clamping unit 551 b and thesecond clamping unit 552 b is less than at least one of a width or a length of at least one of thedisplay panel 330 b or theTSP 340 b, the portions of thedisplay panel 330 b, the secondadhesive layer 350 b, theTSP 340 b, and the firstadhesive layer 320 b may protrude toward thefirst jig 510 b. - When the
display panel 330 b, the secondadhesive layer 350 b, theTSP 340 b, and the firstadhesive layer 320 b are fixed as described above, thedisplay panel 330 b, the secondadhesive layer 350 b, theTSP 340 b, the firstadhesive layer 320 b, and thecover window 310 b may be compressed against each other by moving at least one of thefirst jig 510 b or thesecond jig 520 b. For convenience of description, it will be assumed that the firstadhesive layer 320 b and thecover window 310 b are compressed by moving both thefirst jig 510 b and thesecond jig 520 b. - When the
first jig 510 b and thesecond jig 520 b move, thefirst driving unit 515 b and thesecond driving unit 525 b may operate to move thefirst jig 510 b and thesecond jig 520 b closer to each other. - The upwardly curved portions of the
display panel 330 b, the secondadhesive layer 350 b, theTSP 340 b, and the firstadhesive layer 320 b first contact thecover window 310 b. When thefirst jig 510 b and thesecond jig 520 b continuously move, thedisplay panel 330 b, the secondadhesive layer 350 b, theTSP 340 b, and the firstadhesive layer 320 b may be laminated to thecover window 310 b beginning from contact portions with thecover window 310 b toward both end portions. - In particular, when the
cover window 310 b and thepanel member 390 b contact each other, a load range applied when thefirst jig 510 b and thesecond jig 520 b compress thecover window 310 b and thepanel member 390 b may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between thecover window 310 b and thepanel member 390 b may be reduced, and thecover window 310 b and thepanel member 390 b may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and thecover window 310 b and thepanel member 390 b are attached to each other, thecover window 310 b and thepanel member 390 b may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability. - The
cushion unit 590 b may uniformly distribute a force applied to thepanel member 390 b and thecover window 310 b when thepanel member 390 b and thecover window 310 b are compressed and laminated. - The operation may be performed in a vacuum state. In further detail, the
apparatus 500 b may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C inFIG. 4C ) in which thefirst jig 510 b, thesecond jig 520 b, the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed. In addition, theapparatus 500 b may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber. The pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when thecover window 310 b and thepanel member 390 b are laminated. In addition, the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after the process is completed. - Accordingly, the
apparatus 500 b may rapidly and accurately manufacture any type ofdisplay device 300 b having a curved surface. In particular, theapparatus 500 b may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by accurately attaching thedisplay panel 330 b and thecover window 310 b having a curved surface. - In addition, the
apparatus 500 b may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing air bubbles or preventing air bubbles from being generated after thedisplay panel 330 b and the curved portions are compressed. -
FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional view illustrating anapparatus 600 b for manufacturing thedisplay device 300 b ofFIG. 19 , according to yet another embodiment of the present invention. - Referring to
FIG. 22 , theapparatus 600 b includes afirst jig 610 b, asecond jig 620 b, a driving unit M, aclamping unit 650 b, a fixing unit (for example, first fixingunit 630 b), a linear driving unit L, and acushion unit 690 b. Thefirst jig 610 b, thesecond jig 620 b, the linear driving unit L, theclamping unit 650 b, the fixing unit, and thecushion unit 690 b may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - The driving unit M may include a
first driving unit 615 b and asecond driving unit 625 b, and the fixing unit may include afirst fixing unit 630 b. Thefirst driving unit 615 b, thesecond driving unit 625 b, and thefirst fixing unit 630 b may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. In particular, thefirst fixing unit 630 b may include afirst absorption pump 632 b and afirst absorption unit 631 b. - The
clamping unit 650 b may include afirst clamping unit 651 b and a second clamping unit 652 b. Thefirst clamping unit 651 b and the second clamping unit 652 b may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - The
apparatus 600 b may include a linear driving unit L that includes a firstlinear driving unit 660 b and a second linear drivingunit 670 b that respectively vertically move thefirst clamping unit 651 b and the second clamping unit 652 b. The firstlinear driving unit 660 b and the second linear drivingunit 670 b may be formed similarly, and thus the following description will focus on the firstlinear driving unit 660 b. - The first
linear driving unit 660 b may include afirst shaft 661 b that is connected to thefirst clamping unit 651 b and linearly moves thefirst clamping unit 651 b. In addition, the firstlinear driving unit 660 b may include afirst driving module 665 b that drives thefirst shaft 661 b. Thefirst driving module 665 b may include a cylinder or a motor. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that thefirst driving module 665 b includes a motor. It will be further assumed that thefirst shaft 661 b includes a ball screw that is lowered or raised as thefirst driving module 665 b rotates. - The first
linear driving unit 660 b may include a firstelastic unit 663 b that surrounds thefirst shaft 661 b. The firstelastic unit 663 b may include a compression spring, and may be formed of an elastic material such as rubber. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that the firstelastic unit 663 b includes a compression spring. - The first
elastic unit 663 b may surround an outer surface of thefirst shaft 661 b as described above and thus may provide a restoring force to thefirst clamping unit 651 b when thefirst clamping unit 651 b moves. - A method of manufacturing the
display device 300 b by using theapparatus 600 b will be described. Thecover window 310 b and thepanel member 390 b may be manufactured and prepared. Thepanel member 390 b may include at least one of thedisplay panel 330 b or theTSP 340 b as described above. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that thepanel member 390 b includes both thedisplay panel 330 b and theTSP 340 b. - The
display panel 330 b and theTSP 340 b may be attached by using the secondadhesive layer 350 b, and then the firstadhesive layer 320 b may be formed on theTSP 340 b. Respective ends of thedisplay panel 330 b and theTSP 340 b on which the firstadhesive layer 320 b is formed may be fixed to thefirst clamping unit 651 b and the second clamping unit 652 b. - Once the
panel member 390 b is fixed to thefirst clamping unit 651 b and the second clamping unit 652 b, one portion of thepanel member 390 b may be curved upward (for example, with respect to a gravity direction). In further detail, since a distance S5 between thefirst clamping unit 651 b and the second clamping unit 652 b is less than at least one of a width or a length of thepanel member 390 b, the upwardly curved portion may protrude toward thefirst jig 610 b. In this case, it will be assumed that the distance S5 between thefirst clamping unit 651 b and the second clamping unit 652 b is less than a width of thepanel member 390 b. - After the
panel member 390 b is disposed in this manner, thepanel member 390 b and thecover window 310 b may be compressed against each other by moving at least one of thefirst jig 610 b or thesecond jig 620 b. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that thepanel member 390 b and thecover window 310 b are compressed by moving both thefirst jig 610 b and thesecond jig 620 b. - While the
first jig 610 b and thesecond jig 620 b move in this manner, the firstlinear driving unit 660 b and the second linear drivingunit 670 b may operate to vertically move thefirst clamping unit 651 b and the second clamping unit 652 b. In particular, thefirst clamping unit 651 b and the second clamping unit 652 b may move at a speed similar to a speed at which thesecond jig 620 b moves. - When the
second jig 620 b, thefirst clamping unit 651 b, and the second clamping unit 652 b are raised in this manner, thepanel member 390 b may be raised while maintaining its curved state. When a distance between thefirst jig 610 b and thesecond jig 620 b reaches a set distance (for example, a predetermined distance), thefirst clamping unit 651 b and the second clamping unit 652 b may release from (for example, reduce their clamping force from) thepanel member 390 b. - During or after this releasing of the
first clamping unit 651 b and the second clamping unit 652 b, the firstlinear driving unit 660 b and the second linear drivingunit 670 b may lower thefirst clamping unit 651 b and the second clamping unit 652 b. - Next, the
first driving unit 615 b and thesecond driving unit 625 b may continuously operate to bring thefirst jig 610 b and thesecond jig 620 b closer (for example, adjacent) to each other (for example, thesecond jig 620 b may contactpanel member 390 b). As thefirst jig 610 b and thesecond jig 620 b move closer, thepanel member 390 b and thecover window 310 b may be compressed against each other. A method of compressing thepanel member 390 b and thecover window 310 b may be performed in the same manner as that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - In particular, when the
cover window 310 b and thepanel member 390 b contact each other, a load range applied when thefirst jig 610 b and thesecond jig 620 b compress thecover window 310 b and thepanel member 390 b may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between thecover window 310 b and thepanel member 390 b may be reduced, and thecover window 310 b and thepanel member 390 b may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and thecover window 310 b and thepanel member 390 b are attached to each other, thecover window 310 b and thepanel member 390 b may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability. - The
cushion unit 690 b may uniformly distribute a force applied to thecover window 310 b and thepanel member 390 b when thecover window 310 b and thepanel member 390 b are laminated due to compression. - The operation may be performed in a vacuum state. In further detail, the
apparatus 600 b may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C inFIG. 4C ) in which thefirst jig 610 b, thesecond jig 620 b, the fixing unit, and the driving unit are disposed. In addition, theapparatus 600 b may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber. The pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when thecover window 310 b and thepanel member 390 b are laminated. In addition, the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after the process is completed. - Accordingly, the
apparatus 600 b may rapidly and accurately manufacture thedisplay device 300 b having a curved surface. In particular, theapparatus 600 b may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by accurately attaching thepanel member 390 b and thecover window 310 b having a curved surface. - In addition, the
apparatus 600 b may improve product quality by removing air bubbles that may be generated (or preventing air bubbles from being generated) when thepanel member 390 b and thecover window 310 b are compressed. -
FIG. 23 is a cross-sectional view illustrating anapparatus 700 b for manufacturing thedisplay device 300 b ofFIG. 19 , according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention. - Referring to
FIG. 23 , theapparatus 700 b may include afirst jig 710 b, asecond jig 720 b, a driving unit M, aclamping unit 750 b, a fixing unit (for example, first fixingunit 730 b), a linear driving unit L, and acushion unit 790 b. Thefirst jig 710 b and thesecond jig 720 b may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - The driving unit M may include a
first driving unit 715 b and asecond driving unit 725 b, and the fixing unit may include afirst fixing unit 730 b. Thefirst driving unit 715 b, thesecond driving unit 725 b, and thefirst fixing unit 730 b (which includesfirst absorption unit 731 b andfirst absorption pump 732 b) may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - In addition, the
clamping unit 750 b may include afirst clamping unit 751 b and asecond clamping unit 752 b. Thefirst clamping unit 751 b and thesecond clamping unit 752 b may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - The linear driving unit L may include a first
linear driving unit 760 b and a second linear drivingunit 770 b, and the firstlinear driving unit 760 b and the second linear drivingunit 770 b may linearly move thefirst clamping unit 751 b and thesecond clamping unit 752 b, respectively. In particular, the firstlinear driving unit 760 b and the second linear drivingunit 770 b may linearly move thefirst clamping unit 751 b and thesecond clamping unit 752 b in a diagonal direction. Since the second linear drivingunit 770 b may be formed similarly to the firstlinear driving unit 760 b, the following description will focus on the firstlinear driving unit 760 b. - In further detail, the first
linear driving unit 760 b may include afirst shaft 761 b, afirst driving module 765 b, and a firstelastic unit 763 b. Thefirst shaft 761 b, thefirst driving module 765 b, and the firstelastic unit 763 b may be formed in a similar manner to those described above (such as the firstlinear driving unit 760 inFIGS. 12-13 ). Thefirst shaft 761 b is disposed in a diagonal direction to diagonally move thefirst clamping unit 751 b. - In particular, when the first
linear driving unit 760 b operates, thefirst driving module 765 b may vary a length of thefirst shaft 761 b. Since thefirst driving module 765 b and thefirst shaft 761 b are diagonally disposed with respect to thesecond jig 720 b as described above, thefirst clamping unit 751 b may be diagonally moved by varying the movement of thefirst shaft 761 b. - For example, when the
first driving module 765 b operates to diagonally move thefirst shaft 761 b downward with respect to thesecond jig 720 b, thefirst clamping unit 751 b may diagonally move downward with respect to thesecond jig 720 b as thefirst shaft 761 b moves. - When the
first driving module 765 b operates in an opposite direction to diagonally move thefirst shaft 761 b upward with respect to thesecond jig 720 b, thefirst clamping unit 751 b may diagonally move upward with respect to thesecond jig 720 b as thefirst shaft 761 b moves. - The
first shaft 761 b may include a ball screw as described above and thus may rotate as thefirst driving module 765 b operates. In particular, thefirst shaft 761 b may diagonally move downward or upward with respect to thesecond jig 720 b as thefirst driving module 765 b rotates. - The
cushion unit 790 b may be formed in various ways. For example, thecushion unit 790 b may be provided on an outer surface of at least one of thefirst jig 710 b or thesecond jig 720 b. For ease of description, it will be assumed that thecushion unit 790 b is formed on an entire outer surface of thesecond jig 720 b. - A method of manufacturing the
display device 300 b may be similar to that described above. In further detail, thepanel member 390 b and thecover window 310 b may be manufactured and prepared. Thepanel member 390 b may include thedisplay panel 330 b and theTSP 340 b as described above. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that thepanel member 390 b includes both thedisplay panel 330 b and theTSP 340 b. - When the
display panel 330 b and theTSP 340 b are completely manufactured as described above, thedisplay panel 330 b and theTSP 340 b may be adhered by using the secondadhesive layer 350 b, and the firstadhesive layer 320 b may be coated on theTSP 340 b. - The
panel member 390 b manufactured as described above may be fixed by thefirst clamping unit 751 b and thesecond clamping unit 752 b. In further detail, since a distance S6 between thefirst clamping unit 751 b and thesecond clamping unit 752 b is less than at least one of a width or a length of thepanel member 390 b, an upwardly curved portion of thepanel member 390 b may protrude toward thefirst jig 710 b. In this case, it will be assumed that the distance S6 between thefirst clamping unit 751 b and thesecond clamping unit 752 b is less than a width of thepanel member 390 b. When the fixing is completed, thepanel member 390 b and thecover window 310 b may be compressed against each other by moving at least one of thefirst jig 710 b or thesecond jig 720 b. A method of compressing thepanel member 390 b and thecover window 310 b may be similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - When the
first jig 710 b and thesecond jig 720 b move in this manner, thefirst clamping unit 751 b and thesecond clamping unit 752 b may also move. In particular, thefirst clamping unit 751 b and thesecond clamping unit 752 b may be diagonally moved by the firstlinear driving unit 760 b and the second linear drivingunit 770 b, respectively. Thefirst clamping unit 751 b and thesecond clamping unit 752 b may be raised diagonally. - When the
first clamping unit 751 b and thesecond clamping unit 752 b are raised and then an interval between thefirst jig 710 b and thesecond jig 720 b reaches a preset interval, both ends of thepanel member 390 b may be released. Thepanel member 390 b may be sequentially adhered to thecover window 310 b beginning from a protruding portion toward both end portions. - After the releasing of the
first clamping unit 751 b and thesecond clamping unit 752 b, the firstlinear driving unit 760 b and the second linear drivingunit 770 b may operate to lower thefirst clamping unit 751 b and thesecond clamping unit 752 b. Thefirst clamping unit 751 b and thesecond clamping unit 752 b may be lowered diagonally. - While the
first clamping unit 751 b and thesecond clamping unit 752 b are lowered, thefirst jig 710 b and thesecond jig 720 b may get closer to each other to compress thepanel member 390 b and thecover window 310 b. In this case, a method of adhering thepanel member 390 b and thecover window 310 b through compression may be similar to that described above. - When the
panel member 390 b and thecover window 310 b are compressed by moving thefirst jig 710 b and thesecond jig 720 b as described above, thecushion unit 790 b may distribute a force applied to thepanel member 390 b and thecover window 310 b. In addition, thecushion unit 790 b may help prevent thepanel member 390 b or thecover window 310 b from being damaged by absorbing part of a force applied to thepanel member 390 b and thecover window 310 b. - In particular, when the
cover window 310 b and thedisplay panel 330 b contact each other, a load range applied when thefirst jig 710 b and thesecond jig 720 b compress thecover window 310 b and thepanel member 390 b may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between thecover window 310 b and thepanel member 390 b may be reduced, and thecover window 310 b and thepanel member 390 b may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and thecover window 310 b and thepanel member 390 b are attached to each other, thecover window 310 b and thepanel member 390 b may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability. - The operation may be performed in a vacuum state. In further detail, the
apparatus 700 b may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C inFIG. 4C ) in which thefirst jig 710 b, thesecond jig 720 b, the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed. In addition, theapparatus 700 b may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber. The pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when thecover window 310 b and thepanel member 390 b are laminated. In addition, the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after the process is completed. - Accordingly, the
apparatus 700 b may manufacture thedisplay device 300 b having a curved surface. In particular, theapparatus 700 b may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by accurately attaching thedisplay panel 330 b and thecover window 310 b having a curved surface. - In addition, the
apparatus 700 b may improve quality by removing air bubbles or preventing air bubbles from being generated after thedisplay panel 330 b and the curved portions are compressed. -
FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view illustrating adisplay device 300 c according to still another embodiment of the present invention. - Referring to
FIG. 24 , thedisplay device 300 c may include acover window 310 c and apanel member 390 c. Thepanel member 390 c may include at least one of aTSP 340 c or adisplay panel 330 c. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that thepanel member 390 c includes both theTSP 340 c and thedisplay panel 330 c. - The
panel member 390 c may include a firstadhesive layer 320 c, theTSP 340 c, a secondadhesive layer 350 c, and thedisplay panel 330 c. In particular, the firstadhesive layer 320 c, theTSP 340 c, the secondadhesive layer 350 c, and thedisplay panel 330 c are the same as or similar to those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - At least a portion of the
cover window 310 c may be curved. In further detail, a middle portion of thecover window 310 c may be flat and both ends of the middle portion may be curved. Thecover window 310 c may be formed of a glass material or a plastic material as described above. In particular, thecover window 310 c may be formed such that a surface to which thedisplay panel 330 c is attached and on which an image or text is displayed is concave. - In the
display device 300 c formed as described above, thecover window 310 c, theTSP 340 c, and thedisplay panel 330 c may be adhered and fixed by the firstadhesive layer 320 c and the secondadhesive layer 350 c. - The
TSP 340 c and thedisplay panel 330 c may be attached to a protruding outer surface of thecover window 310 c. In further detail, theTSP 340 c and thedisplay panel 330 c may be provided on a protruding portion, instead of a recessed portion, of thecurved cover window 310 c. - Accordingly, the
display device 300 c shaped as described above may be applied to various members. -
FIG. 25 is a cross-sectional view illustrating anapparatus 400 c for manufacturing thedisplay device 300 c ofFIG. 24 , according to an embodiment of the present invention. - Referring to
FIG. 25 , theapparatus 400 c may include afirst jig 410 c, asecond jig 420 c, a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixingunit 430 c), and acushion unit 490 c. At least a portion of thefirst jig 410 c may be formed equally or similarly to an outer surface of thecover window 310 c. In further detail, an outer surface of thefirst jig 410 c on which thecover window 310 c is seated may be the same as or similar in shape to an outer surface of thecover window 310 c seated on the outer surface of thefirst jig 410 c. In particular, thefirst jig 410 c may protrude toward thesecond jig 420 c. - An outer surface of the
second jig 420 c may be recessed away from thefirst jig 410 c to correspond to or engage with a protruding portion of thefirst jig 410 c. - The driving unit M may include a
first driving unit 415 c and a second driving unit 425 c. Thefirst driving unit 415 c may linearly move thefirst jig 410 c toward thesecond jig 420 c, and the second driving unit 425 c may linearly move thesecond jig 420 c toward thefirst jig 410 c. Thefirst driving unit 415 c and the second driving unit 425 c may be formed in the same manner as or a similar manner to those described above. - In addition, the fixing unit may include a
first fixing unit 430 c provided on thefirst jig 410 c and a second fixing unit provided on thesecond jig 420 c. For convenience of description, it will be assumed that the fixing unit includes thefirst fixing unit 430 c. In addition, thefirst fixing unit 430 c and the second fixing unit may be formed in the same manner or a similar manner, and thus a detailed description of the second fixing unit will not be given. - The
first fixing unit 430 c may be formed in various ways. For example, thefirst fixing unit 430 c may include an adhesive member, an adhesive chuck, or an electrostatic chuck. In addition, thefirst fixing unit 430 c may include a first absorption unit, and a first absorption pump that is connected to the first absorption unit as described above. In particular, thefirst fixing unit 430 c is not limited thereto, and may include a clamp, or a protrusion that is provided on thefirst jig 410 c and mechanically restricts thecover window 310 c. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that thefirst fixing unit 430 c includes an adhesive member and is provided on an outer surface of afirst cushion unit 493 c. - The
cushion unit 490 c may be provided on at least one of thefirst jig 410 c or thesecond jig 420 c. A size of thecushion unit 490 c may be less than a size of at least one of thecover window 310 c or thepanel member 390 c. In further detail, thecushion unit 490 c may be disposed only on a contact portion with at least one of thecover window 310 c or thepanel member 390 c, and may be disposed to extend beyond the contact portion. Thecushion unit 490 c may be the same as or similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - The
cushion unit 490 c may include thefirst cushion unit 493 c that is provided on a surface of thefirst jig 410 c, and asecond cushion unit 491 c that is provided on a surface of thesecond jig 420 c. Thefirst cushion unit 493 c and thesecond cushion unit 491 c may be integrally formed and respectively provided on thefirst jig 410 c and thesecond jig 420 c. In addition, a plurality of thefirst cushion units 493 c and thesecond cushion units 491 c may be formed, and the plurality offirst cushion units 493 c and the plurality ofsecond cushion units 491 c may be provided on an outer surface of thefirst jig 410 c and an outer surface of thesecond jig 420 c, respectively, and spaced apart from each other. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that thefirst cushion unit 493 c and thesecond cushion unit 491 c are respectively provided on thefirst jig 410 c and thesecond jig 420 c. - A method of manufacturing the
display device 300 c by using theapparatus 400 c will now be described. First, thecover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c may be manufactured and prepared. In this case, a method of manufacturing thecover window 310 c is similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. In addition, theTSP 340 c and thedisplay panel 330 c may be adhered to each other by using the secondadhesive layer 350 c. - After the
cover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c are manufactured and prepared as described above, thecover window 310 c may be disposed on thefirst jig 410 c. Thecover window 310 c may be adhered and fixed to thefirst fixing unit 430 c. In particular, a size of thefirst fixing unit 430 c may be less than a size of thecover window 310 c. - While the process is performed, the
TSP 340 c and thedisplay panel 330 c adhered by using the secondadhesive layer 350 c may be disposed on thesecond jig 420 c. Thedisplay panel 330 c may be disposed to face thesecond jig 420 c, and theTSP 340 c may be disposed to face thefirst jig 410 c. - After the
TSP 340 c and thedisplay panel 330 c are disposed as described above, the firstadhesive layer 320 c may be coated on theTSP 340 c. The firstadhesive layer 320 c may be formed of the same material as or a similar material to that of the secondadhesive layer 350 c. - When the
panel member 390 c is completely disposed as described above, thefirst jig 410 c and thesecond jig 420 c may be moved toward each other by driving thefirst driving unit 415 c and the second driving unit 425 c. - In particular, when the
cover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c contact each other, a load range applied when thefirst jig 410 c and thesecond jig 420 c compress thecover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between thecover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c may be reduced, and thecover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and thecover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c are attached to each other, thecover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability. - While the process is performed, the
first cushion unit 493 c and thesecond cushion unit 491 c may uniformly distribute a force applied to thecover window 310 c, theTSP 340 c, and thedisplay panel 330 c. - When the process is completed, the
first driving unit 415 c and the second driving unit 425 c may operate to separate thefirst jig 410 c and thesecond jig 420 c. The operator may complete an operation by removing the completeddisplay device 300 c from thefirst jig 410 c or thesecond jig 420 c. - The operation may be performed in a vacuum state. In further detail, the
apparatus 400 c may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C inFIG. 4C ) in which thefirst jig 410 c, thesecond jig 420 c, the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed. In addition, theapparatus 400 c may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber. The pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when thecover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c are laminated. In addition, the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after a lamination process is completed. - Accordingly, the
apparatus 400 c may manufacture any type ofdisplay device 300 c. In addition, theapparatus 400 c may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing vapors or preventing vapors from being generated between thecover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c when thecover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c are laminated. -
FIG. 26 is a cross-sectional view illustrating anapparatus 500 c for manufacturing thedisplay device 300 c ofFIG. 24 , according to another embodiment of the present invention. - Referring to
FIG. 26 , theapparatus 500 c may include afirst jig 510 c, asecond jig 520 c, a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixingunit 530 c), acushion unit 590 c, and aclamping unit 550 c. In this case, thefirst jig 510 c, thesecond jig 520 c, the driving unit M, the fixing unit, and thecushion unit 590 c (including afirst cushion unit 593 c and a second cushion unit 591 c) are the same as or similar to those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - The
clamping unit 550 c may include afirst clamping unit 551 c and asecond clamping unit 552 c. Thefirst clamping unit 551 c and thesecond clamping unit 552 c may be disposed to face each other on a side surface of thefirst jig 510 c or thesecond jig 520 c. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that thefirst clamping unit 551 c and thesecond clamping unit 552 c are disposed to face each other on a side surface of thesecond jig 520 c. In addition, thefirst clamping unit 551 c and thesecond clamping unit 552 c are formed in the same or similar manner as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - A method of manufacturing the
display device 300 c by using theapparatus 500 c will now be described. First, thecover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c may be manufactured and prepared. In this case, a method of manufacturing thecover window 310 c is similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. In addition, theTSP 340 c and thedisplay panel 330 c may be adhered by using the secondadhesive layer 350 c. - After the
cover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c are manufactured and prepared as described above, thecover window 310 c may be disposed on thefirst jig 510 c. Thecover window 310 c may be adhered and fixed by afirst fixing unit 530 c. - While the process is performed, the
TSP 340 c and thedisplay panel 330 c adhered by using the secondadhesive layer 350 c as described above may be disposed on thesecond jig 520 c. Thedisplay panel 330 c may be disposed to face thesecond jig 520 c, and theTSP 340 c may be disposed to face thefirst jig 510 c. In particular, thedisplay panel 330 c and theTSP 340 c may be stacked, and an end of thedisplay panel 330 c and an end of theTSP 340 c may be fixed by being inserted into thefirst clamping unit 551 c and thesecond clamping unit 552 c. - After the
TSP 340 c and thedisplay panel 330 c are disposed as described above, the firstadhesive layer 320 c may be coated on theTSP 340 c. The firstadhesive layer 320 c may be formed of the same or similar material as that of the secondadhesive layer 350 c. - When the
cover window 310 c, theTSP 340 c, and thedisplay panel 330 c are completely disposed as described above, thefirst jig 510 c and thesecond jig 520 c may be moved toward each other by driving afirst driving unit 515 c and asecond driving unit 525 c. A flat portion of thecover window 310 c may first contact the firstadhesive layer 320 c, and curved ends of thecover window 310 c may sequentially contact the firstadhesive layer 320 c to be laminated. - In particular, when the
cover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c contact each other as described above, a load range applied when thefirst jig 510 c and thesecond jig 520 c compress thecover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between thecover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c may be reduced, and thecover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and thecover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c are attached to each other, thecover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability. - In addition, when the
first jig 510 c and thesecond jig 520 c move as described above, theTSP 340 c and thedisplay panel 330 c may be fixed while thefirst clamping unit 551 c and thesecond clamping unit 552 c do not move. - While the process is performed, the
first cushion unit 593 c and the second cushion unit 591 c may uniformly distribute a force applied to thecover window 310 c, theTSP 340 c, and thedisplay panel 330 c. - When the process is completed, the
first driving unit 515 c and thesecond driving unit 525 c may operate to separate thefirst jig 510 c and thesecond jig 520 c. The operator may complete an operation by removing the completeddisplay device 300 c from thefirst jig 510 c or thesecond jig 520 c. - The operation may be performed in a vacuum state. In further detail, the
apparatus 500 c may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C inFIG. 4C ) in which thefirst jig 510 c, thesecond jig 520 c, the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed. In addition, theapparatus 500 c may include a pressure adjustment unit for adjusting a pressure in the chamber. The pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when thecover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c are laminated. In addition, the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after the process is completed. - Accordingly, the
apparatus 500 c may manufacture any type ofdisplay device 300 c. In addition, theapparatus 500 c may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing vapors or preventing vapors from being generated between thecover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c when thecover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c are laminated. -
FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view illustrating anapparatus 600 c for manufacturing thedisplay device 300 c ofFIG. 24 , according to yet another embodiment of the present invention. - Referring to
FIG. 27 , theapparatus 600 c may include afirst jig 610 c, asecond jig 620 c, a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixingunit 630 c), acushion unit 690 c, aclamping unit 650 c, and a linear driving unit L. In this case, thefirst jig 610 c, thesecond jig 620 c, the driving unit M, the fixing unit, thecushion unit 690 c (including afirst cushion unit 693 c and asecond cushion unit 691 c), and theclamping unit 650 c are the same as or similar to those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - The linear driving unit L may include a first linear driving unit 660 c that is provided on a
first clamping unit 651 c and linearly moves thefirst clamping unit 651 c, and a second linear drivingunit 670 c that is provided on asecond clamping unit 652 c and linearly moves thesecond clamping unit 652 c. In particular, the first linear driving unit 660 c and the second linear drivingunit 670 c may respectively linearly move thefirst clamping unit 651 c and thesecond clamping unit 652 c in the same direction as a direction in which thesecond jig 620 c moves (e.g., in a moving direction of thesecond jig 620 c). The first linear driving unit 660 c and the second linear drivingunit 670 c may be formed in the same or similar manner. For convenience of description, the following description will focus on the first linear driving unit 660 c. - The first linear driving unit 660 c may include a first shaft 661 c that is connected to the
first clamping unit 651 c and linearly moves. In addition, the first linear driving unit 660 c may include afirst driving module 665 c that drives the first shaft 661 c. Thefirst driving module 665 c may be formed to include a cylinder or a motor. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that thefirst driving module 665 c includes a motor. In addition, it will be assumed that the first shaft 661 c includes a ball screw that is raised and lowered as thefirst driving module 665 c rotates. - The first linear driving unit 660 c may include a first
elastic unit 663 c that surrounds the first shaft 661 c. The firstelastic unit 663 c may include a compression spring, or may be formed of an elastic material such as rubber. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the firstelastic unit 663 c includes a compression spring. - The first
elastic unit 663 c may be disposed to surround an outer surface of the first shaft 661 c as described above, and thus may provide a restoring force to thefirst clamping unit 651 c when thefirst clamping unit 651 c moves. - A method of manufacturing the
display device 300 c by using theapparatus 600 c will now be described. First, thecover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c may be manufactured and prepared. In this case, a method of manufacturing thecover window 310 c is similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. In addition, theTSP 340 c and thedisplay panel 330 c may be adhered to each other by using the secondadhesive layer 350 c. - After the
cover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c are manufactured and prepared as described above, thecover window 310 c may be disposed on thefirst jig 610 c. Thecover window 310 c may be adhered and fixed by thefirst fixing unit 630 c. In addition, thecover window 310 c may be disposed such that a protruding portion faces thesecond jig 620 c. - While the process is performed, the
TSP 340 c and thedisplay panel 330 c adhered by using the secondadhesive layer 350 c as described above may be disposed on thesecond jig 620 c. Thedisplay panel 330 c may be disposed to face thesecond jig 620 c, and theTSP 340 c may be disposed to face thefirst jig 610 c. In particular, thedisplay panel 330 c and theTSP 340 c may be stacked, and an end of thedisplay panel 330 c and an end of theTSP 340 c may be fixed by being inserted into thefirst clamping unit 651 c and thesecond clamping unit 652 c. In addition, a central portion of thedisplay panel 330 c and a central portion of theTSP 340 c may be disposed adjacent to a recessed portion of thesecond jig 620 c, or may be disposed adjacent to thecover window 310 c. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that a central portion of thedisplay panel 330 c and a central portion of theTSP 340 c are disposed adjacent to a recessed portion of thesecond jig 620 c. - After the
TSP 340 c and thedisplay panel 330 c are disposed as described above, the firstadhesive layer 320 c may be coated on theTSP 340 c. The firstadhesive layer 320 c may be formed of the same or similar material as that of the secondadhesive layer 350 c. In another embodiment, the firstadhesive layer 320 c may be coated on theTSP 340 c before thedisplay panel 330 c and theTSP 340 c are disposed on thefirst clamping unit 651 c and thesecond clamping unit 652 c. - When the
cover window 310 c, theTSP 340 c, and thedisplay panel 330 c are completely disposed as described above, thefirst jig 610 c and thesecond jig 620 c may be moved toward each other by driving afirst driving unit 615 c and asecond driving unit 625 c. Thecover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c may sequentially contact and laminated beginning from a flat portion of thecover window 310 c toward both ends of thepanel member 390 c. - In particular, when the
cover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c contact each other, a load range applied when thefirst jig 610 c and thesecond jig 620 c compress thecover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between thecover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c may be reduced, and thecover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and thecover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c are attached to each other, thecover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability. - In addition, when the
first jig 610 c and thesecond jig 620 c move as described above, thefirst clamping unit 651 c and thesecond clamping unit 652 c may fix theTSP 340 c and thedisplay panel 330 c while linearly moving as thefirst jig 610 c and thesecond jig 620 c move. The first linear driving unit 660 c and the second linear drivingunit 670 c may be controlled based on a linear movement of at least one of thefirst jig 610 c or thesecond jig 620 c. - While the process is performed, the
first cushion unit 693 c and thesecond cushion unit 691 c may uniformly distribute a force applied to thecover window 310 c, theTSP 340 c, and thedisplay panel 330 c. - When the process is completed, the
first driving unit 615 c and thesecond driving unit 625 c may operate to separate thefirst jig 610 c and thesecond jig 620 c. The operator may complete an operation by removing the completeddisplay device 300 c from thefirst jig 610 c or thesecond jig 620 c. - The operation may be performed in a vacuum state. In further detail, the
apparatus 600 c may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C inFIG. 4C ) in which thefirst jig 610 c, thesecond jig 620 c, the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed. In addition, theapparatus 600 c may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber. The pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when thecover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c are laminated. In addition, the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after a process is completed. - Accordingly, the
apparatus 600 c may manufacture any type ofdisplay device 300 c. In addition, theapparatus 600 c may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing vapors or preventing vapors from being generated between thecover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c when thecover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c are laminated. -
FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view illustrating anapparatus 700 c for manufacturing thedisplay device 300 c ofFIG. 24 , according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention. - Referring to
FIG. 28 , theapparatus 700 c may include afirst jig 710 c, asecond jig 720 c, a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixingunit 730 c), a cushion unit 790 c, aclamping unit 750 c, and a linear driving unit L. In this case, thefirst jig 710 c, thesecond jig 720 c, the driving unit M, the fixing unit, the cushion unit 790 c, theclamping unit 750 c, and the linear driving unit L are the same as or similar to those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - The linear driving unit L may include a first
linear driving unit 760 c that is provided on a first clamping unit 751 c and linearly moves the first clamping unit 751 c, and a second linear drivingunit 770 c that is provided on asecond clamping unit 752 c and linearly moves thesecond clamping unit 752 c. The firstlinear driving unit 760 c and the second linear drivingunit 770 c may respectively linearly move the first clamping unit 751 c and thesecond clamping unit 752 c in a diagonal direction. In particular, the firstlinear driving unit 760 c and the second linear drivingunit 770 c may linearly move the first clamping unit 751 c and thesecond clamping unit 752 c such that movement directions of the first clamping unit 751 c and thesecond clamping unit 752 c form angles with respect to a movement direction of thesecond jig 720 c. - A method of manufacturing the
display device 300 c by using theapparatus 700 c will now be described. First, thecover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c may be manufactured and prepared. In this case, a method of manufacturing thecover window 310 c is similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. In addition, theTSP 340 c and thedisplay panel 330 c may be adhered to each other by using the secondadhesive layer 350 c. - After the
cover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c are manufactured and prepared as described above, thecover window 310 c may be disposed on thefirst jig 710 c. Thecover window 310 c may be adhered and fixed by the firstadhesive layer 320 c. - While the process is performed, the
TSP 340 c and thedisplay panel 330 c adhered by using the secondadhesive layer 350 c as described above may be disposed on thesecond jig 720 c. Thedisplay panel 330 c may be disposed to face thesecond jig 720 c, and theTSP 340 c may be disposed to face thefirst jig 710 c. In particular, thedisplay panel 330 c and theTSP 340 c may be stacked, and an end of thedisplay panel 330 c and an end of theTSP 340 c may be fixed by being inserted into the first clamping unit 751 c and thesecond clamping unit 752 c. Thedisplay panel 330 c and theTSP 340 c may be disposed such that central portions are lower in position than other portions due to the first clamping unit 751 c and thesecond clamping unit 752 c. - After the
TSP 340 c and thedisplay panel 330 c are disposed as described above, the firstadhesive layer 320 c may be coated on theTSP 340 c. The firstadhesive layer 320 c may be formed of the same or similar material as that of the secondadhesive layer 350 c. In another embodiment, the firstadhesive layer 320 c may be coated on theTSP 340 c before thedisplay panel 330 c and theTSP 340 c are disposed on the first clamping unit 751 c and thesecond clamping unit 752 c as described above. - When the
cover window 310 c, theTSP 340 c, and thedisplay panel 330 c are completely disposed as described above, thefirst jig 710 c and thesecond jig 720 c may be moved toward each other by driving afirst driving unit 715 c and asecond driving unit 725 c. A flat portion of thecover window 310 c may first contact the firstadhesive layer 320 c, and both end portions of thecover window 310 c may sequentially contact the firstadhesive layer 320 c to be laminated. - In particular, when the
cover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c contact each other, a load range applied when thefirst jig 710 c and thesecond jig 720 c compress thecover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between thecover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c may be reduced, and thecover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and thecover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c are attached to each other, thecover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability. - In addition, when the
first jig 710 c and thesecond jig 720 c move as described above, the first clamping unit 751 c and thesecond clamping unit 752 c may fix theTSP 340 c and thedisplay panel 330 c while linearly moving as thefirst jig 710 c and thesecond jig 720 c move. The firstlinear driving unit 760 c and the second linear drivingunit 770 c may be controlled based on a linear movement of at least one of thefirst jig 710 c or thesecond jig 720 c. - While the process is performed, a
first cushion unit 793 c and a second cushion unit 791 c may uniformly distribute a force applied to thecover window 310 c, theTSP 340 c, and thedisplay panel 330 c. - When the process is completed, the
first driving unit 715 c and thesecond driving unit 725 c may operate to separate thefirst jig 710 c and thesecond jig 720 c. The operator may complete an operation by removing the completeddisplay device 300 c from thefirst jig 710 c or thesecond jig 720 c. - The operation may be performed in a vacuum state. In further detail, the
apparatus 700 c may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C inFIG. 4C ) in which thefirst jig 710 c, thesecond jig 720 c, the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed. In addition, theapparatus 700 c may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber. The pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when thecover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c are laminated. In addition, the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after a process is completed. - Accordingly, the
apparatus 700 c may manufacture any type ofdisplay device 300 c. In addition, theapparatus 700 c may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing vapors or preventing vapors from being generated between thecover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c when thecover window 310 c and thepanel member 390 c are laminated. -
FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view illustrating adisplay device 300 d according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention. - Referring to
FIG. 29 , thedisplay device 300 d may include acover window 310 d and apanel member 390 d as described above. In addition, thedisplay device 300 d may include a firstadhesive layer 320 d that is disposed between thepanel member 390 d and thecover window 310 d. Thepanel member 390 d may include adisplay panel 330 d and aTSP 340 d as described above. In particular, a secondadhesive layer 350 d may be provided between thedisplay panel 330 d and theTSP 340 d to attach thedisplay panel 330 d and theTSP 340 d. - The
cover window 310 d may be formed such that at least a portion of thecover window 310 d is curved. In particular, thecover window 310 d may be formed such that a surface to which thepanel member 390 d is attached and on which an image or text is displayed is curved. In particular, thecover window 310 d may be formed to have a curved surface having a curvature radius of R. Thecover window 310 d may be formed to have a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius in a longitudinal direction or a width direction. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that thecover window 310 d is formed to have a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius and the curved surface is formed in a width direction of thecover window 310 d. - In particular, the
cover window 310 d may be formed such that a convex portion of thecover window 310 d faces the firstadhesive layer 320 d. TheTSP 340 d, the secondadhesive layer 350 d, and thedisplay panel 330 d may be attached and fixed to a convex outer surface of thecover window 310 d on the firstadhesive layer 320 d. - Accordingly, since the
display device 300 d is formed to have a set or predetermined curvature radius, thedisplay device 300 d may be applied to various members. -
FIG. 30 is a cross-sectional view illustrating anapparatus 400 d for manufacturing thedisplay device 300 d ofFIG. 29 , according to an embodiment of the present invention. - Referring to
FIG. 30 , theapparatus 400 d may include afirst jig 410 d, asecond jig 420 d, a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixingunit 430 d), and acushion unit 490 d (including afirst cushion unit 493 d and a second cushion unit 491 d). An outer surface of thefirst jig 410 d on which thecover window 310 d is seated may be the same as or similar to an outer surface of thecover window 310 d contacting thefirst jig 410 d. In further detail, thefirst jig 410 d may have a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius to correspond to thecover window 310 d. In particular, thefirst jig 410 d may be formed to protrude toward thesecond jig 420 d. - An outer surface of the
second jig 420 d may be recessed away from thefirst jig 410 d to correspond to or engage with a protruding portion of thefirst jig 410 d. The outer surface of thesecond jig 420 d may be a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius. - The driving unit M may include a
first driving unit 415 d and asecond driving unit 425 d. Thefirst driving unit 415 d may linearly move thefirst jig 410 d toward thesecond jig 420 d, and thesecond driving unit 425 d may linearly move thesecond jig 420 d toward thefirst jig 410 d. Thefirst driving unit 415 d and thesecond driving unit 425 d may be formed in the same manner as or a similar manner to those described above. - In addition, the fixing unit may include a
first fixing unit 430 d provided on thefirst jig 410 d and a second fixing unit provided on thesecond jig 420 d. For convenience of description, it will be assumed that the fixing unit includes thefirst fixing unit 430 d. In addition, thefirst fixing unit 430 d and the second fixing unit may be formed in the same manner or a similar manner, and thus a detailed description of the second fixing unit will not be given. - The
first fixing unit 430 d may be formed in various ways. For example, thefirst fixing unit 430 d may include an adhesive member, an adhesive chuck, or an electrostatic chuck. In addition, thefirst fixing unit 430 d may include a first absorption unit, and a first absorption pump that is connected to the first absorption unit. In particular, thefirst fixing unit 430 d is not limited thereto, and may include a clamp, or a protrusion that is provided on thefirst jig 410 d and mechanically restricts thecover window 310 d. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that thefirst fixing unit 430 d includes an adhesive member. - A method of manufacturing the
display device 300 d by using theapparatus 400 d will now be described. First, thecover window 310 d and thepanel member 390 d may be manufactured and prepared. In this case, a method of manufacturing thecover window 310 d is similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. In addition, theTSP 340 d and thedisplay panel 330 d may be adhered to each other by using the secondadhesive layer 350 d. - After the
cover window 310 d and thepanel member 390 d are manufactured and prepared as described above, thecover window 310 d may be disposed on thefirst jig 410 d. Thecover window 310 d may be formed to have a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius of R as described above and may be seated on an outer surface of thefirst jig 410 d. Thefirst fixing unit 430 d may adhere and fix thecover window 310 d. - While the process is performed, the
TSP 340 d and thedisplay panel 330 d adhered by using the secondadhesive layer 350 d may be disposed on thesecond jig 420 d. Thedisplay panel 330 d may be disposed to face thesecond jig 420 d, and theTSP 340 d may be disposed to face thefirst jig 410 d. - After the
TSP 340 d and thedisplay panel 330 d are disposed as described above, the firstadhesive layer 320 d may be coated on theTSP 340 d. The firstadhesive layer 320 d may be formed of the same material as or a similar material to that of the secondadhesive layer 350 d. - When the
cover window 310 d, theTSP 340 d, and thedisplay panel 330 d are completely disposed as described above, thefirst jig 410 d and thesecond jig 420 d may be moved toward each other by driving thefirst driving unit 415 d and thesecond driving unit 425 d. A protruding portion of thecover window 310 d may first contact the firstadhesive layer 320 d, and the firstadhesive layer 320 d and thecover window 310 d may be sequentially laminated from central portions of thedisplay panel 330 d toward both end portions. - In particular, when the
cover window 310 d and thepanel member 390 d contact each other, a load range applied when thefirst jig 410 d and thesecond jig 420 d compress thecover window 310 d and thepanel member 390 d may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between thecover window 310 d and thepanel member 390 d may be reduced, and thecover window 310 d and thepanel member 390 d may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and thecover window 310 d and thepanel member 390 d are attached to each other, thecover window 310 d and thepanel member 390 d may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability. - While the process is performed, the
cushion unit 490 d may uniformly distribute a force applied to thecover window 310 d, theTSP 340 d, and thedisplay panel 330 d. - When the process is completed, the
first driving unit 415 d and thesecond driving unit 425 d may operate to separate thefirst jig 410 d and thesecond jig 420 d. The operator may complete an operation by removing the completeddisplay device 300 d from thefirst jig 410 d or thesecond jig 420 d. - The operation may be performed in a vacuum state. In further detail, the
apparatus 400 d may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C inFIG. 4C ) in which thefirst jig 410 d, thesecond jig 420 d, the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed. In addition, theapparatus 400 d may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber. The pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when thecover window 310 d and thepanel member 390 d are laminated. In addition, the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after the process is completed. - Accordingly, the
apparatus 400 d may manufacture any type ofdisplay device 300 d. In addition, theapparatus 400 d may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing vapors or preventing vapors from being generated between thecover window 310 d and thepanel member 390 d when thecover window 310 d and thepanel member 390 d are laminated. -
FIG. 31 is a cross-sectional view illustrating anapparatus 500 d for manufacturing thedisplay device 300 d ofFIG. 29 , according to another embodiment of the present invention. - Referring to
FIG. 31 , theapparatus 500 d may include afirst jig 510 d, asecond jig 520 d, a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixingunit 530 d), a cushion unit 590 d, and aclamping unit 550 d. In this case, thefirst jig 510 d, thesecond jig 520 d, the driving unit M, the fixing unit, and the cushion unit 590 d (including afirst cushion unit 593 d and asecond cushion unit 591 d) are the same as or similar to those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - The
clamping unit 550 d may include afirst clamping unit 551 d and asecond clamping unit 552 d. Thefirst clamping unit 551 d and thesecond clamping unit 552 d may be disposed to face each other on a side surface of thefirst jig 510 d or thesecond jig 520 d. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that thefirst clamping unit 551 d and thesecond clamping unit 552 d are disposed to face each other on a side surface of thesecond jig 520 d. In addition, thefirst clamping unit 551 d and thesecond clamping unit 552 d are formed in the same or similar manner as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - A method of manufacturing the
display device 300 d by using theapparatus 500 d will now be described. First, thecover window 310 d and thepanel member 390 d may be manufactured and prepared. In this case, a method of manufacturing thecover window 310 d is similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. In addition, theTSP 340 d and thedisplay panel 330 d may be adhered by using the secondadhesive layer 350 d. - After the
cover window 310 d and thepanel member 390 d are manufactured and prepared as described above, thecover window 310 d may be disposed on thefirst jig 510 d. Thecover window 310 d may be formed to have a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius of R as described above and may be seated on an outer surface of thefirst jig 510 d. Thecover window 310 d may be adhered and fixed by thefirst fixing unit 530 d. - While the process is performed, the
TSP 340 d and thedisplay panel 330 d adhered by using the secondadhesive layer 350 d as described above may be disposed on thesecond jig 520 d. Thedisplay panel 330 d may be disposed to face thesecond jig 520 d, and theTSP 340 d may be disposed to face thefirst jig 510 d. Thedisplay panel 330 d and theTSP 340 d may be stacked, and an end of thedisplay panel 330 d and an end of theTSP 340 d may be fixed by being inserted into thefirst clamping unit 551 d and thesecond clamping unit 552 d. - After the
TSP 340 d and thedisplay panel 330 d are disposed as described above, the firstadhesive layer 320 d may be coated on theTSP 340 d. The firstadhesive layer 320 d may be formed of the same or similar material as that of the secondadhesive layer 350 d. - When the
cover window 310 d, theTSP 340 d, and thedisplay panel 330 d are completely disposed as described above, thefirst jig 510 d and thesecond jig 520 d may be moved toward each other by driving afirst driving unit 515 d and asecond driving unit 525 d. A protruding portion of thecover window 310 d may first contact the firstadhesive layer 320 d, and the firstadhesive layer 320 d and thecover window 310 d may be sequentially laminated from central portions of thedisplay panel 330 d toward both end portions. - In particular, when the
cover window 310 d and thepanel member 390 d are adhered to each other as described above, a load range applied when thefirst jig 510 d and thesecond jig 520 d compress thecover window 310 d and thepanel member 390 d may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between thecover window 310 d and thepanel member 390 d may be reduced, and thecover window 310 d and thepanel member 390 d may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and thecover window 310 d and thepanel member 390 d are attached to each other, thecover window 310 d and thepanel member 390 d may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability. - In addition, when the
first jig 510 d and thesecond jig 520 d move as described above, theTSP 340 d and thedisplay panel 330 d may be fixed while thefirst clamping unit 551 d and thesecond clamping unit 552 d do not move. - While the process is performed, the
first cushion unit 593 d and thesecond cushion unit 591 d may uniformly distribute a force applied to thecover window 310 d, theTSP 340 d, and thedisplay panel 330 d. - When the process is completed, the
first driving unit 515 d and thesecond driving unit 525 d may operate to separate thefirst jig 510 d and thesecond jig 520 d. - The operator may complete an operation by removing the completed
display device 300 d from thefirst jig 510 d or thesecond jig 520 d. - The operation may be performed in a vacuum state. In further detail, the
apparatus 500 d may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C inFIG. 4C ) in which thefirst jig 510 d, thesecond jig 520 d, the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed. In addition, theapparatus 500 d may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber. The pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when thecover window 310 d and thepanel member 390 d are laminated. In addition, the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after the process is completed. - Accordingly, the
apparatus 500 d may manufacture any type ofdisplay device 300 d. In addition, theapparatus 500 d may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing vapors or preventing vapors from being generated between thecover window 310 d and thepanel member 390 d when thecover window 310 d and thepanel member 390 d are laminated. -
FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view illustrating anapparatus 600 d for manufacturing thedisplay device 300 d ofFIG. 29 , according to yet another embodiment of the present invention. - Referring to
FIG. 32 , theapparatus 600 d may include afirst jig 610 d, asecond jig 620 d, a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixingunit 630 d), acushion unit 690 d, aclamping unit 650 d, and a linear driving unit L. In this case, thefirst jig 610 d, thesecond jig 620 d, the driving unit M, the fixing unit, thecushion unit 690 d, and theclamping unit 650 d are the same as or similar to those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - The linear driving unit L may include a first
linear driving unit 660 d that is provided on a first clamping unit 651 d and linearly moves the first clamping unit 651 d, and a second linear drivingunit 670 d that is provided on asecond clamping unit 652 d and linearly moves thesecond clamping unit 652 d. In particular, the firstlinear driving unit 660 d and the second linear drivingunit 670 d may respectively linearly move the first clamping unit 651 d and thesecond clamping unit 652 d in the same direction as a direction in which thesecond jig 620 d moves. The firstlinear driving unit 660 d and the second linear drivingunit 670 d may be formed in the same or similar manner. For convenience of description, the following description will focus on the firstlinear driving unit 660 d. - The first
linear driving unit 660 d may include afirst shaft 661 d that is connected to the first clamping unit 651 d and linearly moves the first clamping unit 651 d. In addition, the firstlinear driving unit 660 d may include afirst driving module 665 d that drives thefirst shaft 661 d. Thefirst driving module 665 d may be formed to include a cylinder or a motor. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that thefirst driving module 665 d includes a motor. In addition, it will be assumed that thefirst shaft 661 d includes a ball screw that is raised and lowered as thefirst driving module 665 d rotates. - The first
linear driving unit 660 d may include a firstelastic unit 663 d that surrounds thefirst shaft 661 d. The firstelastic unit 663 d may include a compression spring, or may be formed of an elastic material such as rubber. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the firstelastic unit 663 d includes a compression spring. - The first
elastic unit 663 d may be disposed to surround an outer surface of thefirst shaft 661 d as described above, and thus may provide a restoring force to the first clamping unit 651 d when the first clamping unit 651 d moves. - A method of manufacturing the
display device 300 d by using theapparatus 600 d will now be described. First, thecover window 310 d and thepanel member 390 d may be manufactured and prepared. In this case, a method of manufacturing thecover window 310 d is similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. In addition, theTSP 340 d and thedisplay panel 330 d may be adhered to each other by using the secondadhesive layer 350 d. - After the
cover window 310 d and thepanel member 390 d are manufactured and prepared as described above, thecover window 310 d may be disposed on thefirst jig 610 d. Thecover window 310 d may be formed to have a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius of R as described above, and may be seated on an outer surface of thefirst jig 610 d. Thecover window 310 d may be adhered and fixed by thefirst fixing unit 630 d. - While the process is performed, the
TSP 340 d and thedisplay panel 330 d adhered by using the secondadhesive layer 350 d as described above may be disposed on thesecond jig 620 d. Thedisplay panel 330 d may be disposed to face thesecond jig 620 d, and theTSP 340 d may be disposed to face thefirst jig 610 d. In particular, thedisplay panel 330 d and theTSP 340 d may be stacked, and an end of thedisplay panel 330 d and an end of theTSP 340 d may be fixed by being inserted into a first clamping unit 651 d and asecond clamping unit 652 d. - The
display panel 330 d and theTSP 340 d may be disposed such that at least one portion protrudes more than other portions toward thecover window 310 d or toward thesecond jig 620 d. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that at least one portion of thedisplay panel 330 d and theTSP 340 d protrudes more than other portions toward thesecond jig 620 d. - After the
TSP 340 d and thedisplay panel 330 d are disposed as described above, the firstadhesive layer 320 d may be coated on theTSP 340 d. The firstadhesive layer 320 d may be formed of the same or similar material as that of the secondadhesive layer 350 d. - When the
cover window 310 d, theTSP 340 d, and thedisplay panel 330 d are completely disposed as described above, thefirst jig 610 d and thesecond jig 620 d may be moved toward each other by driving afirst driving unit 615 d and asecond driving unit 625 d. A protruding portion of thecover window 310 d may first contact the firstadhesive layer 320 d, and the firstadhesive layer 320 d and thecover window 310 d may be sequentially laminated from central portions of thedisplay panel 330 d toward both end portions. - In particular, when the
cover window 310 d and thepanel member 390 d contact each other, a load range applied when thefirst jig 610 d and thesecond jig 620 d compress thecover window 310 d and thepanel member 390 d may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between thecover window 310 d and thepanel member 390 d may be reduced, and thecover window 310 d and thepanel member 390 d may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and thecover window 310 d and thepanel member 390 d are attached to each other, thecover window 310 d and thepanel member 390 d may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability. - In addition, when the
first jig 610 d and thesecond jig 620 d move as described above, the first clamping unit 651 d and thesecond clamping unit 652 d may fix theTSP 340 d and thedisplay panel 330 d while linearly moving as thefirst jig 610 d and thesecond jig 620 d move. The firstlinear driving unit 660 d and the second linear drivingunit 670 d may be controlled based on a linear movement of at least one of thefirst jig 610 d or thesecond jig 620 d. - While the process is performed, a
first cushion unit 693 d and a second cushion unit 691 d may uniformly distribute a force applied to thecover window 310 d, theTSP 340 d, and thedisplay panel 330 d. - When the process is completed, the
first driving unit 615 d and thesecond driving unit 625 d may operate to separate thefirst jig 610 d and thesecond jig 620 d. The operator may complete an operation by removing the completeddisplay device 300 d from thefirst jig 610 d or thesecond jig 620 d. - The operation may be performed in a vacuum state. In further detail, the
apparatus 600 d may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C inFIG. 4C ) in which thefirst jig 610 d, thesecond jig 620 d, the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed. In addition, theapparatus 600 d may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber. The pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when thecover window 310 d and thepanel member 390 d are laminated. In addition, the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after a process is completed. - Accordingly, the
apparatus 600 d may manufacture any type ofdisplay device 300 d. In addition, theapparatus 600 d may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing vapors or preventing vapors from being generated between thecover window 310 d and thepanel member 390 d when thecover window 310 d and thepanel member 390 d are laminated. -
FIG. 33 is a cross-sectional view illustrating anapparatus 700 d for manufacturing thedisplay device 300 d ofFIG. 29 , according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention. - Referring to
FIG. 33 , theapparatus 700 d may include afirst jig 710 d, asecond jig 720 d, a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixingunit 730 d), acushion unit 790 d, aclamping unit 750 d, and a linear driving unit L. In this case, thefirst jig 710 d, thesecond jig 720 d, the driving unit M, the fixing unit, thecushion unit 790 d, theclamping unit 750 d, and the linear driving unit L are the same as or similar to those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - The linear driving unit L may include a first
linear driving unit 760 d that is provided on the first clamping unit 751 d and linearly moves the first clamping unit 751 d, and a second linear drivingunit 770 d that is provided on thesecond clamping unit 752 d and linearly moves thesecond clamping unit 752 d. The firstlinear driving unit 760 d and the second linear drivingunit 770 d may respectively linearly move the first clamping unit 751 d and thesecond clamping unit 752 d in a diagonal direction. In particular, the firstlinear driving unit 760 d and the second linear drivingunit 770 d may linearly move the first clamping unit 751 d and thesecond clamping unit 752 d such that movement directions of the first clamping unit 751 d and thesecond clamping unit 752 d form angles with respect to a movement direction of thesecond jig 720 d. - A method of manufacturing the
display device 300 d by using theapparatus 700 d will now be described. First, thecover window 310 d and thepanel member 390 d may be manufactured and prepared. In this case, a method of manufacturing thecover window 310 d is similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. In addition, theTSP 340 d and thedisplay panel 330 d may be adhered to each other by using the secondadhesive layer 350 d. - After the
cover window 310 d and thepanel member 390 d are manufactured and prepared as described above, thecover window 310 d may be disposed on thefirst jig 710 d. Thecover window 310 d may be formed to have a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius of R as described above, and may be seated on an outer surface of thefirst jig 710 d. Thecover window 310 d may be adhered and fixed by thefirst fixing unit 730 d. - While the process is performed, the
TSP 340 d and thedisplay panel 330 d adhered by using the secondadhesive layer 350 d as described above may be disposed on thesecond jig 720 d. Thedisplay panel 330 d may be disposed to face thesecond jig 720 d, and theTSP 340 d may be disposed to face thefirst jig 710 d. In particular, thedisplay panel 330 d and theTSP 340 d may be stacked, and an end of thedisplay panel 330 d and an end of theTSP 340 d may be fixed by being inserted into the first clamping unit 751 d and thesecond clamping unit 752 d. - The
display panel 330 d and theTSP 340 d may be disposed such that central portions are lower in position than other portions due to the first clamping unit 751 d and thesecond clamping unit 752 d. In other embodiments, thedisplay panel 330 d and theTSP 340 d may be disposed such that central portions are higher in position than other portions. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that central portions of thedisplay panel 330 d and theTSP 340 d are lower in position than other portions. - After the
TSP 340 d and thedisplay panel 330 d are disposed as described above, the firstadhesive layer 320 d may be coated on theTSP 340 d. The firstadhesive layer 320 d may be formed of the same or similar material as that of the secondadhesive layer 350 d. - When the
cover window 310 d, theTSP 340 d, and thedisplay panel 330 d are completely disposed as described above, thefirst jig 710 d and thesecond jig 720 d may be moved toward each other by driving afirst driving unit 715 d and asecond driving unit 725 d. A protruding portion of thecover window 310 d may first contact the firstadhesive layer 320 d, and the firstadhesive layer 320 d and thecover window 310 d may be sequentially laminated from central portions of thedisplay panel 330 d toward both end portions. - In particular, when the
cover window 310 d and thepanel member 390 d contact each other, a load range applied when thefirst jig 710 d and thesecond jig 720 d compress thecover window 310 d and thepanel member 390 d may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between thecover window 310 d and thepanel member 390 d may be reduced, and thecover window 310 d and thepanel member 390 d may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and thecover window 310 d and thepanel member 390 d are attached to each other, thecover window 310 d and thepanel member 390 d may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability. - In addition, when the
first jig 710 d and thesecond jig 720 d move as described above, the first clamping unit 751 d and thesecond clamping unit 752 d may fix theTSP 340 d and thedisplay panel 330 d while linearly moving as thefirst jig 710 d and thesecond jig 720 d move. The firstlinear driving unit 760 d and the second linear drivingunit 770 d may be controlled based on a linear movement of at least one of thefirst jig 710 d or thesecond jig 720 d. - While the process is performed, a
first cushion unit 793 d and asecond cushion unit 791 d may uniformly distribute a force applied to thecover window 310 d, theTSP 340 d, and thedisplay panel 330 d. - When the process is completed, the
first driving unit 715 d and thesecond driving unit 725 d may operate to separate thefirst jig 710 d and thesecond jig 720 d. The operator may complete an operation by removing the completeddisplay device 300 d from thefirst jig 710 d or thesecond jig 720 d. - The operation may be performed in a vacuum state. In further detail, the
apparatus 700 d may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C inFIG. 4C ) in which thefirst jig 710 d, thesecond jig 720 d, the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed. In addition, theapparatus 700 d may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber. The pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when thecover window 310 d and thepanel member 390 d are laminated. In addition, the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after a process is completed. - Accordingly, the
apparatus 700 d may manufacture any type ofdisplay device 300 d. In addition, theapparatus 700 d may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing vapors or preventing vapors from being generated between thecover window 310 d and thepanel member 390 d when thecover window 310 d and thepanel member 390 d are laminated. -
FIG. 34 is a cross-sectional view illustrating adisplay device 300 e according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention. - Referring to
FIG. 34 , thedisplay device 300 e may include acover window 310 e and apanel member 390 e as described above. In addition, thedisplay device 300 e may include a firstadhesive layer 320 e that is disposed between thepanel member 390 e and thecover window 310 e. Thepanel member 390 e may include adisplay panel 330 e and aTSP 340 e as described above. In particular, a secondadhesive layer 350 e may be provided between thedisplay panel 330 e and theTSP 340 e to attach thedisplay panel 330 e and theTSP 340 e. - At least a portion of the
cover window 310 e may be curved. Thecover window 310 e may be formed such that a surface to which thepanel member 390 e is attached and on which an image or text is displayed is concave. - The
cover window 310 e may be formed to have at least one curved surface having a curvature radius. In some embodiments, thecover window 310 e may be formed to have a first curved surface having a curvature radius of R1, a second curved surface having a curvature radius of R2, and may further include a third curved surface having a curvature radius of R3 in a longitudinal direction or a width direction. In other embodiments, thecover window 310 e may further include curved surfaces having curvature radii of R4, R5, . . . , and RN (N is a natural number) in addition to the curved surfaces having the curvature radii of R1, R2, and R3. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that thecover window 310 e is formed to have the first, second, and third curved surfaces having the curvature radii of R1, R2, and R3 in a width direction. - In particular, the
cover window 310 e may be formed to protrude toward the firstadhesive layer 320 e. TheTSP 340 e, the secondadhesive layer 350 e, and thedisplay panel 330 e may be sequentially stacked and fixed to a protruding outer surface of thecover window 310 e on the firstadhesive layer 320 e. Accordingly, since thedisplay device 300 e is formed to have a set or predetermined curvature radii, thedisplay device 300 e may be applied to various members. -
FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view illustrating anapparatus 400 e for manufacturing thedisplay device 300 e ofFIG. 34 , according to an embodiment of the present invention. - Referring to
FIG. 35 , theapparatus 400 e may include afirst jig 410 e, asecond jig 420 e, a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixingunit 430 e), and acushion unit 490 e. An outer surface of thefirst jig 410 e on which thecover window 310 e is seated may be formed equally or similarly to an outer surface of thecover window 310 e contacting the outer surface of thefirst jig 410 e. In further detail, thefirst jig 410 e may have at least two curved surfaces having curvature radii of R1, R2′, R3′, . . . , like thecover window 310 e. In particular, thefirst jig 410 e may be formed to protrude toward thesecond jig 420 e. - An outer surface of the
second jig 420 e may be recessed away from thefirst jig 410 e to correspond to or engage with a protruding portion of thefirst jig 410 e. The outer surface of thesecond jig 420 e may include at least two curved surfaces having set or predetermined curvature radii. - The driving unit M may include a
first driving unit 415 e and asecond driving unit 425 e. Thefirst driving unit 415 e may linearly move thefirst jig 410 e toward thesecond jig 420 e, and thesecond driving unit 425 e may linearly move thesecond jig 420 e toward thefirst jig 410 e. Thefirst driving unit 415 e and thesecond driving unit 425 e may be formed in the same manner as or a similar manner to those described above. - In addition, the fixing unit may include a
first fixing unit 430 e provided on thefirst jig 410 e and a second fixing unit provided on thesecond jig 420 e. For convenience of description, it will be assumed that the fixing unit includes thefirst fixing unit 430 e. In addition, thefirst fixing unit 430 e and the second fixing unit may be formed in the same manner or a similar manner, and thus a detailed description of the second fixing unit will not be given. - The
first fixing unit 430 e may be formed in various ways. For example, thefirst fixing unit 430 e may include an adhesive member, an adhesive chuck, or an electrostatic chuck. In addition, thefirst fixing unit 430 e may include a first absorption unit, and a first absorption pump that is connected to the first absorption unit. In particular, thefirst fixing unit 430 e is not limited thereto, and may include a clamp, or a protrusion that is provided on thefirst jig 410 e and mechanically restricts thecover window 310 e. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that thefirst fixing unit 430 e includes an adhesive member. - The
cushion unit 490 e may be provided on at least one of thefirst jig 410 e or thesecond jig 420 e. In this case, the cushion unit is the same as or similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. In addition, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the cushion unit is provided on each of thefirst jig 410 e and thesecond jig 420 e. - A method of manufacturing the
display device 300 e by using theapparatus 400 e will now be described. First, thecover window 310 e and thepanel member 390 e may be manufactured and prepared. In this case, a method of manufacturing thecover window 310 e is similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. In addition, theTSP 340 e and thedisplay panel 330 e may be adhered by using the secondadhesive layer 350 e. - After the
cover window 310 e and thepanel member 390 e are manufactured and prepared as described above, thecover window 310 e may be disposed on thefirst jig 410 e. Thecover window 310 e may be formed to have at least two curved surfaces having curvature radii as described above and may be seated on an outer surface of thefirst jig 410 e. Thecover window 310 e may be adhered and fixed by thefirst fixing unit 430 e. - While the process is performed, the
TSP 340 e and thedisplay panel 330 e adhered by using the secondadhesive layer 350 e may be disposed on thesecond jig 420 e. Thedisplay panel 330 e may be disposed to face thesecond jig 420 e, and theTSP 340 e may be disposed to face thefirst jig 410 e. - After the
TSP 340 e and thedisplay panel 330 e are disposed as described above, the firstadhesive layer 320 e may be coated on theTSP 340 e. The firstadhesive layer 320 e may be formed of the same material as or a similar material to that of the secondadhesive layer 350 e. - When the
cover window 310 e, theTSP 340 e, and thedisplay panel 330 e are completely disposed as described above, thefirst jig 410 e and thesecond jig 420 e may be moved toward each other by driving thefirst driving unit 415 e and thesecond driving unit 425 e. A protruding portion of thecover window 310 e may first contact the firstadhesive layer 320 e, and the firstadhesive layer 320 e and thecover window 310 e may be sequentially laminated from central portions of thedisplay panel 330 e to both end portions. - In particular, when the
cover window 310 e and thepanel member 390 e contact each other, a load range applied when thefirst jig 410 e and thesecond jig 420 e compress thecover window 310 e and thepanel member 390 e may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between thecover window 310 e and thepanel member 390 e may be reduced, and thecover window 310 e and thepanel member 390 e may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and thecover window 310 e and thepanel member 390 e are attached to each other, thecover window 310 e and thepanel member 390 e may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability. - While the process is performed, a
first cushion unit 493 e and a second cushion unit 491 e may uniformly distribute a force applied to thepanel member 390 e and thecover window 310 e. - When the process is completed, the
first driving unit 415 e and thesecond driving unit 425 e may operate to separate thefirst jig 410 e and thesecond jig 420 e. The operator may complete an operation by removing the completeddisplay device 300 e from thefirst jig 410 e or thesecond jig 420 e. - The operation may be performed in a vacuum state. In further detail, the
apparatus 400 e may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C inFIG. 4C ) in which thefirst jig 410 e, thesecond jig 420 e, the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed. In addition, theapparatus 400 e may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber. The pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when thecover window 310 e and thepanel member 390 e are laminated. In addition, the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after the process is completed. - Accordingly, the
apparatus 400 e may manufacture any type ofdisplay device 300 e. In addition, theapparatus 400 e may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing vapors or preventing vapors from being generated between thecover window 310 e and thepanel member 390 e when thecover window 310 e and thepanel member 390 e are laminated. -
FIG. 36 is a cross-sectional view illustrating anapparatus 500 e for manufacturing thedisplay device 300 e ofFIG. 34 , according to another embodiment of the present invention. - Referring to
FIG. 36 , theapparatus 500 e includes afirst jig 510 e, asecond jig 520 e, a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixingunit 530 e), and acushion unit 590 e. In this case, thefirst jig 510 e, thesecond jig 520 e, the driving unit M, the fixing unit, and thecushion unit 590 e are substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - The driving unit M may include a
first driving unit 515 e and asecond driving unit 525 e, and the fixing unit may include afirst fixing unit 530 e. In this case, thefirst driving unit 515 e, thesecond driving unit 525 e, and thefirst fixing unit 530 e are substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - The
apparatus 500 e includes aclamping unit 550 e that is spaced apart by a set or predetermined interval from at least one of thefirst jig 510 e or thesecond jig 520 e, and supports thepanel member 390 e. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that theclamping unit 550 e is disposed adjacent to thesecond jig 520 e. - The
clamping unit 550 e may support thepanel member 390 e when one end of thepanel member 390 e is inserted into theclamping unit 550 e. A plurality of the clampingunits 550 e may be provided, where a distance S7 between the clampingunits 550 e is less than a length or a width of thepanel member 390 e. Thepanel member 390 e may include at least one of thedisplay panel 330 e or theTSP 340 e as described above. For convenience of description, it will be assumed that the distance S7 between the plurality of clampingunits 550 e is less than a width of thepanel member 390 e and thepanel member 390 e includes thedisplay panel 330 e and theTSP 340 e. - In particular, the plurality of clamping
units 550 e face respective side surfaces of thesecond jig 520 e, and fix both ends of thedisplay panel 330 e, the secondadhesive layer 350 e, theTSP 340 e, and the firstadhesive layer 320 e. The plurality of clampingunits 550 include afirst clamping unit 551 e and asecond clamping unit 552 e that are spaced apart by a set or predetermined interval from each other. - Accordingly, the
apparatus 500 e may rapidly and easily manufacture thedisplay device 300 e having a curved surface and a simple structure. In addition, since theapparatus 500 e may accurately attach thecover window 310 e having a curved surface to thepanel member 390 e, a product defect rate may be reduced or minimized. - In particular, since the
apparatus 500 e includes theclamping unit 550 e to accurately align thepanel member 390 e and thecover window 310 e, working efficiency may be improved. - A method of manufacturing the
display device 300 e by using theapparatus 500 e will now be described. - The
cover window 310 e may be formed as described above, thedisplay panel 330 e may be formed, and then theTSP 340 e and thedisplay panel 330 e may be adhered by using the secondadhesive layer 350 e. Thecover window 310 e may be mounted on thefirst jig 510 e as described above. - When the process is completed, the first
adhesive layer 320 e may be formed on theTSP 340 e, which may then be fixed to thefirst clamping unit 551 e and thesecond clamping unit 552 e. A method of fixing theTSP 340 e may include inserting and fixing both ends of theTSP 340 e into insertion grooves formed in thefirst clamping unit 551 e and thesecond clamping unit 552 e as described above. - Once the
display panel 330 e, the secondadhesive layer 350 e, theTSP 340 e, and the firstadhesive layer 320 e are fixed in this manner, portions of thedisplay panel 330 e, the secondadhesive layer 350 e, theTSP 340 e, and the firstadhesive layer 320 e may protrude toward thefirst jig 510 e or thesecond jig 520 e. In further detail, since the distance S7 between thefirst clamping unit 551 e and thesecond clamping unit 552 e is less than a width or a length of at least one of thedisplay panel 330 e or theTSP 340 e, the portions may protrude toward thesecond jig 520 e or protrude toward thefirst jig 510 e. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that one portion of thepanel member 390 e protrudes toward thesecond jig 520 e. - When the
display panel 330 e, the secondadhesive layer 350 e, theTSP 340 e, and the firstadhesive layer 320 e are fixed, the firstadhesive layer 320 e and thecover window 310 e may be compressed against each other by moving at least one of thefirst jig 510 e or thesecond jig 520 e. For convenience of description, it will be assumed that the firstadhesive layer 320 e and thecover window 310 e are compressed by moving both thefirst jig 510 e and thesecond jig 520 e. - When the
first jig 510 e and thesecond jig 520 e move, thefirst driving unit 515 e and thesecond driving unit 525 e may operate to move thefirst jig 510 e and thesecond jig 520 e closer to each other. - A protruding portion of the
cover window 310 e first contacts the firstadhesive layer 320 e. When thefirst jig 510 e and thesecond jig 520 e continuously move, thecover window 310 e and the firstadhesive layer 320 e may be laminated beginning from a contact portion between thecover window 310 e and the firstadhesive layer 320 e toward both end portions. - In particular, when the
cover window 310 e and thepanel member 390 e contact each other, a load range applied when thefirst jig 510 e and thesecond jig 520 e compress thecover window 310 e and thepanel member 390 e may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between thecover window 310 e and thepanel member 390 e may be reduced, and thecover window 310 e and thepanel member 390 e may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and thecover window 310 e and thepanel member 390 e are attached to each other, thecover window 310 e and thepanel member 390 e may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability. - A
first cushion unit 593 e and asecond cushion unit 591 e may uniformly distribute a force applied to thepanel member 390 e and thecover window 310 e when thepanel member 390 e and thecover window 310 e are compressed and laminated. - Accordingly, the
apparatus 500 e may rapidly and accurately manufacture thedisplay device 300 e having a curved surface. In particular, theapparatus 500 e may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by accurately attaching thepanel member 390 e and thecover window 310 e having a curved surface. - In addition, the
apparatus 500 e may improve product quality by removing air bubbles that may be generated (or preventing air bubbles from being generated) when thepanel member 390 e and thecover window 310 e are compressed. -
FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view illustrating anapparatus 600 e for manufacturing thedisplay device 300 e ofFIG. 34 , according to yet another embodiment of the present invention. - Referring to
FIG. 37 , theapparatus 600 e includes afirst jig 610 e, asecond jig 620 e, a driving unit M, aclamping unit 650 e, a fixing unit (for example, first fixingunit 630 e), acushion unit 690 e, and a linear moving unit L. Thefirst jig 610 e, thesecond jig 620 e, the driving unit, theclamping unit 650 e, the fixing unit, and thecushion unit 690 e may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - The driving unit M may include a
first driving unit 615 e and asecond driving unit 625 e, and the fixing unit may include afirst fixing unit 630 e. Thefirst driving unit 615 e, thesecond driving unit 625 e, and thefirst fixing unit 630 e may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - The
clamping unit 650 e may include a first clamping unit 651 e and asecond clamping unit 652 e. The first clamping unit 651 e and thesecond clamping unit 652 e may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - The linear moving unit L may include a first
linear driving unit 660 e and a second linear drivingunit 670 e that respectively vertically move the first clamping unit 651 e and thesecond clamping unit 652 e. In this case, the firstlinear driving unit 660 e and the second linear drivingunit 670 e are formed similarly, and thus the following description will focus on the firstlinear driving unit 660 e. - The first
linear driving unit 660 e may include afirst shaft 661 e that is connected to the first clamping unit 651 e and linearly moves the first clamping unit 651 e. In addition, the firstlinear driving unit 660 e may include afirst driving module 665 e that drives thefirst shaft 661 e. Thefirst driving module 665 e may be formed to include a cylinder or a motor. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that thefirst driving module 665 e includes a motor. In addition, it will be assumed that thefirst shaft 661 e includes a ball screw that is raised and lowered as thefirst driving module 665 e rotates. - The first
linear driving unit 660 e may include a firstelastic unit 663 e that surrounds thefirst shaft 661 e. The firstelastic unit 663 e may include a compression spring, or may be formed of an elastic material such as rubber. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the firstelastic unit 663 e includes a compression spring. - The first
elastic unit 663 e may be disposed to surround an outer surface of thefirst shaft 661 e as described above, and thus may provide a restoring force to the first clamping unit 651 e when the first clamping unit 651 e moves. - A method of manufacturing the
display device 300 e by using theapparatus 600 e will now be described. First, thecover window 310 e and thepanel member 390 e may be manufactured and prepared. Thepanel member 390 e may include at least one of thedisplay panel 330 e or theTSP 340 e. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that thepanel member 390 e includes thedisplay panel 330 e and theTSP 340 e. - The
display panel 330 e and theTSP 340 e prepared as described above may be attached by using the secondadhesive layer 350 e, and then the firstadhesive layer 320 e may be formed on theTSP 340 e. In this case, both ends of thedisplay panel 330 e and theTSP 340 e on which the firstadhesive layer 320 e is formed may be fixed to the first clamping unit 651 e and thesecond clamping unit 652 e. - When the
panel member 390 e is fixed to the first clamping unit 651 e and thesecond clamping unit 652 e as described above, a portion of thepanel member 390 e may protrude toward thesecond jig 620 e or may protrude toward thefirst jig 610 e. In further detail, since a distance S8 between the first clamping unit 651 e and thesecond clamping unit 652 e is less than a width or a length of thepanel member 390 e, a portion of thepanel member 390 e may protrude toward thesecond jig 620 e or protrude toward thefirst jig 610 e. In this case, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the distance S8 between the first clamping unit 651 e and thesecond clamping unit 652 e is less than a width of thepanel member 390 e and a portion of thepanel member 390 e protrudes toward thesecond jig 620 e. - When the
panel member 390 e is disposed as described above, thepanel member 390 e and thecover window 310 e may be compressed against each other by moving at least one of thefirst jig 610 e or thesecond jig 620 e. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that thepanel member 390 e and thecover window 310 e are compressed against each other by moving both thefirst jig 610 e and thesecond jig 620 e. - When the
first jig 610 e and thesecond jig 620 e move as described above, the firstlinear driving unit 660 e and the second linear drivingunit 670 e may operate to vertically move the first clamping unit 651 e and thesecond clamping unit 652 e. In particular, the first clamping unit 651 e and thesecond clamping unit 652 e may move at a speed similar to a speed at which thesecond jig 620 e moves. - When the first clamping unit 651 e and the
second clamping unit 652 e are raised as described above, thepanel member 390 e may be raised while maintaining its curved state. When a distance between thefirst jig 610 e and thesecond jig 620 e reaches a set or predetermined distance, the first clamping unit 651 e and thesecond clamping unit 652 e may release thepanel member 390 e. - In particular, after the first clamping unit 651 e and the
second clamping unit 652 e operate as described above, the firstlinear driving unit 660 e and the second linear drivingunit 670 e may operate to lower the first clamping unit 651 e and thesecond clamping unit 652 e. - After that, the
first driving unit 615 e and thesecond driving unit 625 e may continuously operate to make thefirst jig 610 e and thesecond jig 620 e get closer to each other. In particular, as thefirst jig 610 e and thesecond jig 620 e get closer to each other, thepanel member 390 e and thecover window 310 e may be compressed. In this case, a method of compressing thepanel member 390 e and thecover window 310 e is performed in the same manner as that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - In particular, when the
cover window 310 e and thepanel member 390 e contact each other, a load range applied when thefirst jig 610 e and thesecond jig 620 e compress thecover window 310 e and thepanel member 390 e may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between thecover window 310 e and thepanel member 390 e may be reduced, and thecover window 310 e and thepanel member 390 e may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and thecover window 310 e and thepanel member 390 e are attached to each other, thecover window 310 e and thepanel member 390 e may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability. - A
first cushion unit 693 e and asecond cushion unit 691 e may uniformly distribute a force applied to thecover window 310 e and thepanel member 390 e when thecover window 310 e and thepanel member 390 e are compressed and laminated. - Accordingly, the
apparatus 600 e may rapidly and accurately manufacture thedisplay device 300 e having a curved surface. In particular, theapparatus 600 e may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by accurately attaching thepanel member 390 e and thecover window 310 e having a curved surface. - In addition, the
apparatus 600 e may improve product quality by removing air bubbles that may be generated (or preventing air bubbles from being generated) when thepanel member 390 e and thecover window 310 e are compressed. -
FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view illustrating anapparatus 700 e for manufacturing thedisplay device 300 e ofFIG. 34 , according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention. - Referring to
FIG. 38 , theapparatus 700 e may include afirst jig 710 e, asecond jig 720 e, a driving unit M, aclamping unit 750 e, a fixing unit (for example, first fixingunit 730 e), a linear driving unit L, and acushion unit 790 e (including afirst cushion unit 793 e and asecond cushion unit 791 e). Thefirst jig 710 e and thesecond jig 720 e may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - The driving unit M may include a
first driving unit 715 e and asecond driving unit 725 e, and the fixing unit may include afirst fixing unit 730 e. Thefirst driving unit 715 e, thesecond driving unit 725 e, and thefirst fixing unit 730 e may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - In addition, the
clamping unit 750 e may include afirst clamping unit 751 e and a second clamping unit 752 e. Thefirst clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - The linear driving unit L may include a first
linear driving unit 760 e and a second linear drivingunit 770 e, and the firstlinear driving unit 760 e and the second linear drivingunit 770 e may linearly move thefirst clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e, respectively. In particular, the firstlinear driving unit 760 e and the second linear drivingunit 770 e may linearly move thefirst clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e in a diagonal direction. Since the second linear drivingunit 770 e may be formed similarly to the firstlinear driving unit 760 e, the following description will focus on the firstlinear driving unit 760 e. - In further detail, the first
linear driving unit 760 e may include afirst shaft 761 e, afirst driving module 765 e, and a firstelastic unit 763 e. Thefirst shaft 761 e, thefirst driving module 765 e, and the firstelastic unit 763 e may be formed in a similar manner to those described above except that thefirst shaft 761 e is disposed in a diagonal direction to diagonally move thefirst clamping unit 751 e. - In particular, when the first
linear driving unit 760 e operates, thefirst driving module 765 e may vary a length of thefirst shaft 761 e. Since thefirst driving module 765 e and thefirst shaft 761 e are diagonally disposed with respect to thesecond jig 720 e as described above, thefirst clamping unit 751 e may be diagonally moved by varying the movement of thefirst shaft 761 e. - For example, when the
first driving module 765 e operates to diagonally move thefirst shaft 761 e downward with respect to thesecond jig 720 e, thefirst clamping unit 751 e may diagonally move downward with respect to thesecond jig 720 e as thefirst shaft 761 e moves. - When the
first driving module 765 e operates in an opposite direction to diagonally move thefirst shaft 761 e upward with respect to thesecond jig 720 e, thefirst clamping unit 751 e may diagonally move upward with respect to thesecond jig 720 e as thefirst shaft 761 e moves. - The
first shaft 761 e may include a ball screw as described above and thus may rotate as thefirst driving module 765 e operates. In particular, thefirst shaft 761 e may diagonally move downward or upward with respect to thesecond jig 720 e as thefirst driving module 765 e rotates. - A method of manufacturing the
display device 300 e may be similar to that described above. In further detail, thepanel member 390 e and thecover window 310 e may be manufactured and prepared. Thepanel member 390 e may include thedisplay panel 330 e and theTSP 340 e as described above. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that thepanel member 390 e includes both thedisplay panel 330 e and theTSP 340 e. - When the
display panel 330 e and theTSP 340 e are completely manufactured as described above, thedisplay panel 330 e and theTSP 340 e may be adhered by using the secondadhesive layer 350 e, and the firstadhesive layer 320 e may be coated on theTSP 340 e. - The
panel member 390 e manufactured as described above may be fixed by thefirst clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e. When the fixing is completed, thepanel member 390 e and thecover window 310 e may be compressed against each other by moving at least one of thefirst jig 710 e or thesecond jig 720 e. A method of compressing thepanel member 390 e and thecover window 310 e may be similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. - When the
first jig 710 e and thesecond jig 720 e move in this manner, thefirst clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e may also move. In particular, thefirst clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e may be diagonally moved by the firstlinear driving unit 760 e and the second linear drivingunit 770 e, respectively. Thefirst clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e may be raised diagonally. - When the
first clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e are raised and then an interval between thefirst jig 710 e and thesecond jig 720 e reaches a preset interval, both ends of thepanel member 390 e may be released. - After the releasing of the
first clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e as described above, the firstlinear driving unit 760 e and the second linear drivingunit 770 e may operate to lower thefirst clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e. Thefirst clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e may be lowered diagonally. - While the
first clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e are lowered, thefirst jig 710 e and thesecond jig 720 e may get closer to each other to compress thepanel member 390 e and thecover window 310 e. In this case, a method of adhering thepanel member 390 e and thecover window 310 e through compression may be similar to that described above. - When the
panel member 390 e and thecover window 310 e are compressed by moving thefirst jig 710 e and thesecond jig 720 e as described above, thefirst cushion unit 793 e and thesecond cushion unit 791 e may distribute a force applied to thepanel member 390 e and thecover window 310 e. In addition, thefirst cushion unit 793 e and thesecond cushion unit 791 e may help prevent thepanel member 390 e or thecover window 310 e from being damaged by absorbing part of a force applied to thepanel member 390 e and thecover window 310 e. - In particular, when the
cover window 310 e and thepanel member 390 e contact each other, a load range applied when thefirst jig 710 e and thesecond jig 720 e compress thecover window 310 e and thepanel member 390 e may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between thecover window 310 e and thepanel member 390 e may be reduced, and thecover window 310 e and thepanel member 390 e may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and thecover window 310 e and thepanel member 390 e are attached to each other, thecover window 310 e and thepanel member 390 e may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability. - Accordingly, the
apparatus 700 e may rapidly and accurately manufacture thedisplay device 300 e having a curved surface. In particular, theapparatus 700 e may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by accurately attaching thepanel member 390 e and thecover window 310 e having a curved surface. - In addition, the
apparatus 700 e may improve quality by removing air bubbles or preventing air bubbles from being generated when thedisplay panel 330 e and thepanel member 390 e are compressed. This application relates in general to a display device and more particularly, to a display device and a corresponding method and apparatus for manufacturing the display device that may rapidly, accurately, and cleanly manufacture the display device having a curved shape. Small electronic devices having curved display devices have presented challenges in accurately forming and aligning their corresponding cover windows (for example, transparent protective covers) and display panels (such as OLED display panels or flexible OLED display panels), and adhering the cover windows to the display panels via transparent adhesive without quality defects such as air bubbles between the cover windows and the display panels. - Embodiments of the present invention address these problems by providing a display device having a curved cover window, a display panel and/or touch screen panel (TSP) that fits in the cover window, and an adhesive layer between the display device and the cover window, together with an apparatus and method for manufacturing the display device. The cover window is fabricated with a curved shape (such as rounded edges, inward or outward) and mounted on a first jig having a mount surface that conforms to the cover window. For example, the cover window may sit in the first jig (through gravity) or attach to the first jig via a fixing unit, such as a vacuum suction device. Meanwhile, the display panel (to which the adhesive layer is attached), is attached to a second jig by similar means. The distance between the jigs is then closed (by moving one or both jigs towards the other using, for example, driving units), allowing the display panel to press up to the cover window and adhere via the adhesive layer, and without forming air bubbles between the cover window and the display panel.
- In another embodiment, the display panel may be attached to a clamp unit, such as a pair of clamps, and bent through a clamping force to mate cleanly with the cover window when the jigs are moved towards each other. The clamps may be moved via dedicated driving units (for example, which drive ball screws through rotational movement to move the clamps) independently of the jigs, and may move, for example vertically or diagonally with respect to the jigs (and with respect to a gravity direction).
- While the present invention has been particularly shown and described with reference to exemplary embodiments thereof, it will be understood by those of ordinary skill in the art that various changes in form and details may be made therein without departing from the spirit and scope of the present invention as defined by the following claims, and equivalents thereof.
Claims (21)
1. A display device comprising:
a cover window comprising a curved portion; and
a panel member on the cover window,
wherein an end of the panel member is on a surface of the curved portion of the cover window, and covers a portion and exposes another portion of the surface of the curved portion of the cover window.
2. The display device of claim 1 , wherein the panel member is smaller in at least one of a length or a width than the cover window.
3. The display device of claim 1 , further comprising an adhesive layer between the panel member and the cover window.
4. The display device of claim 1 , wherein the cover window further comprises a flat portion extending from the curved portion.
5. The display device of claim 4 , wherein the panel member is entirely on the flat portion.
6. The display device of claim 4 , wherein the curved portion comprises a plurality of curved portions.
7. The display device of claim 4 , wherein the panel member comprises:
a first panel portion on the flat portion; and
a second panel portion extending in a curved shape from the first panel portion and being on the curved portion.
8. The display device of claim 1 , wherein the cover window has a curved surface having a curvature radius.
9. The display device of claim 8 , wherein a curvature radius of a portion of the cover window is different from a curvature radius of another portion of the cover window.
10. The display device of claim 1 , wherein the panel member is on a recessed outer surface of the cover window or a protruding outer surface of the cover window.
11. The display device of claim 1 , wherein the panel member comprises at least one of a display panel or a touch screen panel (TSP).
12. The display device of claim 1 , wherein the panel member is flexible.
13. A display device comprising:
a cover window comprising a central portion that is flat, one end that is connected to the central portion and has a first curved surface, and an other end that is connected to the central portion and has a second curved surface; and
a panel member that is on one surface of the cover window to be bent,
wherein an end of the panel member is on one of the first and second curved surfaces of the cover window, and covers a portion and exposes another portion of the one of the first and second curved surfaces of the cover window.
14. The display device of claim 13 , wherein the panel member is attached to an outer surface of the cover window that is recessed or to an outer surface of the cover window that protrudes.
15. The display device of claim 13 , wherein a size of the panel member is different from a size of the cover window.
16. The display device of claim 15 , wherein the size of the panel member is less than the size of the cover window.
17. The display device of claim 15 , wherein both ends of the panel member are on at least one selected from the first curved surface and the second curved surface of the cover window.
18. The display device of claim 13 , wherein the panel member comprises:
a first adhesive layer that is on the cover window;
a touch panel that is on the first adhesive layer;
a second adhesive layer that is on the touch panel; and
a display panel that is on the second adhesive layer.
19. The display device of claim 13 , wherein the panel member is flexible.
20. The display device of claim 13 , wherein at least one selected from the first curved surface and the second curved surface is a curved surface having at least one radius of curvature.
21. The display device of claim 13 , wherein the first curved surface is a curved surface having a first radius of curvature and the second curved surface is a curved surface having a second radius of curvature that is different from the first radius of curvature.
Priority Applications (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US18/297,582 US20230247776A1 (en) | 2012-06-29 | 2023-04-07 | Display device, and method and apparatus for manufacturing the same |
Applications Claiming Priority (9)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
KR20120071375 | 2012-06-29 | ||
KR10-2012-0071375 | 2012-06-29 | ||
KR10-2013-0014650 | 2013-02-08 | ||
KR1020130014650A KR20140002470A (en) | 2012-06-29 | 2013-02-08 | Display device, manufacturing method of the same and manufacturing device of the same |
KR10-2013-0062110 | 2013-05-30 | ||
KR1020130062110A KR102147842B1 (en) | 2012-06-29 | 2013-05-30 | Manufacturing device of a display device |
US13/931,795 US11523522B2 (en) | 2012-06-29 | 2013-06-28 | Display device, and method and apparatus for manufacturing the same |
US14/794,720 US11627670B2 (en) | 2012-06-29 | 2015-07-08 | Display device, and method and apparatus for manufacturing the same |
US18/297,582 US20230247776A1 (en) | 2012-06-29 | 2023-04-07 | Display device, and method and apparatus for manufacturing the same |
Related Parent Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US14/794,720 Continuation US11627670B2 (en) | 2012-06-29 | 2015-07-08 | Display device, and method and apparatus for manufacturing the same |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20230247776A1 true US20230247776A1 (en) | 2023-08-03 |
Family
ID=48771287
Family Applications (6)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US13/931,795 Active 2033-07-01 US11523522B2 (en) | 2012-06-29 | 2013-06-28 | Display device, and method and apparatus for manufacturing the same |
US14/794,720 Active 2036-03-18 US11627670B2 (en) | 2012-06-29 | 2015-07-08 | Display device, and method and apparatus for manufacturing the same |
US14/803,025 Active 2034-07-18 US10194538B2 (en) | 2012-06-29 | 2015-07-17 | Method and apparatus for manufacturing a display device |
US18/062,014 Pending US20230095460A1 (en) | 2012-06-29 | 2022-12-05 | Display device, and method and apparatus for manufacturing the same |
US18/297,582 Pending US20230247776A1 (en) | 2012-06-29 | 2023-04-07 | Display device, and method and apparatus for manufacturing the same |
US18/297,586 Pending US20230247777A1 (en) | 2012-06-29 | 2023-04-07 | Display device, and method and apparatus for manufacturing the same |
Family Applications Before (4)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US13/931,795 Active 2033-07-01 US11523522B2 (en) | 2012-06-29 | 2013-06-28 | Display device, and method and apparatus for manufacturing the same |
US14/794,720 Active 2036-03-18 US11627670B2 (en) | 2012-06-29 | 2015-07-08 | Display device, and method and apparatus for manufacturing the same |
US14/803,025 Active 2034-07-18 US10194538B2 (en) | 2012-06-29 | 2015-07-17 | Method and apparatus for manufacturing a display device |
US18/062,014 Pending US20230095460A1 (en) | 2012-06-29 | 2022-12-05 | Display device, and method and apparatus for manufacturing the same |
Family Applications After (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US18/297,586 Pending US20230247777A1 (en) | 2012-06-29 | 2023-04-07 | Display device, and method and apparatus for manufacturing the same |
Country Status (5)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (6) | US11523522B2 (en) |
EP (3) | EP3050704B1 (en) |
KR (3) | KR20140002470A (en) |
CN (6) | CN106626719B (en) |
TW (4) | TWI596761B (en) |
Families Citing this family (134)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
KR20140002470A (en) | 2012-06-29 | 2014-01-08 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Display device, manufacturing method of the same and manufacturing device of the same |
US9439315B2 (en) | 2012-06-29 | 2016-09-06 | Samsung Display Co., Ltd. | Display device, and method and apparatus for manufacturing the same |
KR102012044B1 (en) * | 2012-09-03 | 2019-08-20 | 리쿠아비스타 비.브이. | Apparatus of joining substrates for electrowetting display panel and method of joining substrates for electrowetting display using the same |
KR101701247B1 (en) | 2013-05-27 | 2017-02-02 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Laminating device and Laminating method using the same |
KR101861629B1 (en) * | 2013-05-27 | 2018-05-29 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Device for bonding window and method for manufacturing display device using the same |
KR102131962B1 (en) * | 2013-06-25 | 2020-07-09 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Manufacturing device for a cover window and manufacturing method for the cover window |
US9496522B2 (en) * | 2013-12-13 | 2016-11-15 | Universal Display Corporation | OLED optically coupled to curved substrate |
JP6607666B2 (en) * | 2013-10-10 | 2019-11-20 | 三星ディスプレイ株式會社 | Window member of curved surface display device, method of manufacturing window member of curved surface display device, and curved surface display device including the same |
KR102118578B1 (en) * | 2013-10-17 | 2020-06-04 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Organic light emitting diode display |
CN103793100A (en) * | 2014-01-25 | 2014-05-14 | 江西合力泰科技股份有限公司 | Intramode injection molding 2.5D/ 3D touch display integration device |
US9363342B2 (en) * | 2014-03-05 | 2016-06-07 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Mobile terminal and arrangement to generate a bending force on a display |
KR102187473B1 (en) | 2014-03-17 | 2020-12-08 | 엘지이노텍 주식회사 | Touch device |
KR102175509B1 (en) * | 2014-03-28 | 2020-11-09 | 주식회사 나래나노텍 | Apparatus and Method of Bonding Flexible Display and Curved Cover Element |
KR101471819B1 (en) * | 2014-04-18 | 2014-12-12 | 주식회사 트레이스 | A device for laminating on a curved cover glass using a rotational suction plate |
KR101486861B1 (en) * | 2014-04-18 | 2015-01-30 | 주식회사 트레이스 | A device for laminating on a curved cover glass using rollers |
KR101470935B1 (en) * | 2014-04-22 | 2014-12-10 | 주식회사 트레이스 | A device for laminating on a curved cover glass using a suction belt |
US10011090B1 (en) * | 2014-06-27 | 2018-07-03 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Planar pressing for manufacture of displays |
KR102155252B1 (en) * | 2014-07-01 | 2020-09-11 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Organic light emitting display device and method of manufacturing the same |
KR101677014B1 (en) * | 2014-08-14 | 2016-11-17 | 안성룡 | The method for manufacturing a flexible display device |
KR101668081B1 (en) * | 2014-08-14 | 2016-10-19 | 안성룡 | The apparatus for attaching a flexible sheet to the curved window glass |
KR101746650B1 (en) | 2014-09-02 | 2017-06-14 | 주식회사 토비스 | a apparatus of curved display manufacturing, and a method of curved display manufacturing |
KR102241849B1 (en) * | 2014-09-24 | 2021-04-20 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Apparatus for manufacturing display apparatus and method of manufacturing display apparatus |
KR101676474B1 (en) * | 2014-10-14 | 2016-11-14 | 안성룡 | The apparatus for attaching a flexible sheet to a curved sustrate |
KR101697488B1 (en) * | 2014-10-14 | 2017-02-01 | 안성룡 | The apparatus for attaching a flexible sheet to a curved sustrate |
KR101644903B1 (en) | 2014-10-30 | 2016-08-03 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Liquid crystal display and method of manufacturing the same |
KR102250710B1 (en) * | 2014-10-31 | 2021-05-10 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Organic light emitting display device and method of manufacturing the same |
MY178518A (en) * | 2014-11-14 | 2020-10-15 | Bosch Gmbh Robert | Method and apparatus for optical bonding, and a display |
KR102333633B1 (en) * | 2014-11-14 | 2021-12-01 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Apparatus for display device and method for display device using the same |
KR20160070876A (en) | 2014-12-10 | 2016-06-21 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Manufacturing device of a display device and manufacturing method of the display device using the same |
KR102261876B1 (en) * | 2015-01-06 | 2021-06-07 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Display device and driving method thereof |
CN104570448A (en) * | 2015-01-27 | 2015-04-29 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Display panel and display device |
KR102348799B1 (en) * | 2015-01-14 | 2022-01-07 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Apparatus for manufacturing flexible display device |
KR20160090452A (en) | 2015-01-21 | 2016-08-01 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Curved display device |
KR102345440B1 (en) * | 2015-02-13 | 2021-12-30 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | display panel manufacturing apparatus |
KR102274142B1 (en) | 2015-03-10 | 2021-07-09 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Display apparatus and portable terminal |
KR102374644B1 (en) * | 2015-03-24 | 2022-03-15 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Display device |
KR102403224B1 (en) * | 2015-04-03 | 2022-05-30 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Window and display device comprising the same |
KR101578442B1 (en) * | 2015-04-22 | 2015-12-21 | (주)제이스텍 | Attaching apparatus of edge window and pannel using diaphragm |
KR101788198B1 (en) * | 2015-04-28 | 2017-10-20 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Lamination apparatus and lamination method using the same |
KR102348266B1 (en) * | 2015-05-21 | 2022-01-10 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Electronic device, fabrication method and device for exterior member of the same |
KR102367467B1 (en) * | 2015-06-16 | 2022-02-25 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Manufacturing device for display device |
KR101588600B1 (en) * | 2015-07-23 | 2016-02-01 | 주식회사 톱텍 | bonding device for window, bonding method using it |
KR102569315B1 (en) * | 2015-07-27 | 2023-08-23 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Display device |
KR102368462B1 (en) * | 2015-08-07 | 2022-03-02 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Fabrication method of glass, fabrication method of display device |
KR102343289B1 (en) * | 2015-08-19 | 2021-12-28 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Lamination device |
CN105118391B (en) * | 2015-10-12 | 2017-10-17 | 武汉华星光电技术有限公司 | Assembly method and device for display panel and cover plate |
KR102494018B1 (en) * | 2015-10-13 | 2023-02-01 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Laminating device and laminating method using the same |
CN105242430B (en) * | 2015-10-19 | 2018-11-23 | 武汉华星光电技术有限公司 | Curved surface is to the full laminating apparatus of plane and method |
KR102556026B1 (en) | 2015-10-26 | 2023-07-17 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | A apparatus and method for manufacturing a display apparatus |
KR102396460B1 (en) | 2015-10-29 | 2022-05-11 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Curved display device and electronic device comprising the same |
KR102167504B1 (en) * | 2015-11-05 | 2020-10-20 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Manufacturing device for display device |
KR102512728B1 (en) | 2016-02-05 | 2023-03-24 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Apparatus and method for manufacturing a display apparatus |
JP6556269B2 (en) * | 2016-02-08 | 2019-08-07 | 堺ディスプレイプロダクト株式会社 | Inspection equipment |
KR102551139B1 (en) | 2016-03-10 | 2023-07-04 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Apparatus for manufacturing display device and manufacturing method thereof |
KR102537377B1 (en) * | 2016-03-10 | 2023-05-26 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Apparatus for manufacturing display device and manufacturing method thereof |
KR101712595B1 (en) * | 2016-04-21 | 2017-03-06 | 공정민 | Laminating apparatus and laminating method |
US10919211B2 (en) * | 2016-07-22 | 2021-02-16 | Samsung Display Co., Ltd. | Method of manufacturing display device |
KR102183540B1 (en) * | 2016-08-30 | 2020-11-27 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Laminate apparatus and method for manufacturing display device |
CN106328575B (en) * | 2016-08-31 | 2019-07-12 | 昆山工研院新型平板显示技术中心有限公司 | A kind of stripping means and device of flexible display panels |
KR102535154B1 (en) * | 2016-09-05 | 2023-05-22 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Bending apparatus and method for manufacturing display device |
KR102638297B1 (en) * | 2016-09-23 | 2024-02-20 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Manufacturing method and apparatus for a display device |
KR102695748B1 (en) * | 2016-09-26 | 2024-08-16 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Laminating apparatus and laminating method using the same |
KR101881296B1 (en) * | 2016-11-08 | 2018-07-25 | 희성전자 주식회사 | Apparatus and method for laminating a window |
KR102152734B1 (en) * | 2016-11-17 | 2020-09-08 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Laminate apparatus and method for manufacturing display device |
CN107037923B (en) * | 2017-03-02 | 2020-08-07 | 业成科技(成都)有限公司 | Bonding structure of touch panel with dual-axis curved surface |
CN206523497U (en) * | 2017-03-14 | 2017-09-26 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Tool |
CN107039604B (en) * | 2017-04-18 | 2018-09-04 | 武汉华星光电技术有限公司 | Flexible display panels adhering device and its attaching method |
CN107195792B (en) * | 2017-05-08 | 2018-11-27 | 武汉华星光电技术有限公司 | The manufacturing device and method of curved face display panel |
KR101911049B1 (en) * | 2017-06-26 | 2018-10-24 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Apparatus for manufacturing display device |
JP6941986B2 (en) * | 2017-06-28 | 2021-09-29 | 芝浦メカトロニクス株式会社 | Holding device, positioning device and bonding device |
KR102499852B1 (en) * | 2017-09-07 | 2023-02-14 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Display device |
US11065960B2 (en) * | 2017-09-13 | 2021-07-20 | Corning Incorporated | Curved vehicle displays |
GB2567679B (en) * | 2017-10-20 | 2022-12-14 | Flexenable Ltd | Curved devices |
KR102309847B1 (en) | 2017-10-31 | 2021-10-08 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Curved Display Device and Electronic Device |
CN107731102A (en) * | 2017-10-31 | 2018-02-23 | 云谷(固安)科技有限公司 | The method for assembling and camber display screen of a kind of camber display screen |
CN109754713A (en) * | 2017-11-03 | 2019-05-14 | 阳程科技股份有限公司 | Application of a surface device and its applying method |
KR102246643B1 (en) * | 2017-11-17 | 2021-04-30 | 주식회사 제우스 | Manufacturing method of cover glass part and manufacturing apparatus of cover glass part |
CN107863005A (en) * | 2017-11-27 | 2018-03-30 | 武汉华星光电半导体显示技术有限公司 | Bend tool |
US10998296B2 (en) | 2017-12-07 | 2021-05-04 | Zkw Group Gmbh | In-vehicle display device using semiconductor light-emitting device |
CN111527422B (en) * | 2017-12-07 | 2022-03-29 | Zkw集团有限责任公司 | In-vehicle display apparatus using semiconductor light emitting device |
US10937769B2 (en) | 2017-12-07 | 2021-03-02 | Zkw Group Gmbh | In-vehicle display device using semiconductor light-emitting device |
KR102471022B1 (en) * | 2018-01-25 | 2022-11-25 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Pad and bonding method for bonding a film using the same |
KR102587583B1 (en) * | 2018-03-29 | 2023-10-11 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Jig assembly and method for manufacturing display device using the same |
CN108773142B (en) * | 2018-06-08 | 2021-01-15 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Foldable display panel, and laminating method and laminating device thereof |
KR20200010928A (en) | 2018-07-23 | 2020-01-31 | 에이피에스홀딩스 주식회사 | Apparatus for laminating pannel to window and method for laminating pannel to window |
CN108973303A (en) * | 2018-07-26 | 2018-12-11 | 信利光电股份有限公司 | A kind of application of a surface fixture and applying method |
CN108847139A (en) * | 2018-08-24 | 2018-11-20 | 武汉华星光电技术有限公司 | A kind of adhering device and attaching method being bent display panel |
KR102266890B1 (en) * | 2018-08-29 | 2021-06-21 | 에이피시스템 주식회사 | Electrostatic chuck, equipment for attaching having the same and method for attaching |
CN109148728B (en) * | 2018-08-31 | 2019-10-29 | 昆山国显光电有限公司 | A kind of display panel and display device |
KR20200042579A (en) * | 2018-10-15 | 2020-04-24 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Display device |
KR102582395B1 (en) | 2018-11-12 | 2023-09-26 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Zig for cover window |
KR102676697B1 (en) * | 2018-12-06 | 2024-06-19 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Lamination device |
KR20200078243A (en) | 2018-12-21 | 2020-07-01 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Flexible display device and apparatus for manufacturing the same, and structure |
CN109968786B (en) * | 2019-03-28 | 2021-03-23 | 潍坊路加精工有限公司 | Automatic paying type film sticking device |
KR20200120784A (en) | 2019-04-11 | 2020-10-22 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Display device and manufacturing method for the display device |
CN110010013B (en) * | 2019-04-18 | 2021-01-26 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Flexible display module and preparation method thereof |
CN110197618B (en) * | 2019-06-28 | 2020-08-25 | 云谷(固安)科技有限公司 | Laminating method of curved-surface display panel |
KR102250824B1 (en) * | 2019-07-23 | 2021-05-11 | (주)에스티아이 | Laminating apparatus laminating method using the same |
CN112289175B (en) * | 2019-07-24 | 2022-09-02 | 北京小米移动软件有限公司 | Display panel manufacturing method, display panel and terminal |
KR102236234B1 (en) * | 2019-07-26 | 2021-04-05 | (주)에스티아이 | Window holding module and laminating apparatus including the same |
CN110289374B (en) * | 2019-07-31 | 2021-05-14 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Laminating tool and laminating method for flexible display panel |
CN110633022B (en) * | 2019-09-18 | 2022-07-01 | 业成科技(成都)有限公司 | Touch module and manufacturing method and application thereof |
CN110728909A (en) * | 2019-09-29 | 2020-01-24 | 联想(北京)有限公司 | Electronic equipment and method for attaching screen |
KR102357457B1 (en) * | 2019-10-15 | 2022-02-04 | (주)에스티아이 | Substrate and substrate transper apparatus for transperring the same and substrate transper method using the same |
CN110827682B (en) * | 2019-10-21 | 2021-03-23 | 武汉华星光电半导体显示技术有限公司 | Bonding apparatus and bonding method |
JP7417246B2 (en) * | 2019-10-31 | 2024-01-18 | 株式会社タカトリ | Pasting device and method |
KR102295056B1 (en) | 2019-11-04 | 2021-08-27 | (주)에스티아이 | Display lamination system and display lamination method using the same |
KR20210063907A (en) | 2019-11-25 | 2021-06-02 | 에이피시스템 주식회사 | Laminating apparatus and laminating method using the same |
KR102252805B1 (en) * | 2019-11-28 | 2021-05-14 | (주)에스티아이 | Display lamination system and display lamination method using the same |
KR102382179B1 (en) * | 2019-11-28 | 2022-04-04 | (주)에스티아이 | Laminating apparatus |
CN110930887A (en) * | 2019-12-25 | 2020-03-27 | 联想(北京)有限公司 | Preparation method and system and folding display screen |
KR20210084879A (en) * | 2019-12-30 | 2021-07-08 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Display apparatus |
CN111105715B (en) | 2020-01-03 | 2022-04-12 | 武汉华星光电半导体显示技术有限公司 | Foldable display device and preparation method and jig thereof |
CN212097892U (en) * | 2020-01-20 | 2020-12-08 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Flexible display panel laminating device |
CN114026529B (en) * | 2020-03-20 | 2024-04-09 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Preparation method of mold and display device |
CN111399687A (en) * | 2020-03-30 | 2020-07-10 | 深圳市华星光电半导体显示技术有限公司 | Cover plate attaching system, cover plate attaching method and touch display panel |
KR102346436B1 (en) | 2020-03-31 | 2022-01-05 | 에이피시스템 주식회사 | Apparatus for laminating pannel to window and method for laminating pannel to window |
KR20210130328A (en) * | 2020-04-21 | 2021-11-01 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Bonding device and manufacturing method of display device using same |
CN111540269B (en) * | 2020-04-27 | 2022-04-19 | 深圳市联得自动化装备股份有限公司 | Laminating jig, laminating equipment and laminating method |
CN111415592B (en) * | 2020-04-29 | 2022-04-15 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Method for attaching flexible display panel and cover glass and display device |
KR102698113B1 (en) * | 2020-06-03 | 2024-08-26 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Support, bonding device including support, and method of manufacturing display device using the same |
CN111681539B (en) * | 2020-06-24 | 2022-03-29 | Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 | Display module, manufacturing method thereof and electronic equipment |
CN112172223A (en) * | 2020-09-23 | 2021-01-05 | 广州国显科技有限公司 | Laminating jig and curved surface laminating method |
KR20220041582A (en) | 2020-09-25 | 2022-04-01 | 에이피시스템 주식회사 | Apparatus for laminating and method for laminating |
KR20220043624A (en) | 2020-09-29 | 2022-04-05 | 에이피시스템 주식회사 | Supporting apparatus and laminating apparatus |
CN112164314B (en) * | 2020-09-30 | 2022-09-23 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Preparation method of display device and display device |
KR20220050299A (en) * | 2020-10-15 | 2022-04-25 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Guide film and method for manufacturing a display device |
CN112770557B (en) * | 2020-11-25 | 2022-05-20 | 中驰三龙电力股份有限公司 | Dustproof heat dissipation type power box |
CN112903253B (en) * | 2021-01-21 | 2024-01-30 | 昆山国显光电有限公司 | Testing jig and testing method for flexible display panel |
CN112863357B (en) * | 2021-01-25 | 2023-01-31 | 合肥维信诺科技有限公司 | Laminating device |
KR20220114848A (en) | 2021-02-09 | 2022-08-17 | 에이피시스템 주식회사 | Apparatus for peeling adhesive film, system for laminating pannel to window having the same and method for peeling adhesive film |
KR20220141534A (en) | 2021-04-13 | 2022-10-20 | 에이피시스템 주식회사 | Apparatus for laminating panel to window |
CN114005370B (en) * | 2021-11-19 | 2024-02-20 | 云谷(固安)科技有限公司 | Bonding device and bonding method |
CN115157140B (en) * | 2022-07-05 | 2023-12-05 | 业成科技(成都)有限公司 | Attaching jig |
Family Cites Families (82)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US472008A (en) * | 1892-03-29 | Wesley young | ||
US5131968A (en) * | 1990-07-31 | 1992-07-21 | Motorola, Inc. | Gradient chuck method for wafer bonding employing a convex pressure |
JPH07114347A (en) | 1993-10-14 | 1995-05-02 | Alps Electric Co Ltd | Display device and its production |
TW432246B (en) * | 1996-06-11 | 2001-05-01 | Seiko Epson Corp | Method and apparatus for manufacturing liquid crystal display |
JP4304852B2 (en) * | 2000-09-04 | 2009-07-29 | コニカミノルタホールディングス株式会社 | Non-flat liquid crystal display element and method for manufacturing the same |
KR100474750B1 (en) | 2000-10-13 | 2005-03-10 | 가부시키가이샤 덴소 | Touch panel, display device, and method of manufacturing touch panel |
TW558743B (en) | 2001-08-22 | 2003-10-21 | Semiconductor Energy Lab | Peeling method and method of manufacturing semiconductor device |
US6953735B2 (en) | 2001-12-28 | 2005-10-11 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Method for fabricating a semiconductor device by transferring a layer to a support with curvature |
JP4567941B2 (en) | 2001-12-28 | 2010-10-27 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Method for manufacturing semiconductor device and method for manufacturing display device |
KR100860522B1 (en) | 2002-03-23 | 2008-09-26 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Conveying apparatus of liquid crystal display panel |
US7190335B2 (en) * | 2002-03-26 | 2007-03-13 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Light emitting device and method of manufacturing the same |
JP3884351B2 (en) | 2002-08-26 | 2007-02-21 | 株式会社 日立ディスプレイズ | Image display device and manufacturing method thereof |
US20040135160A1 (en) | 2003-01-10 | 2004-07-15 | Eastman Kodak Company | OLED device |
JP2005161528A (en) | 2003-11-28 | 2005-06-23 | Ricoh Co Ltd | Plastic laminate and its manufacturing method |
US7278760B2 (en) * | 2004-05-24 | 2007-10-09 | Osram Opto Semiconductor Gmbh | Light-emitting electronic component |
KR100596340B1 (en) * | 2004-06-01 | 2006-07-06 | 주식회사 에이디피엔지니어링 | Flat back light and Method for manufacturing flat back light |
TWI261287B (en) | 2004-06-01 | 2006-09-01 | Advanced Display Proc Eng Co | Flat fluorescent lamp and method of manufacturing the same |
JP3815687B1 (en) | 2005-03-09 | 2006-08-30 | 株式会社 シーズ | Clamp unit for substrate transfer |
US7368307B2 (en) * | 2005-06-07 | 2008-05-06 | Eastman Kodak Company | Method of manufacturing an OLED device with a curved light emitting surface |
KR20060129848A (en) | 2005-06-13 | 2006-12-18 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Wireless mobile terminal and its cover member and method for manufacturing the cover member |
JP5217170B2 (en) * | 2006-02-14 | 2013-06-19 | Dic株式会社 | Light-shielding adhesive tape and LCD module using the same |
KR100784012B1 (en) | 2006-02-20 | 2007-12-07 | 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 | Organic Light Emitting Display and Fabrication Method for the same |
JP4837471B2 (en) | 2006-02-20 | 2011-12-14 | 三星モバイルディスプレイ株式會社 | Organic electroluminescent display device and manufacturing method thereof |
JP2007326259A (en) * | 2006-06-07 | 2007-12-20 | Yoshida Industry Co Ltd | Method for producing display and display |
KR101232157B1 (en) | 2006-06-09 | 2013-02-12 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Apparatus for Testing LCD Panel |
FR2902105B1 (en) | 2006-06-13 | 2008-09-12 | Essilor Int | METHOD FOR BONDING A FILM TO A CURVED SUBSTRATE |
TWI421607B (en) | 2006-08-24 | 2014-01-01 | Creator Technology Bv | Permeation barrier on flexible device |
JP2008060376A (en) | 2006-08-31 | 2008-03-13 | Optrex Corp | Jig for manufacturing cof substrate |
KR100769425B1 (en) * | 2006-09-21 | 2007-10-22 | 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 | Organic light-emitting display device |
CN101518168B (en) | 2006-09-22 | 2011-12-07 | 日本写真印刷株式会社 | Housing case, method for manufacturing the housing case and glass insert forming die used in the method |
KR100872095B1 (en) | 2006-12-19 | 2008-12-05 | 삼성중공업 주식회사 | Apparatus for loading and unloading of automated device |
KR101310757B1 (en) * | 2007-03-16 | 2013-09-25 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Mobile terminal |
TWI456294B (en) | 2007-04-09 | 2014-10-11 | Dexerials Corp | Image display device |
JP2009186957A (en) | 2007-04-09 | 2009-08-20 | Sony Chemical & Information Device Corp | Resin composition and display device |
JP4997594B2 (en) * | 2007-05-17 | 2012-08-08 | Nltテクノロジー株式会社 | Liquid crystal display |
JP4471022B2 (en) * | 2007-06-27 | 2010-06-02 | エプソンイメージングデバイス株式会社 | Electro-optical device substrate and electronic apparatus |
US7760289B2 (en) | 2007-06-27 | 2010-07-20 | Epson Imaging Devices Corporation | Electro-optic device, method of manufacturing electro-optic device and electronic equipment |
JP5094250B2 (en) | 2007-07-10 | 2012-12-12 | 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイイースト | Display device |
JP4469006B2 (en) * | 2007-09-25 | 2010-05-26 | キヤノンアネルバ株式会社 | Manufacturing method of display substrate |
US20090088041A1 (en) | 2007-09-25 | 2009-04-02 | Canon Anelva Corporation | Display substrate manufacturing method and vacuum processing apparatus |
JP5213407B2 (en) | 2007-10-10 | 2013-06-19 | 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイイースト | Liquid crystal display device and organic EL display device |
CN101306620B (en) | 2008-01-02 | 2012-01-18 | 苏州康威机电有限公司 | Regulating device for veneer egistration on veneer plate |
KR100864407B1 (en) | 2008-01-09 | 2008-10-20 | (주)에이엠피테크놀로지 | Resistive touch being coupled with mold structure and manufacturing method thereof |
US8123894B2 (en) | 2008-05-07 | 2012-02-28 | Apple Inc. | 3-dimensional curved substrate lamination |
CN102119077A (en) | 2008-08-13 | 2011-07-06 | 富士通株式会社 | Film sticking device, film sticking method, and electronic paper manufacturing method |
JP2010072502A (en) | 2008-09-22 | 2010-04-02 | Hitachi Displays Ltd | Liquid crystal display device |
KR20100041450A (en) | 2008-10-14 | 2010-04-22 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Touch screen pannel and fabrication method thereof |
US20110199348A1 (en) | 2008-10-17 | 2011-08-18 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Display device and manufacturing method thereof |
TW201017499A (en) * | 2008-10-27 | 2010-05-01 | Tpk Touch Solutions Inc | Manufacturing method and structure of curved-surface capacitive touch panel |
WO2010101961A2 (en) | 2009-03-02 | 2010-09-10 | Apple Inc. | Techniques for strengthening glass covers for portable electronic devices |
US20100253902A1 (en) * | 2009-04-07 | 2010-10-07 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Liquid crystal display device and manufacturing method thereof |
US20100284132A1 (en) * | 2009-05-08 | 2010-11-11 | Taiwan Green Point Enterprises Co., Ltd. | Touch panel module and method of making the same |
KR101084152B1 (en) * | 2009-07-23 | 2011-11-17 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Display device |
CN101996535A (en) | 2009-08-25 | 2011-03-30 | 精工爱普生株式会社 | Electro-optical device and electronic apparatus |
TWI433071B (en) | 2009-09-22 | 2014-04-01 | Ind Tech Res Inst | 3-d curved display device, fabrication method thereof and plastic display panel |
KR101319129B1 (en) * | 2009-11-04 | 2013-10-17 | 코니카 미놀타 어드밴스드 레이어즈 인코포레이티드 | Drive mechanism and imaging device using the same |
CN201811892U (en) * | 2009-12-10 | 2011-04-27 | 深圳市欧帝光学有限公司 | Device for testing nose bridge fitting of TiNi shape memory alloy glasses |
US20110261002A1 (en) | 2010-04-27 | 2011-10-27 | Microsoft Corporation | Displaying images on solid surfaces |
WO2011148990A1 (en) * | 2010-05-26 | 2011-12-01 | 旭硝子株式会社 | Transparent surface material having adhesive layer, display device, and manufacturing method for same |
KR101694886B1 (en) | 2010-06-16 | 2017-01-24 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Image display apparatus and organic light emitting display apparatus comprising image shift unit |
US20120051067A1 (en) * | 2010-08-24 | 2012-03-01 | Key Plastics L.L.C. | Lighting display and method of manufacturing same |
KR101886801B1 (en) | 2010-09-14 | 2018-08-10 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | flat panel display integrated touch screen panel |
KR101211371B1 (en) | 2010-09-16 | 2012-12-13 | 주식회사 토비스 | Method for manufacturing display panel with curved shape |
TWI457880B (en) * | 2010-09-30 | 2014-10-21 | E Ink Holdings Inc | Curved display module and display device |
KR101319409B1 (en) | 2010-10-20 | 2013-10-18 | 이기홍 | The manufacture-method and apparatus of curvature-style touch screen galss |
KR20120044501A (en) * | 2010-10-28 | 2012-05-08 | 삼성모바일디스플레이주식회사 | Display device having a touch screen panel and manufacturing method of the same |
US8808483B2 (en) * | 2010-11-05 | 2014-08-19 | Apple Inc. | Method of making a curved touch panel |
TWI408445B (en) | 2010-11-17 | 2013-09-11 | Hannstar Display Corp | Touch screen display apparatus and cover lens and assembling method thereof |
US10781135B2 (en) | 2011-03-16 | 2020-09-22 | Apple Inc. | Strengthening variable thickness glass |
US9866660B2 (en) * | 2011-03-21 | 2018-01-09 | Apple Inc. | Electronic devices with concave displays |
US20120275024A1 (en) | 2011-04-27 | 2012-11-01 | Rockwell Collins, Inc. | Polarizer assembly with adhesive layers |
KR101320384B1 (en) * | 2011-06-30 | 2013-10-23 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Flexible display panel and the display apparatus comprising the flexible display panel |
US10061356B2 (en) * | 2011-06-30 | 2018-08-28 | Samsung Display Co., Ltd. | Flexible display panel and display apparatus including the flexible display panel |
KR20130015230A (en) | 2011-08-02 | 2013-02-13 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Display device and method for manufacturing the same |
US8929085B2 (en) | 2011-09-30 | 2015-01-06 | Apple Inc. | Flexible electronic devices |
US8773848B2 (en) | 2012-01-25 | 2014-07-08 | Apple Inc. | Fused glass device housings |
KR20140002470A (en) | 2012-06-29 | 2014-01-08 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Display device, manufacturing method of the same and manufacturing device of the same |
US9439315B2 (en) | 2012-06-29 | 2016-09-06 | Samsung Display Co., Ltd. | Display device, and method and apparatus for manufacturing the same |
KR20140046839A (en) | 2012-10-11 | 2014-04-21 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Flexible display device |
JP6136527B2 (en) | 2012-10-29 | 2017-05-31 | 大日本印刷株式会社 | Optical laminate for front surface of in-cell touch panel liquid crystal element and in-cell touch panel type liquid crystal display device using the same |
KR101973778B1 (en) | 2012-11-16 | 2019-04-30 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Flexible display device and method of manufacturing cover window of the same |
KR101975490B1 (en) | 2013-02-18 | 2019-05-08 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Cover window and display device with the cover window |
-
2013
- 2013-02-08 KR KR1020130014650A patent/KR20140002470A/en unknown
- 2013-05-30 KR KR1020130062110A patent/KR102147842B1/en active IP Right Grant
- 2013-06-27 TW TW103125267A patent/TWI596761B/en active
- 2013-06-27 EP EP16157972.7A patent/EP3050704B1/en active Active
- 2013-06-27 EP EP17198807.4A patent/EP3296108B1/en active Active
- 2013-06-27 TW TW102122915A patent/TWI590439B/en active
- 2013-06-27 TW TW109123879A patent/TWI779317B/en active
- 2013-06-27 EP EP13173931.0A patent/EP2679388B1/en active Active
- 2013-06-27 TW TW106109234A patent/TWI702720B/en active
- 2013-06-28 CN CN201710145136.5A patent/CN106626719B/en active Active
- 2013-06-28 CN CN201320866188.9U patent/CN203983240U/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 2013-06-28 CN CN201310269434.7A patent/CN103531103B/en active Active
- 2013-06-28 CN CN201320382309.2U patent/CN203415180U/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 2013-06-28 CN CN201410386628.XA patent/CN104123890B/en active Active
- 2013-06-28 CN CN201710930417.1A patent/CN108172119B/en active Active
- 2013-06-28 US US13/931,795 patent/US11523522B2/en active Active
- 2013-12-31 KR KR1020130169392A patent/KR101849656B1/en active IP Right Review Request
-
2015
- 2015-07-08 US US14/794,720 patent/US11627670B2/en active Active
- 2015-07-17 US US14/803,025 patent/US10194538B2/en active Active
-
2022
- 2022-12-05 US US18/062,014 patent/US20230095460A1/en active Pending
-
2023
- 2023-04-07 US US18/297,582 patent/US20230247776A1/en active Pending
- 2023-04-07 US US18/297,586 patent/US20230247777A1/en active Pending
Also Published As
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US20230247776A1 (en) | Display device, and method and apparatus for manufacturing the same | |
US11564321B2 (en) | Display device, and method and apparatus for manufacturing the same | |
US10315400B2 (en) | Laminating device and laminating method using the same | |
US10137672B2 (en) | Lamination device and method | |
KR101973779B1 (en) | Method and device of manufacturing flexible display device | |
KR102117613B1 (en) | Lamination apparatus and method for lamination | |
US10234602B2 (en) | Organic light-emitting display apparatus | |
KR101690146B1 (en) | Organic light emitting display device and method of manufacturing thereof | |
US10456939B2 (en) | Cell cutting device for display devices | |
KR102096046B1 (en) | Display deivce and manufacturing method of the same | |
KR20160006334A (en) | Manufacturing apparatus for a display apparatus and manufacturing method for the same | |
KR20080090945A (en) | Organic light emitting display apparatus | |
KR102241849B1 (en) | Apparatus for manufacturing display apparatus and method of manufacturing display apparatus | |
KR20150019144A (en) | Window removing apparatus | |
KR20210025763A (en) | Apparatus and method for manufacturing a display apparatus |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: SAMSUNG DISPLAY CO., LTD., KOREA, REPUBLIC OF Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:LEE, KYUNG-SU;HAN, KWAN-YOUNG;KIM, JONG-HWAN;AND OTHERS;REEL/FRAME:063376/0362 Effective date: 20131007 |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: DOCKETED NEW CASE - READY FOR EXAMINATION |